A Grammar of The Vulgate (BW New OCR and Margin Cropped - 19 Jan 2017 For All PDF

A GRAMMAR
OF
THE VULGATE
Oxford University Press
London Edinburgh Glasgow Copenhagen
New York Toronto Melbourne Cape Town
Bombay Calcutta Madras Shanghai
Humphrey Milford Publisher to the U n iv ersity
A GRAMMAR
OF
THE VULGATE
BEING
AN INTRODUCTION TO
THE STUDY OF THE LATIN ITY OF
Z h c Dulgnte 3B11>le
BY
W. E. P L A T E R
M.A., Hector of Halstock
AND
H. J. W H IT E
D.D., Dean of Christ Church
OXFORD
AT TH E CLARENDON PRESS
1926
Omnis lingua confitebitur Deo.
Rem. xiv. ii.
Am a Scripturas, et amabit te sapientia.
Hieron. Ep. ad Demetriad. 20.
PREFACE
T he Vulgate Bible has of late become increasingly
a subject of stud}‫׳׳‬, not only amongst members of .the
Roman Catholic Church, but amongst students of other
denominations, and many whose interests are philological
or literary rather than theological.
Amongst candidates for Holy Orders in the Church of
England the decline in the study of Greek, sad though
it is, has resulted in an increased demand for knowledge
of the Vulgate. But its Latin, though simple and stately,
presents constant pitfalls for those who approach it with no
other knowledge of the language than that gained in the
study of the classical authors. The grammar of the
Vulgate is a thing, not indeed apart by itself, but belonging
to the ages that produced it, and differing—sometimes
widely—from the Latin Grammar taught in our Schools.
W e therefore make no apology for this book; we believe
that for students it will supply a real need, and that for
general readers it may unlock many a hard passage in the
Bible and explain many a quaint phrase in the Prayer
Book.
W e are not aware that any similar work exists in
English ; but we gratefully acknowledge our obligations to
Kaulen’s Handbuch zur Vulgata} which we have fre
quently consulted. A t the same time we must qlaim that
our own work is independent; in such a subject as this,
resemblance does not imply plagiarism. A ll Latin 1
1 Sprachliches Handbuch zur biblischen Vulgata : von Dr. Franz Kaulen
(Mainz, 1870; second edition, Freiburg-in-Breisgau, 1904). Of equal value
to us has been H. Roensch’s Itala und Vulgata (Marburg and Leipzig, 1869).
vi Preface
Grammars run more or less on the same lines ; and when
the field of illustration is restricted to one book, the
instances selected are bound to be much the same. But
we have done our best to study the sacred text itself,
assisted mainly by a Grammar of New Testament Greek;
and the examples illustrating our rules have been obtained
by wading through unnumbered columns of a Concordance ;
in the New Testament the Oxford critical edition of the
Vulgate has doubtless given us many illustrations unknown
to Kaulen.
We also owe much to the kindness of friends, especially
Dr. E. A . Sonnenschein, Emeritus Professor of'Latin and
Greek in the University of Birmingham, and Mr. F. W. Hall,
Fellow and Senior Tutor of St. John’s College, Oxford ;
it was the latter who directed our attention to the epoch
making work of Loefstedt.1
A s to the share which each of us has had in the w ork: —
Mr. Plater is responsible for the general design and for the
greater part of the text, the Dean of Christ Church for
a more or less rigid supervision of the whole, for the
revision of the lists of instances, and for much of the matter
in the foot-notes; but each has trespassed freely on the
other’s ground. Should reviewers award the book any
praise, each will gladly appropriate it ; should there be
blame, each will gladly pass it on to his colleague. Of one
thing Ave feel quite sure—that neither of us could have
written the book without the help given by the other.
W. E. P L A T E R .
H. J. W H IT E .
May 1926.1
1 Philologischer Kommentar zur Peregrinatio Aetheriae; von E. Lüfstedt,

19 η .
CONTENTS
I N T R O D U C T I O N ...........................................................................
§§ i-8. Latin Versions, 1-5. Origin and Composition of the
Vulgate, 6-8.
I. T H E F O R E IG N E L E M E N T - H E B R E W . . . 11
§§9-32. Proper Names, 10-13. Common Nouns, 14-16. Number,
Gender, Case, 17-22. Adjectives, 23. Pronouns, 24. Verbs,
25-30. Repetition, 31-2.
II. T H E F O R E IG N E L E M E N T - G R E E K . . . . 28
§§ 3 3 5 4 ‫ · ־‬General Influence, 33-6. Lexical (Nouns, Adjectives,
Verbs), 37-42. Inflexional, 43. Syntactical, 4454‫ ־‬.
III. N A T IV E E L E M E N T -F O R M OF W O R D S . . 41
§§ 5 5 8 1 ‫ · ־‬Characteristics of Popular Latin, 55-7. Orthography,
58-61. Lengthened ·Terminations, 62-5. Nouns, 66-8.
Adjectives, 69-77. Verbs (derived, compound, in -ficare),
78-81.
IV .L E X IC A L P E C U L IA R IT IE S — M E A N IN G OF
W O R D S ........................................................ 54
^ 82-9. Nouns, 83. Adjectives, 84. Verbs, 85-6. Adverbs,
Particles, 87-8. Tendency, 89.
V. IN F L E X IO N A L A N D O T H E R P E C U L I A R IT IE S . 65
§§ 90-102. Nouns, Adjectives, Verbs, 91-3. Other Irregularities :
Adjectives, 94. Adverbs, 95. Pronouns, 96-102.
V I. S Y N T A X —T H E S IM P L E S E N T E N C E . . . 75
§§ 103-31. Agreement, 105. Want of Article, 106. How supplied,
107. The Noun. Cases: Nominative, 108; Impersonal
Verbs, 109. Accusative, n o ; with Prepositions, i n .
Dative, 112. Genitive, 113-14. Ablative, 11516‫ ; ־‬with Pre
positions, 117‫־‬
viii Contents
V II. S Y N T A X OF T H E V E R B ...............................................103
§§ 118-31. Indicative Mood—Tenses of, nS-24. Imperative, .
125. Subjunctive, 126. Infinitive, 127. Participles, 128.
Gerund Noun, 129. Gerund Adjective (Gerundive), 130.
Supines, 131.
V III. S Y N T A X —D O U B L E AN D C O M P L E X S E N T E N C E S 117
§§ 132-44. Double Sentence, 132. Complex, 133-44. Noun
Clause, as Subject, 134. Object : Dependent Statement,
134; Question, 135; Exclamation, 136; Desire, 137.
Adjective (or ‘ Oui 5)-Clause, 138. Adverb-Clause, 139-44:
si, 140; cum, 141 ; dujn, 142; other Conjunctions, 143;
Unusual Subjunctive, 144.
C O N C L U SIO N ............................................135
IN D E X OF S U B J E C T S ......................................................... 1 3 9
IN D E X OF G R E E K W O R D S . . . . . .142
IN D E X OF LATIN W O R D S ............................................ . . 143
IN D EX OF PASSAGES OF S C R IP T U R E . . . . 151
IN T R O D U C T I O N
§ 1. The title on the Cross, in its threefold language—

.the vernacular Aramaic, the current Greek, the official
Latin—is at once an epitome of the Divine preparation in
history for our Lord’s Advent, and a prophecy of the
extension of His K in gdom ; a high-water mark of the
world’s past history, and a foreshadowing of its history for
fifteen hundred years to come.1
The Praeparatio Euangelica was threefold—·religious,
intellectual, social; the Hebrew religion, the Greek culture
and speech, the Roman world-embracing Empire. The
Hebrew deposit passed through the Greek medium into
Latin hands. The Jew received the 'O racles of G o d ’ as
a trust for‘ mankind ; their translation, first into Greek and
later into Latin, was needed before this purpose could be
fulfilled.
The conquests of Alexander the Great had made Greek
a universal language; and through the gradual labours
of the Septuagint translators at Alexandria the Hebrew
Scriptures (with later additions) were rendered into the
vernacular or spoken Greek and thus made known
throughout the world.
§ 2. But later a new and still mightier power arose—
Rome, which, shortly before the coming of Christ, had
1 ‘ I say nothing of the Jews, the Greeks, and the Romans, peoples whom
the Lord has dedicated to His faith by the title written on His cross’,
Jerome, Ep. ad Heliod. (lx. 4).
2G 42 B
2 Grammar of the Vulgate
assumed the form of an Empire and had become mistress
of the known world. Latin, therefore, now became the
language of official intercourse, of judicial proceedings, and
of military life throughout the most distant provinces of
the Empire.
Even in the Greek Testament itself, in the records of the
life and death of Christ, and of the travels and imprison
ment of St. Paul, ‘ the Roman citizen', traces of the great
power may be seen in the numerous technical Latin terms
introduced into the Greek.
§ 3. A t first, indeed, there was no need for a Latin
version of the Scriptures, even at R om e; the prevailing
language there was Greek. It was affected by the upper
classes; and the commercial and lower classes, especially
the Jews, spoke it in a debased form, as the language most
easily understood. Hence the early Roman Church was
Greek in its Scriptures, liturgy, and writings; not only
St. Paul, but St. Ignatius (writing about A. D. 112) addressed
it in Greek. Even in the middle of the third century
Cornelius, its Bishop, wrote in Greek to Fabius of Corinth 1;
and Eusebius mentions as something noticeable that letters
written by Cyprian of Carthage to the Asiatic Churches
were in Latin.2 Victor (Bp. of Rome, e. 189-199) is
mentioned by Jerome3 as the first author of theological
treatises in Latin. !
But as Christianity spread to the remote provinces of the
Empire, the new environment called for a version of the
Scriptures in the spoken language of the people.
§ 4. The birthplace of Latin Christianity and, with it,
1 The letter is given in Eusebius. H .E . vi. 43.
2 Ibid.
3 De nir illustr, liii, i Tertullianus presbyter, nunc cjemum primus post
Victorem et Apollonium Latinorum ponitur.’
Introduction 3
of the Latin Scriptures and Christian literature, was Africa.
It is true that the dearth of non-Christian contemporary
literature leaves it uncertain whether the somewhat florid
style of the first Christian latinity, once distinguished as
4African5, was not personal to the writers (e. g. Tertullian),
or perhaps common in the provinces throughout the
Western Empire—the style already censured by Cicero and
Quintilian as Asiatic or Asianic, in contradistinction to
Attic. But at all events the earliest Latin versions of the
Scriptures originated in Africa. A n African type of text—
possibly in more than one form—was known to and quoted
by Tertullian and Cyprian, both residents at Carthage; it
was marked by rudeness and simplicity ,kind by a close and
even slavish adherence to the Greek original.
A s time went on there arose other translations; these
‘ Old L atin 5versions,—i. e. versions which were made before
the time of Jerome, or far away from his influence—have
been divided by Westcott and H ort1 into three classes:
(1) African, agreeing generally with the type of text
quoted by Cyprian (200-258).
(2) European, current in Western Europe, and agreeing
more or less with the quotations in the Latin
version of Irenaeus.
(3) Italian (i. e. connected with North Italy), a revision
of the European, partly to give the latinity
a smoother aspect, partly to bring the text into
conformity with the customary type of Greek M SS.
It is only fair, however, to state that many modern
scholars, following the example of Dr. F. C. Burlcitt,2 doubt
the existence of the Italian family altogether.
1■‫׳‬Introduction, p. 78.
2 The Old Latin and the Itala, in the Cambridge Texts and Studies, iv
(1896).
B 2
§ 5. A ll these versions were made at a time when the
classical period—■ the so-called Golden and Silver Ages—of
Latin literature had long passed away. But a living
language is never stationary or bound to its own past.
Side by side with the literary language, coexisting with it
and finally prevailing over it, was the speech of everyday
life, of the field and the camp, of the street, the workshop,
and the home ; this was referred to by Cicero and Quintilian
as lingua uulgata or rustic a, sermo quotidianus, pleberis,
rusticus, tierbum castrense; and it is in this dialect that the
Latin versions of the Scriptures are written.
This popular speech is interesting as showing the vitality
of L atin ; it forms a link between ancient and modern
times. On the one hand it preserves archaic and obsolete
words, current in Plautus and Terence, or in the ante-
classical age, i. e. before 80 B. C .; on the other it forms the
basis of the great Romance languages of modern Europe.
These languages are not Classical Latin, corrupted by an
intermixture of popular forms ; they are the popular Latin
alone, the products of the gradual development of the
common Roman speech.
And still further; the popular Latin, as seen in the
versions and in the ecclesiastical writers, is the source of
our common speech, of our modern Christian vocabulary,
and of our theological terminology.
With the exception of the Gothic and Slavonic, the Latin
is the parent of all the versions of modern Europe,1 and
1 Our own Authorized Version owes a great deal to the Vulgate; to give
a few instances :—publican is from the Latin publicanus, not from the Greek
τ (λ ώ ν ψ ; Calvary in Lk. 23. 33 is from the i locum qui dicitur Calvariae1‫ ־‬of
the Vulgate; charily in I Cor. 13 is from caritas not from ά β πη ; be it fa r
from thee in Mt. 16. 22 = the Vulgate absit a ie rather than the Greek ϊ λ 6ώ *
σ ο ι ; the one fold of Joh. 10. 16 is a translation of the Vulgate umtm oiiilc,
not of the Greek μί α πο ί μν η (correctly translated oneßoek in the R.V.).
Introduction 5
has had no small share in determining the combined dignity
and simplicity of their style. Hebrew exists only as the
original language of the Old Testament; Greek has pro
duced no linguistic offspring, and remains as an unimportant
vernacular, not a vehicle of new literature; Latin survives
in its original form as an international literary language,
but also lives again in a new form in modern Christendom.
And further, while the Hebrew and Greek Scriptures, and
even languages, were lost to the West for over a thousand
years, the Latin Scriptures and the literature based on
them remained all through that time the common possession
of every scholar in Europe.
Again, the very rudeness and servile fidelity of the earlier
Latin versions form a valuable witness to the text of the
still earlier Greek and a powerful instrument for restoring
the sacred text to its original purity. Scholars have of
late years been paying increased attention to the ‘ Western
T ex t', and its champions believe that in it we have some
thing very near to the original form of the Scriptures;
whether we accept their conclusions or not we must at any
rate acknowledge its high importance ; and its best witnesses
are to be found amongst the Latin MSS.
§6 . The modern Vulgate is a composite work, only
some parts of which are due to Jerome. It may be arranged
in six divisions, giving his share in an ascending scale.
(1) OLD L a t in , wholly untouched by Jerome, as merely
‘ ecclesiastical’, not ‘ canonical’ : Wisdom, Eccle
siasticus, I and II Maccabees, Baruch.
(2) O l d L a t in , slightly revised, but to an extent hard
to determine: Acts, Epistles, Apocalypse. Here
Jerome left a good deal uncorrected; and in later
M SS. the Vulgate and the Old Latin texts were
often mixed, so that the traces of his revision were
still further obscured,
(3) Free and rapid translation from the C h a l d e e , as
, Jerome calls it: Tobias (i. e. Tobit) and Judith.
The former book was finished in one day, the latter
in a single sitting (lucubratiuncula).
(4) Translation from the S e p t u a g in t : the Psalter. The
Psalter included in the Bible is this earlier or
‘ Gallican*; not the later translation made by
Jerome direct from the Hebrew.
(5) Revision and partial correction of the Old Latin
from the most ancient Greek M SS. available: the
Gospels.
(6) Jerome’s independent translation from the H e b r e w ,
the first ever m ade: the Canonical Books of the
Old Testament, with the exception of the Psalter.
A s to the need and method of his revision of the Gospels,

undertaken at the request of Pope Damasus, Jerome himself
in his prefatory Epistle to that Pontiff speaks of the
numerous Latin translations, and says with pardonable
rhetorical exaggeration that there were almost as many
types of text as there were MSS. ‘ tot sunt [exemplaria]
paene quot codices*.1 Pie goes on to speak of his pious
but perilous task in seeking the truth from the fountain
head and collating the Latin text with the most ancient
Greek manuscripts ; he made no more alterations than were
absolutely necessary to correct the sense. The Gospels
appeared in A . D. 383.
§ 7. But it is the translation of the Old Testament from
the Hebrew (whereas the previous Latin versions had been
1 The same expression in the Praefatio in losuc‫״‬

Introduction 7
from the L X X translation of the Hebrew) which displays
Jerome's skilful and masterly workmanship most con
spicuously, and has laid the Church of all succeeding days
under the deepest debt of ‘ remembrance and thankfulness'
to h im ;1 this task extended, with intervals, over fifteen
years of his life, and involved laborious and often costly
acquirement of the Hebrew tongue. The many differences
between a Semitic and an Indo-European language, and the
comparative absence in Hebrew of many things to which
Latin is accustomed (e. g. connecting links between clauses,
inflexion of nouns, conjugation and tenses of verbs), made
Jerome's task one of supreme difficulty. Yet it was accom
plished, especially in the narrative portions, with supreme
success. Jerome's version is at once correct and natural,
accurate and idiomatic. The force of the original is seized
and brought out with the skill of the Hebrew student, and
the Latin is written with the polished ease and sure touch
of the cultivated and scholarly native, accustomed to its use
from his earliest childhood.2
Whenever there is any obscurity in the Latin, it is in
almost every case the fault of the original, arising from the
rareness of the expression or the obscurity of the text.
On the whole the Vulgate Old Testament is a finer transla
tion than even our own Authorized Version; where the
two agree, the latter is, directly or indirectly, derived from
the former; where they differ, the Vulgate is usually found
on the side of later and fuller scholarship.
Jerome has the tantalizing habit of translating the same
Hebrew word by different Latin equivalents; and he also
1 See the prefatory letter of ‘ The translators to the reader’ in our

own A.V.
2 ‘ paene ab ipsis incunabulis ‫( י‬Praefatio in librum lob).
renders proper names b y their etymological signification 1—
the custom of the L X X being often the exact opposite.
A s we might expect from a traveller, a long resident, and
a writer on the topography of Palestine, Jerome has an eye
for the natural features of the land, its fountains, rivers,
torrent-beds,2 its mountains, hills, valleys, plains, rocks, and
deserts; he is aware of the different terms employed, and
gives generally the appropriate Latin equivalent. In this
and in many other ways he often gives a graphic touch
which renders the narrative more lifelike.
§ 8. Lastly, a faithful and reverent translation of a sacred
book, or collection of books, cannot fail to be affected in its
vocabulary by the subject-matter and the ruling ideas of
the original. The Old Testament is permeated by the
thought of the all-pervading presence and activity3 of God—
a God at once of righteousness and mercy. Hence the
richness of the Hebrew vocabulary in words expressing
the ideas of law, sin, and judgem ent; of repentance, prayer,
sacrifice, and reconciliation; of a covenant, made, broken,
1 This made passages in the Old Testament much more intelligible in the
Latin than they are in the English ; e. g. I Sam. (I Reg.) 23.28 1Saul returned
from pursuing after David, and went against the Philistines: therefore they
called that place Sela-hammahlekoth’ is not very illuminating in the English ;
but the Vulgate * Reuersus est ergo Saul desistens persequi Dauid, et perrexit
in occursum Philisthinorum : propter hoc uocauerunt locum illum, Petram
diuidentem‫ ן‬is perfectly clear.
2 Torrens occurs about 120 times in the Vulgate Bible (only once in the
N.T., i.e. Joh. 18. 1) i torrent is not found once in our own A .V . Torrens
is the rushing, boiling stream; the Hebr. nachal includes the (sometimes
dry) river-bed into which the torrens flows : cf. I Kgs. (Ill Reg.) 15. 13
1combussit [simubcrum] in torrente Cedron 1; ih. 17. 3. 4 ‘ abscondere in
torrente Carith—et ibi de torrente bibes.'
s Hence the constant use offieri, from the first creative fiat at which light
sprang into being, to the closing factum est of the last chapters of the
Apocalypse. Factum est (uerbum Domini a d . . .) ushers in each successive
Divine revelation to the prophets of Israel, each manifestation of the Divine
mercy in Christ.
Introduction 9
and renewed; of communion established, forfeited, and
restored. Words expressing all these ideas—in many cases
passing first into the L X X —were bound to find a place in
the Latin Old Testament.
The same is true, in an even deeper sense, of the New
Testament. The true meaning of the words can only be
brought out by supplying ‘ of G o d ’, 4of Christ‫׳‬, as a con
te x t: such words as lex, uerbum, uoluntas, even ch ristus;
also discipuhis, apostolus, etc., require to be so supplemented
to express their full meaning.1
A ll this involved a strain upon the resources of the Latin
language ; if even the wealth and splendour of Attic Greek
were insufficient to set forth the unsearchable riches of
Christ, how much more was this true of classical Latin?
Cicero shrank from rendering σ ω τ η ρ by salitator2; it needed
1 The influence of Christianity in raising words from an earthly to
a heavenly meaning has been well described by Trench (Study o f Words,
pp. 57 fl.):—‘ The Gospel of Christ, as it is the redemption of man, so is it
in a multitude of instances the redemption of his word, freeing it from the
bondage of corruption, that it should no longer be subject to vanity, nor
stand any more in the service of sin or of the world, but in the service of
God and of His truth . . . There were “ angels” before heaven had been
opened, but these only earthly messengers ; “ martyrs” also, or witnesses,
but these not unto blood, nor yet for God’s highest truth ; “ apostles’’, but
sent of men ; “ evangels ” , but not of the kingdom of Heaven ; “ advocates ” ,
but not “ with the Father Trench traces the same influence on the words
humilitas, paradisus, regeneratio, sacramentum, and mysterium. On the
other hand, he points out that the Emperor Tiberius caused the introduction
of new words to express hitherto unknown forms of wickedness. He also
mentions words which we owe to Christian Latin : deitas (Augustine; not
in the Vulg., though diuiniias occurs in Rom. 1. 20), passio, compassio,
longanimitas, resipiscentia {resipisco II Tim. 2. 26), soliloquium (coined by
Augustine). It matters little who was the actual inventor ; in such a move
ment as the first reception of the Christian faith these new words have
‘ a free spontaneous birth, seldom or never capable of being referred to one
man more than another, because they belong to all \
2 As to saluator, Martianus Capella (V. 166) says ‘ Cicero soterem salua-
torem noluit nominare ’. Cicero’s own words are ‘ Hoc {σ ω τ η ρ ) quantum
est ? ita magnum ut Latine uno uerbo exprimi non possit’ {Very. 4. 63).
2642 C
IO G ram m ar o f the Vulgate ‫־‬
the Christian use to make it good Latin. And if Christus
and Saluator have to be coined, so too a host of other
words; in the Vulgate the Latin language is impressed
into a new and holier service ; it renders tribute no longer
to Caesar but to Christ.
Augustine insists that the coming of the Saviour made the word good Latin :
*Christus Iesus, id est Christus Salitator; hoc est enim Latine Iesus. Nec
quaerant grammatici quam sit Latinum, sed Christiani quam uerum. Salus
enim Latinum nomen est; saluare et saluator non fuerunt haec Latine,
antequam ucniret Saluator; quando ad Latinos uenit, et haec Latina fecit’
(Serm. 299. 6).
So with redemptor \ how poor is its classical use ( = a contractor)! Only
in the third century does it acquire a legal signification, and then it seems to
denotea pettifogging lawyer (see Ulpian, Dig. I. 16. 9 ; though it is also
used of one who releases a debtor by paying his debt (Ulpian, Dig. X V II. 1.6).
In the Vulgate New Test, it only occurs once (Act. 7. 35 = λ υ τ ρ ω τ ή ς ), of
Moses as a deliverer from bondage; but Jerome uses it frequently in the
Old. Test, in the sense of a redeemer; he also in his 66 Ep. (ad Pam m ach.)
uses the word of Christ ( 1Christus redemptio, idem redemptor ac pretium ’),
as does also Augustine (Scrm . 130. 2). Even Χ ρ ι σ τ ό ς can hardly have been
intelligible when first used in the L X X ; Liddell and Scott quote only
φ ά ρ μα κ α χ ρ ι σ τ ά , ‘ salves’ from classical Greek.
I
T H E FOREIGN ELEM EN T
A. H EBREW
§9. If, in considering the latinity of the Vulgate, we set

aside ordinary Latin—such Latin as might be expected
from the pupil of the Roman Grammarian Donatus, and
from one who reproached himself with being a ‘ Ciceronian,
not a Christian ’ 1—we have two elements in its formation ;
one native, the other foreign.
There is the native element of the popular or spoken
Latin ; and the foreign element—foreign as regards Latin,
native as regards the Scriptures themselves—the influence
of Hebrew and Greek. This foreign element may be con
sidered first, and we will begin in historical order with
Hebrew.
T H E NO UN
§10. Transliteration of Hebrew proper names. Here

the Vulgate mainly follows the L X X , which was the
work of Jews acquainted with the traditional interpretation.
The modern system of vocalization did not exist in a written
form till long after Jerome’s time. The Hebrew alphabet
1 Ep. 22 (ad Enstoch.) ; in 374 Jerome was ill of a fever, and dreamt he
was summoned before the judgement scat of Christ; to his plea that he was
a Christian the Judge returned the answer ‘ Mentiris, Ciceronianus es, non
Christianus; ubi enim thesaurus tuus, ibi et cor tuum’ .
C 2
12 The Foreign Element
consisted only of consonants, though certain weak consonants
were used to represent vowels, particularly at the end of words.
The pronunciation was handed down by oral tradition
(Massor ah), and it was centuries before this was reduced to
a complete written system, purely phonetic in character;
the new vowel signs were not regarded as part of the word,
but were placed outside it, above or below.12 Thus it is only
in a restricted sense that we can speak of vowels and con
sonants in connexion with Hebrew; we mean thereby the
vowels of the later Massoretic pointing, and the consonants
of the original Hebrew alphabet, together with aleph and
ayin, and the semi-vowels vav and jodh.
§ 11. Vowels. The Vulgate, following the L X X , differs
frequently from the later pointing; there is a general
tendency towards assimilation in vowel sounds, with an
occasional preference for a ; thus we have Gedeon, B o o z ;
Badacer ( = Bidkar), B ala (= Bilhah), D alila, Gabaon,
Galaad, H aber? Sisara.
Aleph is a mere emission of the breath ; thus from initial
aleph we have Adam , E l-, Ishbosheth, Jezebel, Hon (Num.
16. 1), Urias.
A yin is represented by the rough breathing, as in Haber,
Hebraeusj by the smooth breathing, as in Abdenago,
Obededom, or by g , as in Gomorrah, gom er (homer).
Vav and Yodh are vocal, as 21 and i, or consonantal, as v 12
1 Hence confusion was always possible, as in the case of Gen. 47. 31,
quoted in Hebr. 11. 21 ; the variation here is between mittak (bed) and
mattch (staff); Jerome rendered the word correctly, as bed, when translating
Genesis, but the Vulg. of Hebr. 11. 21 is a translation of the L X X , which
rendered it staff, and so we have adorciuit fastigium uirgae cuts !
in Prov. 13. 17 there is a similar confusion between malach (messenger)
and mclcch (king) ; the Vulgate has (correct^) nimtius, the L X X . β α σ ι λ (vs.
2 Yet Shakespeare has ‘ an Ebrew J ew ’ (1 Hcnr. IV , Act 11, Sc. iv ); the
initial h is very variable in Latin words, see below, § 60.
A. Hebrew 13
and j respectively. The prevalent practice now is to print
2t and i throughout, thereby following the use of the M S S .;
so Israhel, Isa i ( = Jesse), etc.1
§ 12. Consonants. The simple consonants, b g l m n r ,
remain unchanged ; I s t include ph sh th ; but the Romans,
like the Greeks, found it very hard to pronounce sh, and
consequently rejected it as a barbarism ; 2 thus we have
S au l (Shaul), K is (Kish), Isboseth (Ishbosheth).
Initial h (he) is often dropped; the Greek MSS. of the
L X X were not furnished with breathings till after Jerome’s
time, and it is probably through the L X X , that he accepted
Aggaeus (Α γ γ α ι ο ς ), A lleluia (Α λ λ ε λ ο υ ι α ), Osee (Ωσ η ε ).
Final h, especially in the ending -iah, becomes s, also
through the L X X , as in Abdias (Α β δ ι α ς ) — Obadiah, Sopho-
nias (Σ ο φ ο ν ι α ς ) = Zephaniah. The guttural ch (heth) either
remains, as in Cham (Χ α μ), or else becomes h as in Heua
(Eve), or else is dropped, as in M athusala (Μ α θ ο υ σ ά λ α =
‫) מ ת י ש ל ה‬, Noe (Ν ω ε = ‫)ניח‬.
1 Jerome of course is really Hieronymus, and Jeremiah would be spelt
Hicrcmias in early MSS. ; see below, § 60.
2 Jerome {de noniin. Hebraicis; de Genesi, under 5) w rites: £Siquidem
apud Hebraeos tres sunt S literae : una quae dicitur Samcch D, et simpliciter
legitur, quasi per S nostram literam describatur: alia sin ‫ ש‬, in qua stridor
quidam non nostri sermonis interstrepit : tertia sade ‫ צ‬, quam nostrae aures
penitus reformidant.’ So in the famous case of shibboleth and sibboleth in
Judg. 12. 6, the difference in the Hebrew is between ‫ ש ב ״ ל ת‬and ‫; ס ב ל ת‬
the Vulgate rendered the former scibbolcth and the latter sibboleth. The
L X X . got out of the difficulty by translating ‫ ש ל ל ת‬either as σ ύ ν θ η μα ,
a pass-word (so the A text) or σ τ ά χ υ ?, an ear of corn, which is the real
meaning of the word (so the B text) ; ‫ ס ב ל ת‬they left untranslated, so that
tfie verse ran simply /:at tivav α ύ τ ω , Ε ι πυ ν δ ή σ ύ ν θ η μα (2τ ά χ υ ?). κ α ί ο ύ
κ α τ (ύ θ υ ν ζ ν τ ο υ λ α λ η σ α ι ο υ τ ω ?, κ τ λ . Jerome added the Latin interpretation,
so that the verse in the Vulg. runs £Interrogabant cum : Die ergo Scibboleth,
quod interpretatur spica. Qui respondebat, Sibboleth : eadem littera
spicam exprimere non ualens ’ ; this is a good instance of Jerome’s care in
making the Bible intelligible to his readers.
Η
Most names in -eshaveacc.

A. Hebrew 15
but is more often indeclinable, the cases being expressed by

prepositions. Abraham sometimes has gen. and dat.Abrahae,
but at other times is indeclinable. H ierusalem is inde
clinable, but we have Hierusolyma, -mam, -m ae; it is also
treated as a neuter plur. so that we get H im isolym is ; here,
as with many names, the Vulgate forms have come through
the Greek.
§ 14. Common Nouns. The Hebrew is fond of using
parts of the body (including the 'h o rn '!) in an extended
and figurative sense ; it also uses the soul (nephesh) to
denote the person or individual ; this use is followed in the
Vulgate.
a u r is : reuelabit . . . aurem eorum (Job 36.10; = uncover),
cf. I Sam. (I Reg.) 9. 15.1
brachium : used of God (with excelsum, extentum, sacrum,
etc.), and of man (br. peccatorum, etc.) ; ‘ maledictus
homo qui . . . ponit carnem brachium suum 1 Jer. 17. 5.
ceruix'. durae ceruicis, indurare ceruicem, etc.
cor: includes the understanding; indigens corde Prov. 11.
12, ponere cor (in) = to consider, mark Ps. 48. 13 (47.14),
Isa. 41. 22 ; non ascendent super cor ( = come to mind)
Isa. 65. 17, cf. Act 7. 23, I Cor. 2. 9 ; loquar ad coreius
( = speak comfortably) Hos. 2. 14, cf. Isa. 40. 2 ; in cor
maris ( = in the midst of the sea) Ps. 46. 2 (45. 3).
cornu: cornu salutis meae (= strength, power) Ps. 18. 2
(17. 3) ; common with words like exalted, broken, etc.
Noteworthy is the expression c in cornu filio o le i5 ( = in
a very fruitful hill) Isa. 5. 1 where the Vulgate translates
literally the Hebrew ‘ a horn, the son of fatness'; this
3 In Ps. 40. 6 (39. 7) ‘ mine ears hast thou opened the Hcbr. is literally
‘ ears hast thou digged (or pierced) for me ’, and Jerome in his Psalterium
iuxta Hebrcaos rendered it i aures fodisti mihi ’ ; the Vulgate has ‘ aures
perfecisti m ihi‫ ; ן‬the L X X . however has σ ώ μα de κ α τ η ρ τ ί σ ω μο ι and so it is
quoted in Hebr. 10. 5.
use of £horn ’ for * hill ’ is unique in the Old Testament.
In Dan. and Apoc. it is used figuratively for a king.
facies', with prepositions = before, against, etc.; ‘ a facie
aquilonis’ = from the N. Jer. 1. 13, cf. Gen. 1. 2,
II Cor. 8. 24; confundere, auertere faciem = to shame
a person by refusing his request, I Kgs. ( I ll Reg.) 2.16. 20.
m anus: = action, power, etc., especially of God and His
agents ; figuratively we have ‘ de manu canis . . . inferi’
Ps. 22. 20 (21. 21), 49. 15 (48. 16), £in manus gladii’ Ps.
63. 10 (62. 11); ‘ implere manum ’ = to consecrate, Jud.
17. 5, 12, I Kgs. ( I l l Reg.) 13. 33.
oculus: used even of sightless things; ‘ in oculis solis . . .
throni’ II Sam. (II Reg.) 12. 11, Apoc. 1. 4 (conspectu).
os: ‘ exasperare os Dom ini’ I Sam. (I Reg.) 12. 14; £im
mutare os suum’ ( = to change his behaviour) I Sam.
(I Reg.) 21. 13; £usque ad o s’ (= from end to end)
II Kgs. (IV Reg.) 21. 16, but see 10. 21 where the same
Hebrew is translated £a summo usque ad summum’ ;
£os gladii ’ (from its devouring) = the edge of the sword,
very frequent.
pes : = haunt, resting-place ; £ubi sit pes eius ’ I Sam.
(I Reg.) 23. 22 ; secus pedes Gamalihel Act. 22. 3.
uir\ — quisque, each one; reuertatur uir in domum suam
I Kgs. ( I ll Reg.) 12. 24, cf. E x. 11. 2, Isa. 3. 5, 14. 18,
Jer. 31. 34, Zach. 3. 10, 14. 13.
anim a: ‘ omnis anima quae ederit sanguinem ’ Lev. 7. 27:
£moriatur anima m ea’ ( = let me die) Num. 23. 10 ; cf.
Act. 2. 41. In Ps. 105 (104). 18 the Hebr. has ‘ his
soul (i e. he) came into iron ’, and so the A .V . ‘ he was
laid in iron ’, and R.V. ‘ he was laid in chains of iron ’ ;
Jerome, in his translation of the Psalter from the Hebrew,1
1 A convenient edition of this Psalter is now obtainable; Psalterium iuxla
Hebraeos Hieronymi, ed. J. M. Harden, S.P.C.K ., 1922.
A. Hebi'ezv 17
rendered 4in ferrum uenit anima eius ’, and the L X X

σ ί δ η ρ ο υ δ ι η λ θ ε ν η ψ υ χ η α υ τ ο υ . But the Vulgate Psalter
had 4ferrum pertransiit animam eius’, whence came the
oft-quoted Prayer Book form of the verse 4the iron
entered into his soul ’.
§ 150 Length or duration of Time is denoted in Hebrew
by the use of 4days ‫ י‬or 4years 5; the Vulgate frequently
follows this use, e. g. 4in diebus m eis’ ( = all my days, as
long as I live), Ps. 116 (114). 2 ; 4post dies ’ ( = after a while)
I Kgs. ( I ll Reg.) 17.7 ; 4dies super dies regis adiciesJ ( = pro
long his life) Ps. 61. 6 (60. 7) ; 4longitudo dierum ’ ( = long
life) Ps. 91 (90), 16, 4in longitudinem dierum ( = for ever)
Ps. 23 (22). 6. 4Post dies et annum’ ( = for days beyond
a year R.V., many days and years A.V.) Isa. 32. 10 ; 4annos
uitae adponent tibi (= long life A.V.) Prov. 3. 2 ; ‘ heri et
nudiustertius5 ( = formerly, heretofore) Gen. 31. 2 etc.
§ 16. Repetition: the Hebrew gives a precise number where
we should use a general term ; e. g. ‘ tribus uicibus ’ ( = often‫־‬
times A.V.) Job 33. 29 ; the Hebr. is 1two steps (yea) three ’,
and the R.V. 1twice, yea thrice ’. In Ps. 80. 5 (79. 6), how
ever, the 4tripliciter’ by which Jerome translated ‫ ש ל י ש‬in
his Psalt. iuxta Hebr., was already turned into the vague
term 4in mensura J in the Vulg. Psalter and the L X X ; the
A .V . has *in great measure and R.V. 1in large measure’.
Other nouns are used in Hebrew out of their literal sense ;
we can give but a few examples here:
adeps\ 4adeps frumenti5( = the finest wheat) Ps. 81 (80). 17,
147. 14.
angulus : * anguli populorum ’ ( = the chief men) Jud. 20. 2,
cf. I Sam. (I Reg.) 14. 38, and 4in caput anguli’ Ps. 118
(117). 22 ; so the corner stone (lapis angularis) was the
chief stone Isa. 28. 16 etc.
2G-12 D
fu n is and funiculus : the measuring line became the portion
measured ; so 1funes ceciderunt mihi in praeclaris5 Ps.
16 (15). 6, cf. Jos. 17. 5 ; so joined with 1possessio, sors
etc-; cf. Mic. 2. 5.
mare : usually = the West (the Mediterranean), c f.4mareet
meridiem possidebit5 Dt. 03. 23 ; but = the South c ab
aquilone et m ari5 Ps. 107 (106). 3, though some critics
doubt the text here.
sermo, uerbum : = thing, matter; 4excepto sermone Uriae
Plethaei’ I Kgs. ( Ill Reg.) 15.5; 4quomodo palam factum
est uerbum istud?' E x . 2. 14; 4numquid non uerbum
est?' ( = is there not a cause?) I Sam. (I Reg.)
17. 29.
uia, sem ita: especially in plur., the ways or paths of the
Lord ; hence, the right way, the way for man to walk
in ; frequent in Pss., as 25 (24). 4, cf. I Sam. (I Reg.)
12. 23, Act. 13. 10. So in the N.T., especially Acts
(2. 28, 9. 2 etc.), of the (Christian) Way.
rock : this term is frequently applied to Jehovah in Hebrew ;
the L X X rejected it as anthropomorphic, and petra is
not once used of God in the whole Vulgate Psalter,
though it occurs in Jerome's Psalterhtm iuxta Hebr.
§ 17. Hebraisms in number. In the poetical books
many abstract nouns are used in the plur. in concrete sense,
e. g. altitudines (Ps. 95 (9444 .(‫ ׳‬altitudines montium’ — the
peaks of the mountains), benedictiones, misericordiae, salutes,
etc. We cannot say that these are un-Latin, but only that
their origin in each particular case is Hebrew.
But there are other plurals which are not really Latin at
all, but are simply literal renderings of the Hebrew, e. g.
carnes Lev. 4. i i , uir sanguinum II Sam. (II Reg.) 16. 7.
§18. Hebraisms in gender‫״‬ Fern, for neut.: irmcim
A . Hebrew 19
petii a Domino, hanc requiram ’ Ps. 27 (26). 4 ; cf. c pro

hasi Ps. 32 (31). 6, and also Ps. 119 (118). 50, 56 ; it is as
if res were understood in Latin ; but the fern, is in each case
found in the L X X .
§ 19. Hebraisms in case. Loose Nominative. A
nom. is found out of construction, either at the beginning
of a sentence (nominatimis pendens), or in apposition to an
oblique case. This is easy in Hebrew, because the Hebrew
noun is practically uninflected. The irregularity is found,
in the Latin Bible, mainly in the Apocalypse ; e. g. for nom.
pendens see Apoc. 3. 12 (‘ Qui uicerit, faciam ilium J), 6. 4, 8,
but also Mt. 10. 32, and in the Old Test. Ps. 11. 4 (10. 5),
18. 30 (17. 3 1 );1 for apposition Apoc. 2. 13 (cin diebus
Antipas, testis meus fidelis ’), cf. 7. 4, 5, 8. 9, and possibly
II Cor. 13. 3. The Hebrew word for ‘ saying' is also used
loosely, and so in the Vulg. we have ‘ dicens ‫ ״‬treated as it
indeclinable ; so ‘ uidi alterum angelum ‫־‬. . . dicens 5 (Apoc.
14. ό , 7 ; cf. 11. 1).
§ 20. Qualitative Genitive. This is the Hebrew ‘ con
struct state ‫נ‬, in which the former, not the latter, of two
nouns is inflected (‘ man‫־‬of blood5 not ‘ man df-bloodJ) ; the
gen. then becomes equivalent to an adjective, e. g. c son of
peace ’ = a peaceful man * sons of disobedience ’ = dis
obedient men Eph. 2. 2. This construction is frequent in
the Psalms, e. g. £uirga directionis ’ = an upright sceptre Ps.
45. 6 (44. 7), cf. Hebr. 1. 8, 'brachium uirtutis1 = a mighty
arm Ps. 89.10 (88. 11), * mortuos saeculi ’ = those who have
1 In some cases, where the Hebrew has been literally rendered in the
L X X , the Vulg. Latin has been corrected ; in Act. 7. 40, however, the
nom. pendens i Moses enim hie . . . nescimus quid factum sit ei ’ (so almost
all MSS.) has survived; but when Jerome later was translating Exodus
from the Hebrew he turned the passage into correct Latin (‘ Mosi enim huic
uiro . . . nescimus quid acciderit’ (Exod. 32. r, cf. 23).
D2
been long dead Ps. 143. 4 (142. 3 ); in the New Test, it has
come in through the Greek, e. g. ‘ uas electionis ’ Act. 9. 15
( = σ κ ε υ ο ς ε κ λ ο γ η ς ). It is frequent with the name of God,
or the Evil One ; so ‘ montes D e iJ = goodly mountains
Ps. 36. 6 (35. 7), cf. 80. 10 (79. 11); also 'filius B elia l’ =
a worthless man, I Sam. (I Reg.) 25. 17, cf. 25, and I Sam.
(I Reg.) 1. 16 ; ‘ filius mortis ’ = a man worthy of death, i. e.
who ought to be executed, I Sam. (I Reg.) 20. 31, II Sam.
(II Reg.) 12. 5 ; ‘ filii mortificatorum ’ = those that are
appointed to death Ps. 79 (78). n ; ‘ filius unius anni erat
Saul cum regnare coepisset ’ I Sam. (I Reg.) 13. 1 literally
means that Saul was one year old, which is impossible ; but
the number is not in the Hebrew, or the unrevised L X X ; it
was unknown or has dropped ou t; see the R.V . margin.
The gen. is also used to heighten the meaning of the first
word and raise it to a superlative; so ‘ caelum caeli’, ‘ in
saecula saeculorum’ , etc.
§ 21. The Plebrew Cognate Accusative is frequently

translated by the abb, e. g. ‘ trepidauerunt timore ’ ( = ‘ they
feared a fear’, Hebr.) Ps. 14 (13). 5, 53. 5 (52. 6), ‘ scrutantes
scrutinio’ ( = a diligent search) Ps. 64. 6 (63. 7).
§ 22. Accusative and Ablative after Prepositions.
(1) In with acc. in factitive sense = as, for, to be (Hebr.
‫ ‘ ;) ל‬et sint in signa’ ( = for signs) Gen. 1. 14; with dare,
Aponere etc., ‘ dedi te in lucem gentium ’ Isa. 49. 6, ‘ posui te in
lumen gentibus ut sis in salutem’ Act. 13. 47, cf. Joel 1. 7.
(2) I11 with a b l.:
(a) In almost the same sense, only more static ; 1et erunt
duo in carne una’ Gen. 2. 24, I Cor. 6. 16.
(b) In instrumental or modal sense = with, by means of
(Hebr. ?); ‘ interfecit in ea (maxilla) mille uiros ’
Jud. 15.15,16 ; the Greek there is kv, and we have,
A . Hebrew 21
through the Greek, ‘ in gladio’ L k. 22. 49 ; ‘ seruite

Domino in timore’ Ps. 2. 11.
(e) In causal sense = for: ‘ in multiloquio suo ’ Mt. 6. 7 ;
exprobramini in nomine Christi ’ I Pet. 4.14 ; these
have come through the Greek.
(3) a with abl., in comparison : ‘ minuisti eum paulo minus
ab angelis ’ ( = a little lower than) Ps. 8. 5 (7), Hebr. 2. 7 ;
cnomen melius a filiis’ Isa. 56. 5 ; ‘ a te quid uolui’ Ps.
73 (72). 25 ; and probably ‘ a fructu frumenti. . . multiplicati
sunt’ Ps. 4. 8, a highly elliptical sentence.
T H E A D J E C T IV E
§ 23. Cardinal for Ordinal (as in French with titles):
* dies unus ’ Gen. 1. 5 ; ‘ una sabbati ’ Lk. 24. 1 etc. (through
the Greek).
Comparative followed by a : see above, § 22 (3).
Superlative expressed by inter or super: c benedicta
inter mulieres’ Jud. 5. 24; Lk. 1. 42 (through the Greek).
Omnis . . . non or non . . . omnis = no, especially with
caro: ‘ non inmutabit te omnis caro’ Ecclus. 33. 21, cf. Mt.
24. 22, Rom. 3. 20, I Cor. 1. 29, Gal. 2. 16; 1non est pax
uniuersae carni ’ Jer. 12. 12.
The expression ‘ to God ’ also becomes adjectival and
= exceeding, v e ry : e. g. c gratus Deo ’ (α σ τ ε ί ο ς τ ω Θ ε ω ) Act.
7. 20, ‘ potentia Deo 5 II Cor. 10. 4.
T H E PRO N O U N
§ 24. Redundant Demonstrative. The relative, being
indeclinable in Hebrew, is followed by a redundant Demon
strative; and this is reproduced in the Vulgate: e. g. ‘ ser
mones quorum non audiantur uoces eorum ’ Ps. 19. 3 (18. 4),
cf. 33 (32). 12, ‘ ciuitas cuius participatio eius in id ipsum ’
Ps. 122 (121). 3 ; in the N.T. through the Greek, Joh. 1. 27,
22 ’ The Foreign Elem ent
cf. Apoc. 3. 12, 6. 4, 8 ; after a participle, 4uincenti dabo ei
edere ’ Apoc. 2. 7.1 See below, § 54.
The interrogative is sometimes equivalent to a w ish;
‘ who will g iv e ? ’ = ‘ Oh, that some one would g iv e !' So
'quis det talem eos habere mentem’ Dt. 5. 29, ‘ quis dabit’
Ps. 14 (13). 7, 53. 8 (52. 7).
ex hoc in ilhtd (Hebr. from kind to kind) = all kinds o f:
so ‘ promptuaria . . . eructantia ex hoc in illud ’ ( = affording
all manner of store) Ps. 144 (143). 13.
TH E VERB
§ 25. Verbs used in a special sense : examples are:
benedicere, to bless, then to say farewell to, then to have
nothing to do with, to renounce ; and so finally to curse !
so ‘ benedic Deo et morere5Job 2. 9, cf. 1. 5, and I Kgs.
( I ll Reg.) 21. 10, 13.
cadere = simply ‘ come before ’ : ‘ si forto cadat oratio eorum
in conspectu Dom ini’ Jer. 36. 7.
debere = ‘ am I to ’ (Fr. ‘ dois‫־‬je? ’): ‘ ire debeo in Ramoth Ga-
laad ? ’ I Kgs. ( I l l Reg.) 22. 6, cf. II Kgs. (IV Reg.) 5.13.
fa c e r e : ‘ cito fecerunt, obliti sunt’ ( = they soon forgot) Ps.
106 (105). 13; so Vulgate; but ‘ cito obliti sunt’ P salt.
iuxta Hebr.
inueterare = render old, wear out, and so to enjoy to the
end: ‘ opera manuum eorum inueterabunt ’ ( = they
shall long enjoy the work of their hands) Isa. 65. 22.
leuare: ‘ leuant animam suam ut reuertantur illuc ’ ( = desire
to return there) Jer. 22. 37·
me71iiri\ lie, then offer feigned, because forced, submission,
and so to subm it: Ps. 18. 44 (17. 46), 66. 2 (65. 3), 81
(80). 16.
1 See R. H. Charles, Studies in the Apocalypse, Chap. I l l (‘ Hebraic style'),
pp. 79-102.
A . Hebrew 23
uiuere\ as an adjuration, in the phrase ‘ as the Lord (my
soul) liveth, I know not ’ ; c uiuit anima tua, rex, si noui5
I Sam. (I Reg.) 17. 55, II Sam. (II Reg.) 12. 5; in the
N.T. Rom. 14. 11 (quoting Isa. 45. 23 where, however,
the phrase is different).
§ 26. Verbal constructions, (a) ‘ Infinitive absolute’ :
this is prefixed in Hebrew to the finite verb to emphasize
the certainty of an action or fact. This emphasis is expressed
in Latin by prefixing:
(i) The present participle', e. g. ‘ plorans plorauit’ Lam.
1. 2 ; ‘ benedicens benedicam’ Hebr. 6. 14; exception in
Gen. 22. 17.
(ii) The ablative o f the cognate noun with modal force:
e. g. ‘ morte moriatur’ E x . 21. 17, Mt. 15. 4, ‘ desiderio
desideraui’ Lk. 22. 15 (through the Greek), cf. Mic. 2. 12.
(iii) The ablative o f the g e ru n d : ‘ praecipiendo prae- ·
cepimus’ Act. 5. 28.
§ 27. (b) Causative. The Hebrew hiphil (active), and
hophal (passive)—the causative voice—is expressed in Latin
by facere or dare\ e. g. ‘ fecitque eam regnare ’ Esth. 2. 17,
cf. Mt. 21. 7, Apoc. 3. 9 ,f nec dabis sanctum tuum uidere cor
ruptionem’ Ps. 16 (15). 10, cf. Act. 2. 27, 13. 35 ; ‘ qui posuit
fines tuos pacem ’ Ps. 147. 14; and by an unusual construe-
tion ‘ inluminet uultum suum super nos ’ Ps. 67 1 (66. 2); also
by conlocare ( = set, causative of sit) I Kgs. ( I ll Reg.) 2. 24.
§ 28. (e) Repeated action: this is expressed in Hebrew
by prefixing the verb ‘ to add ’ ; it is reproduced literally in
Latin, e. g. 6addidit Dominus ut appareret’ I Sam. (I Reg.)
3. 21, and through the Greek ‘ addidit . . . mittere’ Lk.
20. i i , 12; also ‘ adiecit . . . rursum uocare’, ‘ adiecit . . . et
uocauit’ I Sam. (I Reg.) 3. 8, cf. Isa. 7. 10, Nah. 1. 15;
adposuerunt adhuc peccare ’ (= sinned yet more) Ps. 78. 18
( 77. 17), cf. A c t . 12. 3. W e s im ila rly s a y in E n g lis h , £ H e
ad ded sin to sin ’ .
S o also in th e p h rase tran slated into E n g lis h as ‘ and
m ore also ’ the V u lg a t e ren ders lite ra lly ‘ h a ec m ihi faciat
D o m in u s et h aec a d d a t ' R u t h 1. 17, cf. I K g s . ( I l l R e g .)
19. 2 ; fo llo w ed b y si o r nisi.
U n d e r this h ead m a y b e also noted th e id io m a tic use o f
magnificare and multiplicare to d en o te intensive or rep eated
action, ch iefly (th ou gh not e x c lu siv e ly ) on th e p art of G o d ;
the con struction is w ith th e A c c u s ., th e In fin., or ut w ith
S u b j.
m agnificare : ‘ lin g u am n ostram m agn ificab im u s ’ ( = w ith
our ton gue w ill w e p revail) P s. 12-4 ( 11. 5)‫ נ‬cf. O b a d .
(A b d .) 12 ; ‘ m agn ifican s s a lu t e s ’ ( = g iv in g g re a t s a lv a
tion to) Ps. 18 ( 17). 51 ; 4 m agn ificau it su p er m e su p
plan tation em ’ L X X ε με γ α λ υ ν ε ν kri ε με πτ ε ρ ν ι σ μθ ν ,
H e b r. ‘ has m ad e great again st m e (his) h e e l ’, P .B . ‘ laid
g re a t w a it ', Ps. 41 . 9 (40. 1 0 ); ‘ m agn ificau it D o m in u s
f a c e r e ’ ( = hath d o n e g re a t thin gs) Ps. 126. 3, 4 ( 125.
2, 3), ‘ m. D . ut fa c e r e t 5 J o el 2 . 21.
m ultiplicare : ‘ m u ltip licasti m iserico rdiam ’ P s. 36. 7 (30. 8),1
‘ m. m a g n ific e n tia m ’ Ps. 71.1 9 (70. 2 1 ); 4 m. lo cu p le ta re
(te rra m )’ Ps. 65. 9 (64 . 1 0 ); in pass, 4m u ltip lica ta est in
eis ruina ’ Ps. 106 ( 105). 29.
A ls o ‘ m u ltu s est ad ig n o scen d u m ’ ( = he w ill a b u n d an tly
pardon) Isa. 55. 7.
§ 29. O th e r v e r b s . T h e fo llo w in g v e rb a l con stru ction s,

fo reign to classica l L a tin , are m ore or less m o u ld ed on th e
H eb rew :
1 S o in t h e S a r u m M is s a l, w h e n c e it h a s p a s s e d in to o u r o w n P r a y e r
B o o k , in th e C o lle c t fo r t h e 4 th S . a f t e r T r i n i t y ; in th a t fo r t h e n t h S.
a ft e r T r i n it y th e 1m u lt ip lic a s u p e r n o s g r a t ia m t u a m ’ is r e n d e r e d 1m e r c if u ll y
g r a n t u n to u s s u c h a m e a s u r e o f t h y g r a c e \
A. Hebrew 25
adhaerere p o st : ‘ ad h aesit an im a m ea post t e ’ Ps. 63 ( 62). 9.
adm irari super : ‘ a d m ira b a tu r super d o c t r in a ’ M k . 11. 18,
cf. M t. 7. 28, E z e k . 26 . 16.
aemtdaid i n : ‘ noli a e m u la ri in m a lig n a n t ib u s 5 P s. 37 (36).
.1, cf. 7.
aestim are : 1aestim ati su m u s sicu t oues occisio n is ’ P s. 44
(43). 22.
aspicere in : ‘ aspice in m e ’ Ps. 119 ( 118). 132.
attendere ab: ‘ atten d ite a b om ni in iq u o ’ E c c lu s . 17. 11,
‘ att. a falsis p r o p h e t is ’ M t. 7 . 15 etc.
attendere super: ‘ att. u o b is super h o m in ib u s is t is 5 A c t .
δ . 35 ; a l s o
attendere ad, att. in, an d att. w ith dat., acc. (person and
thing), and w ith ne .
blasphemare in\ ‘ b la sp h . in B e l 5 D a n . 14. 8, ‘ b lasp h . in
S p ir .’ M k . 3. 29 (not a classica l w ord).
confidere stiper: ‘ confisi su p er san ctu m Israh el ’ Isa. 31. 1,
‘ conf. super b acu lu m ’ Isa. 36 . 6 (usual constr. w ith in
and abi.).
deficere in : w ith acc. ( = for w an t of) ; ‘ defecit in salu tare
tuum an im a m e a ’ P s . 119 ( 118). 81, cf. 82, 123.
form idare a : ‘ cor tuu m ne form idet a d u ab u s c a u d is ’ Isa.
7. 4, cf. 31. 4, Jer. 1. 17.
forrnidare stiper: ‘ fo rm id ab u n t super t e ’ E z e k . 32. 10.
indicare de: ‘ sancti de h o c m un do iu d ic a b u n t ’ I C o r. 6. 2,
cf. 5. 12, and A p o c . 19. 2 ; this is not th ro u gh the G reek ,
w h ich h as κ ρ ι ν ε ι ν w ith the acc.
m isereri in : ‘ in seruis suis m ise re b itu r’ D t. 32. 36.
m isereri super: ‘ m isertu s est D o m in u s su p er a fflic tio n e ’
I I S a m . (II R e g .) 24·. 16, cf. A m o s 7. 3, 6 ; ‘ m isereor
su per turbam ’ M k . 8. 2, cf. 6. 34, and Jonah 3. 1 0 ; also
w ith dat. frequ en tly, esp . in th e p h rase ‘ m isertus est eis ’
M t. 9. 36, cf0 17. 15 etc.
26-12 E
pauere a r ia , facie nom inis m ei p a u e b a t ’ M ai. 2. 5. .
pauere ad: ‘ p a u e b a n t a d D o m in u m 3 (shall com e w ith fear
unto the L o r d R .V .) H os. 3. 5.
pauere super : ‘ su p er quo p au et an im a u estra ’ E zelc. 24. 21.
pertinere d e: ‘ de nobis p ertin eb it ’ I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 18. 3 ;
cf. Joh. 10. 13, 12. 6 (th rough th e G re e k ).
respicere a d : ‘ re sp e x it D o m in u s ad A b e l ’ G en . 4. 4.
timere a : ‘ tim ere a facie ’ N e h . ( I I E s d r.) 4 . 1 4 ; £a iu d iciis
. . . t im u i’ Ps. 119 ( 118). 120.
tielle in: ‘ in m an datis eius uolet n im is ’ ( = g r e a t ly d e lig h t
in) Ps. 112 ( 111). 1.
§ 30 . In d e fin ite s u b je c t . T h e 3rd P e rs. S in g , is used
in H eb rew w ith an indefinite su b je ct, corresp o n d in g to th e
G erm an man, and F re n ch on ; this is lite ra lly re p ro d u ced
in the V u lg a te , th o u gh the sense is often b est rendered b y
the E n g lish p a s s iv e ; thus ‘ p ro p terea a p p e lla u it puteum
illum ‫ = י‬w herefore the w e ll w as c a lle d ’ G en . 16. 14, ‘ n u m -
qu id S io n d icet ( = it sh a ll b e said of S io n ; so ‘ ad S io n
dicetur ’ Psalt. iuxta Hebri) Ps. 87 (86). 5 ; ‘ flens a s c e n d e t 3
( = w ith w e ep in g th e y sh all g o up) Is a . 15. 5.
M IS C E L L A N E O U S : P A R T IC L E S , E T C .
§ 31. E m p h a s is is p ro d u c e d b y r e p e titio n : ‘ seru abis

p acem p acem ’ ( = thou w ilt k eep him in perfect peace) Is a .
26. 3, cf. ‘ ho m o hom o ’ ( = e v e r y m an) E zelc. 14, 4, 7 ; cf.
also E zelc. 46. 14, 15, P s . 68. 12 (67. 13) w h ere th e ‘ d ile cti
d ile cti ’ tran slates the L X X τ ο υ α γ α πη τ ο ύ τ ο υ α γ α πη τ ο ί )
rather than th e H eb r., w h ich m eans ‘ th e y flee, th e y f le e ‫ן‬
(i. e. th e y flee a p ace). O n the o th er h and D t. 7. 22 ‫מ ע ם ט ע ט‬
(little b y little) is p a ra p h ra sed , not tran slated, b y the
V u lg . cp au latim atqu e p er p a r t e s ’ ; cf. E 2 e k . 24. 6.
R e p e titio n w it h e t : epon dus et p o n d u s, m ensura et m en-
A. Hebrew 2?
s u r a ’ ( = a d o u ble w e igh t . . . m easure) P ro v . 20. 10, ‘ in
co rd e et c o rd e ’ ( = w ith a d o u b le heart) Ps. 12. 2 ( 11. 3 ) ;
‘ gen e ratio et gen eratio la u d ab it o p e ra t u a ’ ( = one g e n e ra
tion sh all praise th y w o rk s unto another) Ps. 145 ( 144). 4 ;
so frequ en tly ‘ in gen eratio n em et g e n e ra tio n e m ’ ( = unto
m an y generations), ‘ in p ro g en ie et p ro gen ie ’ e tc.1
§ 32. R e p e t it io n w it h P r e p o s it io n s : 4m ensis e x m ense et

sab batu m e x sab b ato ’ ( = from one sa b b a th to an oth er) Is a .
66. 2 3 ; ‘ cu b icu lu m intra c u b ic u lu m ’ ( = an inner ch am b er)
I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 22. 25.
ab . . . usque ad are also e m p lo y e d in the sense o f ‘ b o th
. . . and ’ ; th us ‘ ab h om ine u squ e a d a n im a n tia ’ G en . 6. 7,
cf. P s. 135 ( 134). 8 ; ‘ ab an im a u squ e ad c a r n e m ’ ( = both
sou l and b o d y ) Isa. 10. 18.
si. In em p h atic speech , e s p e c ia lly in ad ju ratio n s, s i =
a n egativ e, si . . . non or nisi — an a ffirm a tiv e : thus ‘ sem el
iuraui in san cto m eo, si D a u id m e n tia r ’ ( = I w ill not lie
unto D a v id ) P s. 89. 34 (88. 36), ‘ si introibunt in requ iem
m eam ’ ( = th e y sh all not enter into m y rest) Ps. 95 (94). 11,
cf. H e b r . 4 . 3 ; see also Ps. 132 ( 131). 3, 4, M k. 8. 12. O n
the o ther hand ‘ si non . . . red d am t i b i ’ ( = I w ill su r e ly
requite thee) I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 9. 2 6 , ‘ nisi d o m u s m u ltae
desertae fu e rin t’ ( = o f a tru th m a n y houses sh a ll b e
deserted) Isa. 5. 9, cf. J e r. 49 . 20. T h is si is not r e a lly
a n egativ e. T h e ‘ n o t ’ com es from a su p p ressed clau se,
‘ i f . . . (then m y o ath w ill b e in vain w h ich in the case o f
G o d it can not be).
1 W e s t ill s a y ‘ fo r e v e r a n d e v e r ’ in the D o xo lo gy to th e L o r d 's P r n j‫׳‬e r ;

b u t th at D o x o l o g y , t h o u g h in t h e Tcxtus Rccvpius o f M t. 6 . 13, a n d in o u r
P . B ., w a s n e v e r in th e V u lg a t e .
II
T H E FOREIGN ELEM EN T
B. G R E E K
§ 33. T h e influence o f G re e k on L a t in b egan at an e a rly

a g e from th e intercourse o f th e R o m a n s w ith th e G re e k
colon ies in S o u th ern It a ly , k n o w n c o lle c t iv e ly as M a g n a
G r a e c ia ; it w as in creased b y th e co n q u est of G re e ce soon
after 13. c. 200, an d cu lm in ated w ith the tim e o f C ic e ro and
the A u g u s t a n a g e . C ic e ro d erive d his p h ilo so p h y and
o ra to ry from the G re e k m odels ; V e r g il w o v e his g re a t ep ic
from the m in gled th read s o f the Ilia d and the Odyssey.
T h e p ro cess still w en t on. Just as m an y o f us 1now can
rem em b er th e transition from cloture into ‘ c lo s u r e ’ , so in
th e old w o rld m a n y w o rd s w h ich w ere w ritten in foreign
»characters w hen C ic e ro ‘ sp o k e G r e e k ’, b e ca m e c o m p le te ly
n atu ralized an d, b y the tim e of T e r tu llia n and the O ld
L a t in B ib le , w ere w ritten in R o m a n letters. In the realm
o f literatu re ‘ G ra e c ia ca p ta ferum u ictorem c e p it \l
H e n ce a vast n u m b er of G re e k w o rd s— con im ercial,
n au tical, and g e n e ra l— b e ca m e L a tin lo n g before th e C h r is
tian era, and are b y no m eans p e c u lia r to C h ristian latin ity ;
such w ords as mina, talentum, ancora, machina, purpura,
theatrum, philosophia, b elo n g to the early p eriod of G re e k
influence.
H o ra ce, Epp. I I . i. 156.
B. Greek 29
In the letters an d treatises o f C ic e ro the num ber w as

la r g e ly in creased ; and in his a g e too, y and z w ere a d d ed
to the R o m a n a lp h a b e t to represen t th e G re e k letters υ and
£, as lyra, zona (p revio u sly spelt sond)\ also th e com p ou n d s
ch, th, ph, rh, as parochus, thesaurus, philosophus, rhetor ;
th ou gh J ero m e still (if we m a y trust the o ld est M S S .) w ro te
fiala, caracter, etc.
§ 34. In the case o f th e V u lg a t e the influence o f the
G re e k is the m ore direct and o b viou s in con sequ en ce o f th e
alm ost slavish literaln ess w ith w h ich , in the P salm s an d
the N e w T e sta m e n t, the O ld L a t in — of w h ich the V u lg a te
w as b u t a revisio n — fo llo w ed the G re e k t e x t ; in con stru e-
tion and th e o rd er o f w o rd s it ren ders it e x a c t ly . T a k e for
instance the fo llo w in g :
’E y τ ω εττιστρεφαι K ν ρ ι ο ν τ η ν α ι χ μα λ ω σ ί α ν ε γ ε ν η θ η με ν
In conuertendo Dominus captiuitatem Sion facti sumus
ώ ς τ τ α ρ α κ ε κ λ η με ν ο υ rore ε τ τ λ η σ θ η χ α ρ α ς τ ο σ τ ό μα η μώ ν
sicut con solati: tunc repletum est gaudio os nostrum
κ α ι h γ λ ω σ σ ά η μώ ν α γ α λ λ ι ά σ ε ω ν
et lingua nostra exsultatione (Ps. 126 [ 125]. 1, 2).
IlaiSta, έ σ χ α τ η ω ρ α ε σ τ ι ν ‘ κ α ί κ α θ ώ ς η κ ο ν σ α τ ε ό τ ι
Filioli, nouissima hora est : et sicut audistis quia
αντίχριστος έρχεται, και νυν αντίχριστοι ττολλοΐ γεγο ν α σ ι ν '
antichristus uenit et nunc antichristi multi facti su n t:
ό θ ε ν γ ι ν ω σ κ ο με ν ό τ ι έ σ χ α τ η ω ρ α ε ο ‫׳‬τ ί ν .
unde scimus quia nouissima hora est (I Joh. 2. 18).
S im ila r instances are found in M k . 14. 21 ; A c t . 1. 1 -5 ,

2 1 1 8 .3 ; 2‫( ־‬im p leu it . . . s i c ) ; 24. 1 6 ; H e b . 6. 1 6
I I P et. 2 1 .3 ,21 ‫ ; ־‬Jude 18, etc. N e a r ly a ll the features o f
the N e w T e sta m e n t V u lg a t e L a t in w h ich lo o k stran ge to
th e classical sch o lar m a y b e e x p la in e d b y this f a c t ; w e
seem alm o st d riven to th e con clu sio n th at th e earliest
tran slation s w ere in terlin ear, an d th at th e tran slato r did
little m ore than w rite th e c o rre sp o n d in g L a t in un d er each
G re e k w ord. Y e t w e m ust not th in k that th e Greek ord er
is en tirely a ccid e n ta l or p u r p o s e le s s ; it e x ists for th e sak e
o f sim p lic ity and em ph asis, and this tw o fo ld p u rpose is
fo llo w e d in the L a tin .
§ 35. T h e sam e e x p la n atio n co v ers irreg u la ritie s su ch as

ellip sis, an acolou th on , etc.
T h e m ost frequent e llip s e is th at o f the co p u lativ e verb
to be\ this is found in b o th O ld and N e w T e st., e sp e c ia lly
in p ro v erb ial or d id a c tic sayin g s (S a p ie n tia l lit e r a t u r e ;
B e a titu d e s), in ascrip tio n s o f praise, or in e x c la m a to r y sen
tences in troduced b y quant, ecce, etc. ; so ‘ p rin cip iu m
sap ien tiae tim or D o m in i’ P ro v. 9. 10, ‘ b e atu s uir q u i ’ P s.
1. i , ‘ b eati m un do c o r d e ’ M t. 5. %, ‘ ecce filius t u u s ’ Joh.
19. 26, cf. 2 7 ; c b e n e d ictio et clarita s . . . D e o nostro A p o c .
7. 12.
A n e cessary and self-evid en t w ord is often im p lied , not
ex p ressed : e. g . ‘ p ro h ib en tiu m n ub ere, abstin ere a cib is ’
( = fo rb id d in g to m arry , co m m an d in g to abstain from m eats)
I T im . 4 . 3. S o in the suspen ded sen ten ce (ap o sio p esis),
‘ si fecerit fr u c t u m ; sin autem in futurum su ccid es eam ’
( = if it b ear fruit, w e ll ; but) L k . 13. 9, ‘ sicu t ro g au i te ut
re m a n e re s’ ( = as I b eso u gh t th ee to rem ain , so I d o now)
I T im . 1. 3.
§ 36. O th er irreg u la ritie s are o b v io u s lite ralism s from
the G r e e k ; e. g. th e G re e k con struction o f a rticle -w ith -
p articip le (he w h o lives, those w h o serve) o cc a sio n a lly
p ro d u ces a sen ten ce w h ich b eg in s w ith a qui or cum clau se,
an d ends w ith a p a rticip le . T h u s 'h i c est h o m o qui . .
u b iqu e d o c e n s ’ (ό . . . δ ι δ ά σ κ ω ν ) A c t . 21. 28, ‘ his quidem
B. Greek 31
qui . . . qu aeren tibu s 1’ (τ ο ι ς με ν . . . ζ η τ ο υ σ ι υ ) R o m . 2. ‫ ך‬, cf.
P h il. 3. 3, and J u d e 1 ; w ith sim p le p a rticip le £ cum legisset
autem et in terro gasset . . . et c o g n o s c e n s 5 A c t . 23. 34
( — α ν α γ ν ο υ ς δ ε Kri ε πε ρ ω τ η σ α ς . . . κ α ι 7τ υ θ ό με ν ο ς ).
S o m e tim e s th e lite ralism s are p a r t ia l; e. g. ‘ p otestatem
conuertendi . . . et p e r c u t e r e ’ A p o c . 11. 6 , w h ere the G re e k
has the infin. in both cases. O c c a s io n a lly irregu lar co n ‫״‬
structions in th e L a tin correspond to irre g u la r constructions
in the G re e k , as 4n u llam requiem h abu it caro nostra, sed
om nem trib u latio n em passi ’ ( = ο υ δ ε μι α υ ε σ γ γ η κ ε ν α ν ε σ ι ν η
σ α ρ ξ η μω ν , α λ λ 9 ε ν πα υ τ ι θ λ ι β ό με υ ο ι ) I I C or. 7. 5, cf. 5. 6- 8,
P h il. 1. 2 9 , 3°) C o l. 3 . 6 ‫ ‘ ; נ‬d an d o le g e s m eas . . . et in cord e
eorum su p erscribam e a s ’ ( = δ ι δ ο υ ς ν ο μο υ ς μο υ . . . Kal ε πι
κ α ρ δ ι ά ς α υ τ ω ν ε πι γ ρ ά ψ ω α υ τ ο ύ ς ) H e b r. 8 10.
L E X I C A L I N F L U E N C E
§ 37. W ith m ost o f our E n g lis h b ib lic a l, ecclesiastical,
and th e o lo g ic a l term s, th e source is G re e k b u t th e y h ave
com e to us th ro u g h the L a tin . T h e V u lg a t e con tain s m a n y
w o rd s— nouns, a d je ctiv es, verb s— d eriv e d from the G re e k ,
in clu d in g ( 1) w o rd s used in o rd in ary life, ( 2) te ch n ica l term s
used in a religio u s sense, in co n n ex io n w ith J ew ish or
C h ristian faith, institutions, or w o rsh ip ; m ost o f these,
e sp e c ia lly those b e lo n g in g to the last class, o ccu r in th e
N e w T e sta m e n t. In m a n y cases th e G re e k w o rd is found
in the V u lg a te b u t not in the corre sp o n d in g p assage o f the
L X X or G re e k T estam en t.
N O U N S
§ 38. T h e fo llo w in g o r d in a r y (i.e . n o n -th eo lo gical)
G re e k w ords are tak en o ver into the V u lg a t e :
1 S o th e O x fo r d t e x t ; th e S i x t i n c a n d C le m e n t in e e d it io n s h a v e c o r r e c t e d
to ‘ q u a e r u n t ’.
a b y ssu s, agon , a rrh ab o (G en . 38. 17, 18 ; but in N .T .
pignus is em p lo yed ), botru s, c atacly sm u s, c a ta ra cta e , c a th e
dra, cau m a ( J o b 30. 30) cidaris ( = κ ι δ α ρ ι ς ,ζ m itre), co lap h u s,
coph in us, crater, c ry p ta (Jer. 43. 9), e x e d r a ( = a h a ll w ith
seats ; but it is never used to tran slate ε ξ ε δ ρ α , w h ich is
ren dered gazophylacium ; see E z e k . 40. 44, etc.), g ig a s
(som etim es = the H e b r. rephaim , the sh ad es o f the d ead ;
see P ro v . 9 .1 8 ), g ra b attu m (κ ρ α β α τ τ ο υ ), h o ro lo giu m , h y d ria ,
latom us, lith ostrotus, luter, m elota, m itra, n au cleriu s, n o m is
m a, p a lath a , p a p y rio , parapsis, p erip sim a, p h a la n x , p ro b a
tica , ptisane, p yth o , p y th o n issa, sagen a, sa tra p a, sicera,
sindon, sp o rta ( = σ πυ ρ ι ς ?), sy m p h o n ia , telo n iu m , trieris,
triste ga (plur. = τ α τ ρ ί σ τ ε γ α ), z e lo ty p ia ( = je a lo u s y ; cf.
C ic . Tusc. Lisp. 4 . 8. 18), zizan ia (plur. o n ly ).
§ 39 . G re e k r e lig io u s term s : an ath em a, a p o sta ta , a z y m a ,

b ap tism a, ch arism a ,1 d iab o lu s, en cen ia (Joh. 10. 22), eth n i
cus, extasis, g a z o p h y la ciu m , id oloth ytu s, n e o p h ytu s, p a r a
sceue (A c c . -en), p aracletu s, p en tecoste, p h y la cte riu m ,
p ro sely tu s, scen o p egia, sch ism a, zelus.
A D J E C T I V E S
§ 40 . T h e s e are not v e r y n um erous, but the fo llo w in g
m a y b e noted : ach aris (α χ α ρ ι ς ; see E c c lu s . 20. 21), eu ch aris
(ε υ χ α ρ ι ς ; ib. 6. 5), laicu s (I S a m . = I R e g . 21. 4 ; b u t the
L X X th ere is β ε β η λ ο ς , not λ α ι κ ό ς ), p yth o n icu s ( L e v . 20.
27), in the O ld T e s t .; and d iab o licu s (Jac. 3. 15), d isco lu s
(I P et. 2 . 18), d ith alassu s (A c t . 27. 41), p isticu s (Joh. 12. 3),
p ro p h eticu s, ty p h o n icu s (A c t. 27. 14).
1 C h r is t ia n la t in it y a d o p t e d charism a but not charis ; th u s n e it h e r t h e
V u lg a t e n o r th e E n g l is h v e r s io n b r i n g s o u t th e c o n n e x io n w h i c h e x i s t s in th e
G r e e k b e t w e e n χ ά ρ ι ς a n d χ ά ρ ι σ μα ; T e r t u lli a n r e n d e r e d th e la t t e r w o r d b y
donatiiutm A c Rcsitrv. 47, q u o t in g R o m . 6. 23 ; cf. A d iu M arcioncm V . 8,
q u o t in g E p h . 4. 8.
B. Greek 33
V E R B S
§ 41. M ore frequen t than a d je c t iv e s : e. g. a p o sta ta re

(E c c lu s . 10. 14, 19. 2, th e G k . is α φ ι σ τ α με Μ υ an d α πο σ τ η -
σ ο υ σ ι ν ), catap lasm are (Isa. 38. 21), also p lasm are (P s. 74
[ 73]. 17 : but G k . ε τ τ ο ι η σ α ς ); g y r a r e (intrans, an d trans. ; see
G en . 30. 32, I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 5. 23, J u d ith 13. 12, I M a c c.
13. 20, E c c lu s . 29. 25, 43 .1 3 ; the last is th e o n ly p a ssa g e in
w h ich γ υ ρ ό ω o ccu rs in the G reek ), zelare (w ith p erfect z e la
tus sum ) = to b e je a lo u s o ver (w ith acc. ‘ zelatu s est D o m i
nus te r r a m ’ Joel 2. 1 8 ; b u t also w ith p rep . ‘ zelau i su p er
iniqu os ’ = ζ I w as envious at the w ick ed 5 P s. 73 [ 72]. 3 ;
in N .T . absolu te, see A c t . 17. 5, J ac. 4. 2).
§ 42 . A sp ecial class o f verbs consists o f th ose derived

from G re e k verbs in - α ζ ω and -ι ζ ω ; as an ath em atizare,
bap tizare, cath ech izare, c o lap h iz are , e u a n g cliza re , iu d aizare,
p ro p h etizare, sab b atizare, scan d alizare, th esau rizare. D e
p o n e n t: a g o n izari.1
I N F L E X I O N A L I N F L U E N C E
§ 43 . T h e G r e e k A c c u s a t iv e is co m m o n in L a t in ,
e sp e c ia lly in the poets. In the V u lg a t e it is m ost seen in
pro p er nam es : B a rra b a n , B arn ab an , C a ia p h a n , E u p h rate n ,
Io h an n en , P arasceu en , Pen teco sten , S atan a n , T ig rin . T h e
C o d e x A m ia tin u s is fond o f these term in ation s.
1 A gon izari (o r ■ are) d o c s n o t o c c u r in t h e V u lg a t e N . T . , a n d o n ly o n c e

in th e O . T . ( ‘ p ro iu s t it ia a g o n iz a r e p r o a n im a t u a ’ = ‘ s t r i v e fo r r ig h t e o u s
n e s s u n to th e d e a t h ’ , E c c lu s . 3 3 .1‫ )־‬, bu t th e O ld L a t . C o d . B o c r n e r i a n u s o f
St. P a u l’ s E p p . ( G an d g) h a s 1o m n is c n im q u i a g o n iz a t uel in agone
c o n t e n d i t ’ fo r 77as‫ ־‬δ £ υ α λ ω ν ι ζ ό με ν ο ι in I C o r. 9. 25. T h e G k. α λ ω ν ί ζ ο μα ι
o c c u r s s e v e n t im e s in th e N . T . , in d e e d e ig h t if w e a d o p t th e r e a d i n g o f th e
o ld e r u n c ia ls in I T im . 4. 1 0 ; J e r o m e a ll o w e d n o le s s th a n f iv e r e n d e r i n g s
o f th e v e r b in th e V u l g a t e : c o n t e n d e r e , d e c e r t a r e , in a g o n e c o n t e n d e r e ,
c e r t a r e , s o llic it u s ( = α λ ω ν ι ζ ό με ν ο ς ).
2G12 F
34 The Foreign Element ,
In 2nd D e c k w e h ave ch arad rio n L e v . 11. 19 (but -iu m
D t. 14. 18) from ch arad riu s ( = χ α ρ α δ ρ ι ό ς ,ζ bustard ; th o u g h
the H e b r . = a heron or ibis), ep in icio n , topazion.
In 3 rd D e c i . : aera, aeth era, cete, etc.
A c c . p lu r. p eriscelid as Isa. 3 . 20 (but -des N u m . 31. 50),
M a ce d o n a s E sth . 16. 14 (but -nes I I C o r. 9. 2).
G e n it iv e : T a n e o s Ps. 78 ( 77.) 12; 43, Is a . 19. 11, 13.
S Y N T A C T I C A L I N F L U E N C E
§ 44 . A g r e e m e n t : (d) g e n d e r. T h e pronoun som etim es

a g rees not w ith its ow n substan tive b u t w ith the u n d e rly in g
G r e e k ; th is is, h ow ever, not a V u lg a t e b u t an O ld L a tin
ch ara cte ristic ; e. g. in su ch M S S . as d f w e find ■ illum w ith
uerbum (i. e. λ ό γ ο υ ) ; co n v e rse ly ‘ si non potest h ic c a lix
transire nisi b ib a m illu d M t. 26. 42 ( f ) = kbcv μη α υ τ ό πι ω .
(b) n u m b er. A sin gu lar verb o ccu rs after a n eu ter p lu r a l;
c ut m an ifestetu r o p era D e i ’ Joh. 9 . 3 (m an y V g . an d O .L .
M S S . ) ; ‘ ita co rru m p atu r sensus uestri ’ I I C o r. 11. 3
( T d e = φ θ α ρ η τ ά ν ο ή μα τ α υ μω ή ; ‘ an im alis au tem h o m o
non p e rcip it ea q u a e sunt sp iritu s D e i ; stu ltitia est enim
i l l i : et non p otest in tellegere, q u ia sp iritaliter exam inatur ’
I C o r. 2. 14 is a V u lg a t e re ad in g ( = ε σ τ ι ν and ο ι ν α κ ρ ι ν ε τ α ι )
b u t th e sin gu lar v erb s m a y h a v e been influenced b y the
in tervening stidtitia.
(c) c a s e . Accusative: the so -ca lle d ‘ G re e k a c c u s a t iv e ’
(in th e sy n ta ctica l sense) is frequent in L a tin , e s p e c ia lly in
the poets, after ‘ to c lo t h e ’, w h ere th e p assive is r e a lly
re fle x iv e and — to put on o n eself (a dress, etc.) ; so ‘ inutile
ferrum c in g it u r ’ V e r g . (A e n . I I . 510 f.). T h u s in V g . ‘ induit
eum stolam g lo ria e ’ E c c lu s . 45 . 9, cf. I M a cc. 3 . 3, 14. 9 ;
‘ c a lc ia te g a llicu la s tuas ’ A c t . 12. 8 ; ‘ am icti stolas a lb a s ’
A p o c . 79 ‫( ״‬but stolis 1 3 ); see also Joh. 21. 7, E p h . 6 0 14,
B. Greek 35
I T h ess. 5. 8, and co m p are ‘ e x p o lia n te s uos ueterem h o m i
nem ’ C o l. 3 . 9, w ith £ honorem C a e sa ris s p o lia r e n tJ C a e sa r
Bell. Gall. viii. 50. 4.
T h e ‘ accu sative of resp ect ’ is also fo u n d : ‘ d o lu it pedes ’
I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 15. 23 ( = he w as d iseased in his feet) ;
'a b lu t i corpus a q u a m un da J H e b r. 10. 22.
Genitive : found after co m p arativ e ; ‘ m aius horum a liu d
m an datu m non e s t J M k . 12. 31 ( = με ι ζ ω ν τ ο ύ τ ω ν ά λ λ η
ε ν τ ο λ η obk ε σ τ ι ν ) ; see also Joh. 14. 12, A c t. 17. 11, H e b r.
3. 3, 6. 16, I I I Joh. 4 ; E c c lu s . 16. 6.
G en itiv e also found after a d je ctiv es ; c d o cib iles D eiJ Joh .
6. 45 ( = δ ι δ α κ τ ο ί Θ ε ο υ ) cf. I C o r. 2. 1 3 / in cessabiles d e lic t iJ
I I P et. 2 . 14.
G en itive absolu te (instead o f a b l. abs.) is com m on in th e
O ld L a tin versions but v e r y rare in th e V u lg a t e ; p o ssib le
cases are 1 accip ietis uirtutem superuenien tis sp iritu s san cti
in u o s ’ A c t . 1. cS (th ou gh th e gen. here co u ld b e tak en as
d epen den t on uirtutem), ‘ inter se inuicem co gitatio n u m
accu san tiu m aut etiam defendentium 5 R o m . 2. 15, ' crescen
tis fidei u e s t ra e 5 I I C or. 10. 15.
§ 45 . P la c e n a m e s . T h e prep, in is found w ith n am es

o f tow ns, e sp e c ia lly w h en in d e c lin a b le ; ‘ ut fugerem in
T h a rs is ’ Jon. 1. 3, 4 . 2, ‘ in A z o t u m ’ I M a cc. 10. 78, ‘ reuer-
sus est in H ie ru salem J 87 ; ‘ inuentus est in A z o t o 5 A c t . 8.
40, cf. Joh. 4 . 46, I T h ess. 2. 2.
A D J E C T I V E S
§ 4 6 . Positive fo r Comparative, w ith quam = η : £ bon u m

tib i est . . . quam J M t. 18. 9 ( = it is better . . . than ), cf.
Ps. 118 (117). 8, 9, E c c lu s . 16. 4, 20. 1 ; so also f bonum
erat ei, si non esset natus hom o ille ? M t. 26. 24.
F 2
V E R B S
(C o n stru ctio n fo llo w in g the G reek .)
§ 47. (a) Verbs taking accusative.

benedicere, m aledicere : 1b en ed icite D o m in u m 5, etc. P ss.
con stan tly, and e ls e w h e r e ; b u t it tak es the dat. alm o st
as freq u en tly ; maledicere n e a rly a lw a y s w ith dat., but
w ith acc. E c c lu s . 21. 30, A c t . 19. 9, 23. 4 , 5, J ac. 3. 9.
com mem orari : f com m em o rati sunt D o m in u m 5 W isd . (S a p .)
11. 14, ‘ n equ e co m m , sunt sem itas eius 5 B a ru ch 3. 23.
confitndi: ‘ filius hom in is con fundetur eum ’ M e. 8 .3 8 ( = be
asham ed o f him ).
inhtm inare : ‘ inlum in ent terram G en . 1. 15 ( = to shed ligh t
upon) ; so ‘ in lu m in are o m n es5 E p h . 3 . 9 ( = to en ligh ten ) ;
but also w ith dat. c in lu m in abit tibi C h ristu s ’ E p h . 5. 14.
nocere : ‘ non eos n o c e b it 5 Me. 16. 18, cf. A p o c . 11- 5/ nihil-
qu e illu m n o c u it 5 L k . 4 . 35 ( = did not hurt him at all).
petere\ c petenti te tribu e 5 L k . 6. 30, cf. M t. 6. 8, 7. 11, L k .
l l . 11 ; G r. α ι τ ύ ν τ ι ν α .
suadere \ ‘ su ad e H e b ra e a m illa m 5 Judith 12. 10, ‘ in con
spectu eius su a d e b im u s co rd a n o s t r a 5 I Joh. 3 . 19
( = πε ι σ ο με ν τ η ν κ α ρ δ ι α ν η μω υ ).
trium phare : 4[D e u s ] triu m p h at nos , I I C o r. 2 . 14 ( = lead eth
us in triu m p h ), cf, C o i. 2. 15.
zelare'. 4 zelau eris facien tes in iqu itatem 5 P s. 37 (36.) 1, cf.
Joel 2. 18, Z a ch . 1. 14, 8. 2, E c c lu s . 9. 1 6 ; w ith co gn ate
a c c . , as H e b r., ‘ zelan d o zelum D e i 5 I M a cc. 2. 54, cf.
J u d ith 9. 3. :
(b) Verbs taking genitive.
dom inari: ‘ p rin cip es gentium dom in an tur eorum 5 M t. 20 .
25 ( = κ α τ α κ υ ρ ι ε υ ο υ σ ι ν α ύ τ ω ν ; ru le o ver them ), cf. L k .
22. 25, R o m . 14. 9 ; in the O ld T e st. G en . 3. 16, N u m .
B. Greek 37
16. 13, D t. 15. 6, Jud. 8. 22. 23, Is a . 54. 5, Jer. 31. 32 etc.
implere A ' im p leb o m ontes eius o cciso ru m suorum ‫ ג‬E z e k .
35. 8, ' im p letae sunt n u p tiae d iscu m b en tiu m ‫ נ‬Mt. 22.1 0 .
regnare : 4 regn ab it D o m in u s illo ru m ’ W is d . (S ap .) 3 . 8.
(e) V e r b s t a k in g d a tiv e .
adorare : found w ith dat. in O ld L a tin , and once o n ly in
V u lg a te , 4ad orato D o m in o D e o tuo ‫ נ‬D t. 26. 10 ; 7τ ρ ο σ -
Kovsiv is used w ith dat. in L X X and N .T ., but here the
G reek is πρ ο σ κ υ ν ή σ ε ι ς ε κ ε ι ε ν α ν τ ι κ υ ρ ί ο υ κ .τ .λ .
lo q u i : 1. e i 12 M t. 12. 4 ό , Joh. 12. 29 ; cf. G en. 24. 7, 30, e t c . ;
sim ila rly dicere w ith dat. Ps. 45 1 (44. 2), 110 ( 109). 1,
M t. 5. 22, etc. .
V O IC E , MOOD, A N D T E N S E
§ 48 . T h e freer p e r s o n a l u se o f th e P a s s iv e in G re e k
w ith verb s w h ich do not tak e an a ccu sa tiv e is follow ed in
the V u lg a te : e. g . c cred ita sunt illis e lo q u ia D e i ’ R o m . 3 .
2 ( = ε πι σ τ ε υ θ η σ α ν , th ey w ere en tru sted w ith), 'd is p e n s a tio
m ihi cred ita e s t ' I C or. 9 . 17 ( = πε πι σ τ ε υ μα ι ), 'c r e d it u m
est m ihi eu an geliu m * G al. 2. 7, cf. I T h ess. 2. 4. In th e
G re e k th e p assive verb takes an acc. o f the o b je ct entrusted ;
in E n g lis h tw o con structions, both p erso n al, are used, eith er
' I was en tru sted with ‫נ‬, or ‘ the G o sp el w as entrusted to m e
A t o ther tim es, the o rd in ary c la s sica l Im p e rso n al co n
struction is u s e d : e .g . 'u b iq u e ei c o n tr a d ic itu r ’ A c t . 28.
22 ( = πα ν τ α γ ρ ΰ α ν τ ι λ ε γ ε τ α ι ) 4responsum est M o s i’ H e b r .
8 .5 ( = κ ε χ ρ η μα τ ι σ τ α ι Μ ω σ η ς ) , ' nobis nuntiatum e s t ‫ נ‬I‫־‬Ie b r.
4 . 2 ( = ε σ με ν ε υ η γ γ ε λ ι σ με ν ο ι ).
1 T h is g e n . is fo u n d in th e C la s s ic a l po ets ; e. g. ‘ im p le n t u r u c t e r is
B a c c h i p in g u is q u e f e r i n a e ’ , V e r g . A o i. I . 2 1 5 , ‘ q u o m e, B a c c h e , r a p is tui
p le n u m ’ , H o r . Carm. I I I . 25. 1. (
2 In P la u t u s male loqui w it h d a l. = to s p e a k e v i l of.
§ 49 . It is so m etim es h ard to tell w h eth er a G re e k verb
is M id d le or P a s s iv e ; e. g . kv 7‫־‬ω κ ρ ι ν ε σ θ α ι σ ε Ps. 51. 4 (50.
6) the verb is m ost p r o b a b ly m id d le ( = w hen thou com est
into ju d g e m e n t ; so R .V . in R o m . 3. 4), but the V u lg . tak es
it as passive (‘ cum iu d ica ris ’), and so it is ren dered in the
quotation R o m . 3 . 4 ; an d the P . B . P salter, and th e A .V . at
R o m . 3 . 4 render ‘ w h en thou art ju d g e d ’ ; b u t J ero m e in
his Psalt. nexta H ebr . tran slated the H e b r. as active, ‘ cum
iu d icau eris \ and our o w n A . and R .V . ren der it th ere ‘ when
thou ju d g e s t ’. ‫׳‬ .
πρ ο ε χ ό με θ α in R o m . 3. 9 is e x t re m e ly d iffic u lt ; the
V u lg . renders ‘ p ra e ce llim u s e o s ? 5; but see the R .V . and
m arg. for other ren d erin gs. .
I N F I N I T I V E
§ 50 . H e re G re e k is n earer than classica l L a tin to

E n g lis h idiom , and in fo llo w in g the G re e k the V u lg a t e is
lead in g the w a y to m o d ern speech. T h e infin itive is used
in vario u s w a y s :
(a) In fin itiv e .of p u rp o s e , instead of ut w ith the su b ju n c
t i v e : so c uen im us a d o r a r e 5 M t. 2 . 2, cf. A c t . 7. 43,
‘ resp exit a u fe r r e 5 L k . 1. 25 : see also M k . 5. 3 2 , 13. 16, L k .
21. 38, Joh. 21. 3 e t c . ; also found in e a rly L a tin .
(b) In fin itiv e a f t e r habere : c non habent retrib u ere 5 L k .
14. 14 ( = ο υ χ ε γ ρ υ σ ι ν α ν τ α πο δ ο υ ν α ι ), cf. 12. 5° ‫ ג‬c m u lta
h ab eo uobis d ic e r e ’ Joh . 16. 12, cf. I I I Joh. 13.
T h is is also used in p ra c tic a lly a future sen se in the O ld
L a tin , e. g. ‘ om nes uos scan d alizari h abetis ’ M k . 14. 27 d
(— σ κ α ν δ α λ ι σ θ η σ ε σ θ ε ), ‘ ubi h abebat u en ire ’ L k . 10. i d
( = ε με λ λ ε ν ε ρ χ ε σ θ α ι ), cf. 19. 4 ; ‘ om n es hom in es resu rgere
habent ’ A th an a sian C re e d ; th e future in F re n ch and Ita lia n
has grow n out o f this ; also in S p an ish an d P o rtu g u e se .
B. Greek 39
(e) In fin itiv e a ft e r capere : 4non cap it prop h etam p e r ir e 5

L k . 13. 33 ( = obK ε ν δ έ χ ε τ α ι ; non est p o ssib ile ); also after
esse, e. g. 4 non est D o m in ica m caen am m an d u care 5 I C o r ‫־‬
11. 20 ( = it is not possible).
(d) In fin itiv e w it h A d je c t i v e : 4p oten s est d ep o situ m . . .
seru are I I T im . 1. 12, ‘ dign us . . . a ccip e re A p o c . 4 . 11, cf.
5. 2. T h is con struction is not unclassical, e sp e c ia lly in p o etry,
e. g . 4 in d o cilis . . . p a t i 5 H o r . Odes, 1. 1. 18, cf. 2. 43, 3. 25.
(e) In fin it iv e fo r th e G e r u n d : 4p otestatem d im itt e r e 5
L k . 5. 24 ( = ε ξ ο υ σ ί α ν α φ ι ε ν α ι ) ; in M t. 9. 6 and M k . 2 . 10
it is ‘ p o testatem d im itt e n d i5.
( f ) In fin itiv e a f t e r P r o h ib it io n s : c p ro h ib iti sunt a cc i-
p e r e 5 I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 12. 8, ‘ uetati sunt . . . loqui A c t .
16. 6 ( = κ ω λ υ θ ε ν τ ε ς . . . λ α λ η σ α ι ).
P A R T I C I P L E
§ 51. T h e V u lg a t e follow s the G re e k in u sin g th e

P r e s e n t P a r t ic ip le in s te a d o f th e In fin itiv e after verb s o f
ce asin g and c o n tin u in g : 4cum con su m m asset Iesu s p rae-
c ip ie n s 5 M t. 11. 1, cf. E p h . 1. 15, C o l. 1. 9, I I T h ess. 3. 13,
4p erseu erab at p u ls a n s 5 A c t . 12. 16 ( = ε πε με ν ε κ ρ ο υ ω ν );
cessare is, h o w ever, frequ en tly found w ith th e In fin itive,
e s p e c ia lly in th e O ld T est., e. g. 4 cessauerun t aed ificare
d u it a t e m 5 G en. 11. 8 etc.
§ 52. T h e A b la t iv e A b s o lu te is used lo o se ly instead o f

th e P a r t ic ip le , w h en th e S u b je ct is th e sam e as the S u b je c t
or O b je ct of th e p rin cip a l sen ten ce: 4ascen den te eo in
n au icu lam , secu ti sunt eum d iscip u li eius ’ M t. 8. 23, cf. 34,
9 . 27, A c t . 7. 21, 19. 30, I I C o r. 4 . 1 8 ; after tamquam
Ι Γ C or. 5. 2 0 ; lo o s e ly ap p en d ed after et quidem H e b r.
4 . 30
G E R U N D
§ 53. T h e G eru n d w it h in is freq u en tly used to ren d er

the G re e k A rticular Infinitive w ith p rep ositio n . T h is is
found in th e G a llica n P sa lte r, but w as a lw a y s altered b y
Jerom e in his Psalt. iuxta Hebr.\ e. g. ‘ in con u erten do
in im icu m m eum retrorsum ‫ ״‬Ps. 9. 4 (cum cecid erin t in im ici
m ei retrorsum P salt . iuxta Hebri), cf. 102. 22 ( 101. 23), 120
( 125). 1,142 ( 141). 4.
R E L A T I V E
§ 54 . T h e R e la t iv e is freq u en tly fo llo w ed b y a re«

d u n d an t D e m o n s t ra tiv e : ζ cuiu s non sum d ig n u s . . . so lu ere
co rrig iam calciam en to ru m e i u s ’ M k. 1. 7, ‘ q u o ru m non
au d ian tu r uoces eorum J Ps. 19. 3 ( 18. 4) >* so 03 (32). 12,40
( 39). 5, 144 ( 143). 1 5 , 146. 4 (145. 5 ) ; but in these cases th e
G re e k itself is influenced b y th e H e b r e w ; see ab o v e, § 24 .
T h e se illu stratio n s o f G raecism m igh t b e in d efin itely
exten d ed b y further e x a m p le s from the N e w T e s t ., sin ce
th e p ecu liarities o f th e L a t in m ain ly arise from its strict
ad h eren ce to th e h e b ra istic and hellen istic G re e k o f the
o rig in a l; som e features, h o w e ver, are best treated la te r in
th eir g ra m m a tica l o rd er.1
1 T h e m a n y p o in t s o f r e s e m b l a n c e b e t w e e n H o r a c e a n d J e r o m e (in th e
N e w T e s t .) a r e d u e to th e fa c t th a t e a c h w a s d e s i g n e d l y f o l l o w i n g a G r e e k
m o d e l. H o r a c e f r e e ly , e v e n p r o u d ly , a c k n o w le d g e d th a t h is lu t e w a s t u n e d
.b y th e L e s b i a n A l c a e u s , a n d th a t th e s t r a in s h e d r e w fro m it b r e a t h e d c th e
d e lic a t e s p ir it o f th e G r e c i a n M u s e ’ ; see Odes, I. 32. 5 ; Ii. 16. 3S ; 111.
30. 1 3 ; IV . 3. 12 ; Epist ., I. 19. 2 1 -3 4 .
Ill
TH E NATIVE EL E M E N T : L E X IC A L
PECULIARITIES
A. F O R M
§ 55. C h ristian la tin ity , th ou gh from one point o f view

the daw n o f a new era, cam e in at a late stag e in the
h isto ry o f the L a tin la n g u a g e and literature. T h e la n g u a g e
o f R o m e , lik e the c ity , w as not b u ilt in a d a y . A liv in g
la n g u a g e cannot stand s t i l l ; as tim e a d v an ces o ld form s
lose, in current use, so m e o f their o rigin al sign ifican ce an d
force, or acq u ire a new m ean in g w ith th e rise o f new ideas.
E s p e c ia lly in th e la n g u a g e o f religio n and th e o lo g y new
and stren gthen ed form s, new and lo ftier m ean in gs are
d e v elo p ed .
T h is new and p o p u la r elem en t, w h ile n a tu ra lly m ost
con spicuous in the O ld L a tin , is also found in the V u lg a te ,
even in those parts w h ich com e d irect from J e r o m e s h an d.
Jero m e felt him self, at best, a re v ise r; th e C ice ro n ian w as
h eld in ch e ck b y th e C h ristia n — b y reveren ce for the sacred
te x t, and regard for its fa m ilia rity to th e C h ristian read er.
T h e d esire to be in te llig ib le was stro n g e r than th e d esire to
be sch o larly.
T h e ch ief features o f th e p o p u lar sty le, as found in th e
V u lg a t e and, still m ore, in the u n corrected O ld L a tin , m a y
b e b riefly in d icated . T h e use o f new and stren gth en ed
form s is seen in a ll th e p rin cip a l parts o f sp eech . T h u s :
§ 56. i . N ou n s and A d je c t iv e s are len gth en ed b y the
2G42 G
42 The Native Element
use o f new term in ation s ; d im in u tives are fre e ly e m p lo y e d ;
new A b s tr a c ts are used, e s p e c ia lly A b s tr a c t s in th e P lu ra l,
in a C o n crete sense.
2. V e r b s are found in fu ller and stron ger form s, p ro d u ced
b y the use o f new w o rd s or o f n ew term in ation s. P r e p o s i
tions are p re fixed , so m etim es d o u bled , form ing new co m
pounds.
3. P ron ou n s are a d d e d to stren gth en th e 3rd person, or
to s u p p ly th e la c k o f the G re e k D efin ite A r tic le .
4. A d v e r b s are used w ith th e term in ation -ter instead o f
- e ; or are co m b in ed w ith p rep ositio n s, so as to form an
ad v e rb ial or p rep o sitio n al p h rase, a n ticip a tin g the p re p o s i
tions or ad v erb s of m odern R o m a n c e lan gu ages.
5. P rep o sitio n s are p re fix e d to N o u n s, to stren gthen the
m eaning o f th e C ase-fo rm .
6 . In C on stru ction , the In fin itive rep laces the classica l
S u b ju n ctiv e, and th e P resen t P a r tic ip le is fre e ly used,
eith er in d ep en d en tly, or w ith th e co p u lativ e esse.
7. T h e use o f O rig in a l S p e e c h (Oratio recta) b eco m es
m ore com m on , w h ile, in R e p o rt e d S p e e ch (Oratio obliqua)
the c la s sica l A c c . w ith In fin. g iv e s w a y to th e u se o f C o n -
ju n ctio n s— quod, quia, or quoniam — fo llo w ed freq u en tly
(even g e n e ra lly ) b y th e In d ica tiv e .
In a w ord, w e h a v e th e first stages o f the p ro cess b y
w h ich th e sy n th e tica l form s o f th e old classica l la n g u a g e s
are b ro k en u p into the a n a ly t ic a l form s o f m odern s p e e c h .1
§ 57. T h e d istin gu ish in g features here en u m erated fall
under th ree h e a d s : (d) L exical , (b) Inflexionaly (e) Syntac
tical. T h e L exical is con cern ed w ith words, th eir form
(in clu d in g th eir sp ellin g), an d th eir m ean in g. T h e first
question , therefore, is th at as to th e sp ellin g o f w o rd s in
th e V u lg a te .
1 S ee R o en sch , Itala un d Vulgata, p p . 271 ff.
Lexical Peculiarities 43
O R T H O G R A P H Y 1
§ 58 . T h e sp e llin g h ere a d o p te d — at least as far as

regards the N e w T e s t .— is th at o f the O x fo rd C r itic a l
E d itio n o f the V u lg a t e N .T ., w h ich rep ro d u ces the form s
found in the old est M S S ., e s p e c ia lly the Codex Am iatinus
(A ).; it m ust not be co n clu d e d , h o w ever, th at this or a n y
other an cien t M S . is a lw a y s con sistent in its o rth o g ra p h y ;
e. g. A has temtare in G o sp els, A c t s , and A p o c ., temptare in
the E p is t le s ; F {Fuldensis) has cotidie in A c t s 2 .4 6 , cottidie in
47, etc., etc. T h e ‘ ru sticitas ’ (as T isc h e n d o rf c a lls it) o f th ese
M S S . m ust not be ju d g e d b y a C icero n ian stan d ard , b u t
m ust b e considered on its own m e r its ; o n ly a b rie f su m
m a ry can be given here ; for fuller d etails the re ad er is
referred to the authorities cited b elo w .
T h e fo llo w in g d eviatio n s from cu sto m ary sp e llin g sh o u ld
be n o ted :
§ 59 . V o w e ls . A : con sp ersio , p arap sis. A E : ce e lu m ,

ceen a (but cen aculu m ), m eerere, p een itentia (but preelium ).
E : erugo, in gem escere, in tellegere, n eglegere. I : calcza-
m entum , A rzo p agu s ; abzcere, ezcere, e t c . ; D ionzsius, hzem s,
lacrzm a. U : adzzlescens, epistzda, lzzcusta, mzzrra. A ls o , as
altern ative form s, cledus, intingere, p ed ago gu s, scab zllu m ,
spiri/elis, ungentum .
§ 60 C o n so n a n ts.2 B ra^ iu m , o j t u l i ; eotidie, sim u la -
1 S e e th e Edio'o Minor, H a r d e n , Dictionary of the

P r a c f ., p p . x i- x iii ;
Vidg. N .T . , Psalt. iuxla liebr., I n t r o d ., p p . x x v i - x x v i i ;
I n t r o d ., p p . i x - x i ;
T is c h e n d o r f , N onum Testamentum Am iatinum , P r o l ., p p . x x v i i - x x x .
2 W h a t is c a l le d betacism ( t h e i n t e r c h a n g e o f b a n d v) c a u s e s g r e a t
c o n f u s io n in v e r b s o f th e fir s t c o n ju g a t io n ; e v e n th e S i x t i n e a n d C le m e n t in e
e d it io n s r e a d manclauil in M t. 4. 6, and donauit in R o m . 8. 3 2 , t h o u g h th e
G r e e k h a s th e fu tu re in e a c h c a s e .
G 2
erum, sepulc/2rum ; earacter, ela m y s (but chaos, charisma) ;
hau^ I T im . 6. 7 ; oijknus, f l a l a ; didvagma ; harena,
/^arundo, /201us (but esanna, um erus) ; m i/ia, ui/icus, 10que//a,
so//icitus ; temtare ; m ercen n arius, p ra e g n a s (but quotiens) ;
o/tortunus ; tus, /u rib u lu m , g r a b a t u m , Ydtora, qua//uor (but
li/us) ; s e s c e n ti; sm a ra g d u s.
In p ro p er nam es n ote: //elias, //zerem ias, ATzericho,
//Jerusalem ; Io/zannes, Isra/zcl, N ath an a/zel; Sarra ; Tabita
(but Τ '/Tarsus) ; Z m y r n a .
§ 61. A s s im ila t io n . T h e te n d e n cy o f th e later M S S . is

tow ard s assim ilatio n ; th e earlier the M S ., as a rule, th e
m ore frequen t are the u n assim ilated form s. T h u s w e h av e :
adf- (but ajH ictio ) ; a d I (but a//o q u i); adp- (but apparoro) ;
ads- (but assiduus, a s p ic e r e ); adt- (but a^/endere), etc.
cord- (but co / / ig e r e ); conm- (but c 07n 7n u t a r e ); coup- (but
C07n p reh e 11d ere, e t c .) ; conr ‫( ־‬but c o rrip e re , c o rru m p e re ), etc.
ex- (but exsu p erare , ex su rg e re ).
in i- ; inm- (but 17n 7n o la r e ); inp- (but i 7n p edim en tu m , etc.).
S im ila r ly , w o rd s are sep arated w h ich in the C lem entine
V u lg a t e are w ritten in o n e ; ante quam, bene focere, pater
fam ilias, etc. (but etsi, etiamsi).
F O R M OF W O R D S
E s p e c ia lly as seen in th e lengthening o f terminations.
N ouns
§ 62 . M a s c u lin e : (n) A g e n ts in - sor , V 07q th u s (of G o d )

circu m sp ecto r E c c lu s . 7. 12, con sp ecto r 36 . 19, eleu ato r
I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 22. 3, op erato r J o b 36 . 3, P ro v. 222 ‫״‬,
pro eliator Is a . 42. 13, redditor E c c lu s . 5. 4, susceptor P s. 3 .
4 etc. A ls o , o f m en, ascen so r E x . 15. 1 etc. ( = rider ; th e
C lassical term w o u ld be eques, w h ich a lso o ccu rs freq u en tly

in the V u lg a te ), b e llig e ra to r I M a cc. 15. 13, 16. 4, institor
Job 28. 8 etc., m a lle a to r G en . 4-. 22, J o b 41. 15, p o llin cto r
E z e k . 39. 15, p ro sp ecto r E c c lu s . 3 . 34, 11. 32, rep ro m isso r
E c c lu s . 29. 21, 22, sep arato r Z a ch . 9.6 ( = a stranger), so m
niator G en . 37. i g etc., su b san n ato r E c c lu s . 33. 6, su su rrator
E cc lu s. 5. 17.
In the N e w T e sta m e n t m ay b e found accep to r, ad n u n -
t'iator, ad p etito r, con su m m ator, discreto r, intentator, p ra e
cessor, ren um erator, sed u cto r, etc.
C o rresp o n d in g fem inines in -trix\ assistrix, h a b ita trix
(Jer. 21. 13), d o c t rix , e le c trix , e x a s p e r a tr ix , in ritatrix, etc.
(b) A b s tr a c t s in -or: a lb o r L e v . 13. 16, 25, 39 ( = w h ite
ness), d u lco r E c c lu s . 11. 3, p la co r E c c lu s . 4 . 13, 39. 23,
uiror Isa. 15» 6, 35. 7.
(e) A b s tr a c t s o f 4th D eclen sio n in - u s : ap o sto latu s,
b im atu s (M t. 2. 16), a ccu b itu s (also d isc- and rec-), d u catu s
(M t. 15. 1 4 ; also O .T .), incolatus P s. 120. 4 ( 119. 5), m a n ci
patus, nuptus, ob d u ctu s, ornatus, etc.
§ 63. F e m in in e : A b s tr a c t s te rm in atin g in -io, -tas, -go,
-antia, -ura e t c .; a v e r y la r g e class : e. g .
(d) a d b reu iatio , absco n sio , con tritio Isa. 59. 7, R o m . 3 . 16
( = destruction), con cu lcatio , con flatio Jer. 51. 17 ( = a m olten
im age), cu sto d itio , defunctio, d em in o ratio E c c lu s . 22. 3
( = d isgrace), d em o ratio , d esp o n satio , d orm itatio, eu asio ,
ex a u d itio , in con su m m atio W isd . (S a p .) 3 . 16 ( = in co m p lete
ness), in crep atio , inspiratio, iussio, m essio, p raesto latio J o b
17. 15 ( = ex p ectatio n ).
In the N e w T estam en t, circu m d a tio , circu m u en tio , d e li
batio, d iscretio , ieiunatio, oboeditio, resolutio, su b m in i
stratio, u ilicatio .
(e) A b stra cts in -tas: h u m ilitas, m aturitas, n atiu itas,
nim ietas W is d . (S ap .) 4 . 4, religio sitas E c c lu s . 1. 17, 18, 26.
P e cu lia r to th e N e w T estam en t a re in cred u litas, lo n gan i
m itas, p atern itas, etc.
( / ) A b str a cts in -do and -go: d isertitu d o Isa. 33. 19,
grossitudo I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 7. 26, Jer. 52. 21, in q u ietu d o
Ju d ith 14. 9, n igred o N a h . 2 . 10, p ig red o P ro v . 19. 15,
p in gu ed o, putredo, salsu go .
(g) A b s tr a c t s in -antic1 and -entia : con cu p iscen tia, e x t o l
len tia E c c lu s . 23. 5, 26. 12, fraudulen tia, h o n o rificen tia
Ju d ith 15. 10, in ob oed ien tia, sufferentia, sufficientia, su sti
nentia.
(h) A b s tr a c t s in -ura\ a llig atu ra , assa tu ra I I S a m .
( I I R e g .) 6 .1 9 , ca p illa tu ra I P e t. 3. 3, co m b u stu ra L e v . 13.
28, creatura, d elatu ra, fix u ra Joh. 20. 25, la e su ra ( = h u rtfu l
ness), ligatu ra, p aratu ra I I C h ron . 5. 5, p ercu ssu ra, pressura,
rasura.
§ 64 . N e u t e r : (z) In stru m en tals in -men, -mentum:

gen im en , lin team en , u itu lam en W is d . (S ap .) 4 . 3.
ad iu ram en tu m T o b . 9 . 5, ad su m en tu m , d eliram en tu m ,
exsecram en tu m E c c lu s . 15. 13, figm en tu m , indum en tum ,
inquinam entum , o d o ram en tu m , o p erim en tu m , sp iram en tu m
Jo b 26 . 4, tutam en tum .
(k) N ou n s in -arium, -erzum, -orh tm : a d iu to riu m , a tr a
m entarium , ce lla riu m , cin ctoriu m , cu cu m erariu m , em u n c
to riu m , in properium , lib ato riu m I M ace. 1. 23, liciato riu m ,
m utatorium , opertoriu m , p ro p itiato riu m , p u lm en tariu m ,
reclin atorium , refrigeriu m , stratorium , su fflatoriu m .
(/) O ther fo rm s: crem iu m Ps. 102. 3 (101. 4), d e a m b u
lacru m I K g s . ( I I I R e g .) 7 . 2, fun dibulum I M a c c .6 .5 1 , g a u d i
m onium B a r. 4. 34, san ctificiu m P s. 78 (77). 69, u estibu lu m .
§ 65 (zzz). D im in u tiv e s in -idus, -ellus, -illus, etc., and

corresp o n d in g fem inines and n eu ters: h u m eru lu s, lep u s
culus, leunculus, p in n acu lu m , regu lu s, ren un culus, retiacu lu m ,
sp iracu lu m ; a ra tiu n cu la , a u ricu la , c a su la , d am u la, d ecip u la,
facula, iuuen cula, la g u n c u la ( = a bottle), situ la ( = b u ck et),
so rbitiu n cu la.
asce lla, b if e lla , c a p s e lla , m am illa.
gen icu lu m , o lfacto rio lu m Isa. 3 . 20 etc.
§ 66 (n). A d je c t iv e s u se d s u b s t a n t i a l l y . In all
lan g u ag es a d je ctiv e s tend to be thus u sed , th eir nouns
b ein g understood ; so in E n g lis h : G e n e ra l (officer), C a th e
dral (church), etc. E x a m p le s in the V u lg a t e are :
a lb a (uestim enta) Joh. 20. 12,1 a ltilia (an im alia) M t. 22. 4 ,
b yssin u m , collecta, con lactan eu s, con flatile, ficu ln ea, m a g
n alia, natale, o b rizu m , salu tare, etc.
T h e sam e te n d e n c y is seen in P a rticip les ; adeptus ,
expectus b e co m e an adept, an expert. S o at R o m e the
Praefectus 21rbi b e ca m e a Praefectus \ as M om m sen sa y s,
the p articip le b eca m e a substan tive as the office b ecam e
a su bstan tive office.
§ 67. (0) S im p le n o u n s n ot fo u n d in C la s s ic a l L a t in .
E x a m p le s a r e :
b urdo (a m u le) I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 5. 17, cam u s (a b rid le),
catta (a cat or w easel) B a r . 6. 21, co ch le a (a w in d in g stair
case), e x p en sa (a le v y ), fram ea (a sw ord), g ro ssu s, lam ia (the
n igh t m onster), p a p ilio (a tent),2 q u a te rn io , refrigeriu m ,
san ctu ariu m , s a ra b a la (hose) D a n . 3 . 94, sem icin ctiu m (an
a p ro n ; it has been g ra e c iz e d into σ ι μι κ ω θ ω υ A c t . 19. 12).
§ 68. (p) C o m p o u n d n o u n s. T h e V u lg a te , and still

m ore the O ld -L a t in version s, ab o u n d in co m p o u n d nouns ·
som e o f them as old as P lau tu s, others o f recen t g ro w th and
o cca sio n a lly o f C h ristian co in ag e.
1 S o th e 1st S u n d a y a f t e r E a s t e r w a s c a l le d Dominica in albis, b e ca u s e th e

n e w ly - b a p t iz e d s t ill w o r e t h e i r w h i t e ro b e s .
2 W h e n c e th e I t a lia n padiglione, th e F r e n c h pavilion, and o u r o w n pavilion.
O f the form er class are su ch w o rd s as : m u lti‫ ־‬, stu lti-, uan i-
lo q u iu m , d eliram en tu m , d esp o liato r, stab ilim en tu m , e t c .;
also a d je ctiv e s, as con d ign u s, uan iloqu u s, u ersip ellis. O f
th e la tter c la s s : con sen ior I P e t. 5. 1, in con su m m atio,
ineruditio, in m em o ratio , in ordin atio, m u scip u la, sa n g u isu g a
(h orseleach ) P ro v . 30. 15.
A d je c t iv e s
§ 69 . T h e V u lg a te is rich in a d je ctiv e s, e s p e c ia lly

v e rb a ls in -bilis, -atus, and situs ‫ י‬and n e gativ es in in.
E x a m p le s a r e :
accen sib ilis H e b r. 12. 18, a cc e p ta b ilis , con tem tibilis,
co rru p tib ilis (φ θ α ρ τ ό ς ), d e p re ca b ilis, d esp erab ilis, d o cib ilis,
in m arcescib ilis ( α μά ρ α ν τ ο ς ), in accessib ilis, in ce ssa b ilis (α κ α -
τ α πα υ σ τ ο ς ) I I P et. 2 . 14, in con fusibilis, in co n m u n icab ilis
(α κ ο ι ν ώ ν η τ ο ς ) W isd . (S a p .) 14. 21, in co rru p tib ilis (ά φ θ α ρ τ ο ς ),
in cred ib ilis, in d eclin abilis, in ex term in ab ilis, in e x tin g u ib ilis,
in in terpretabilis, in p o rtabilis, in ratio n ab ilis, in rep reh en sib ilis,
in scru tab ilis, in u estigabilis ( = oik ε υ γ ν ω σ τ ο ς P ro v . 5 . 6,
= α ν ε ξ ι χ ν ί α σ τ ο ς R o m . 11. 33, E p h . 3 . 8),1 m en su rab ilis,
m o tab ilis (G en. 1. 2 1 ; th e a ctiv e sense is u n -L a tin ), o d ib ilis,
p assib ilis, pen etrabilis, p ersu asib ilis, ration abilis, rep reh en si
b ilis (κ α τ ε γ ν ω σ με ν ο ς ), su ad ib ilis, tractab ilis, u en erab ilis.
§ 70 . O th er a d je ctiv e s in -lis a r e : h y b e rn a lis, o rigin alis,

p ascu alis, p rin cip alis, su b iu g alis, to rn atilis.
§ 71. V e r b a ls in -atus, situs', ceru icatu s E c c lu s . 16. 1 1 ,

co rd atu s, crap u latu s, d iscip lin atu s, lin gu atu s, m u ratu s
( = w a lle d ) N u m . 13. 20, m urratus (m in gled w ith m yrrh ),
ru b ricatu s, tim oratus ( = ε υ λ α β η ς ) L k . 2 . 25, A c t . 8. 2,
uiratus (virtuous) E c c lu s . 28. 19. In -itu s : co m p ed itu s,
ignitus, etc.
S e c a ls o b e lo w , § 74.
§ 72. V e r b a ls in -arius, -orris, often used as nouns,
d en o tin g the follow er of a trad e or ca llin g : ad m in istrato riu s
Iie b r . 1. 14, arcariu s, a u ricu lariu s (a secreto = a p riv y
co u n cillo r) I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 2 3 .2 3 ‫־‬, caem en tariu s, focarius,
p la g ia riu s (kidn apper) I T im . 1. 10, scen o facto riu s, stab il-
larius.
§ 73. T erm in atio n s in -anus, -cites, -intis, -ostis, e t c .:

h ortu lan u s Joh. 20. 15, q u ad rid u an u s Joh. 11. 39, te m p o ra -
ileus, em pticius, p elliciu s, su bcin ericiu s, m orticin us, sero
tinus, prim itiuus, lin guosus, querulosus, trem ebun dus.
§ 74. A d je c t iv e s co m p o u n d ed with in- an d re -. N e g a

tives w ith in - : those te rm in atin g in -bilis h ave been giv en
a b o v e (§ 69 ) ; others are : inaquosus, in con sum m atus W is d .
(S ap .) 4 . 5, indeficiens E c c lu s . 24. 6, in d iscip lin atu s, inla-
m entatus I I M acc. 5. 10, inpaen itens R o m . 2. 5, in sen satu s:
w ith r e - ; reprobus.
§ 75. A d je c t iv e s co m p o u n d ed w ith p rep o sitio n s :

cum : co a e q u alis, co m m en d aticiu s I I C o r. 3 . 1, co m p lacitu s
Ps. 77. 7 ( 76. 8 co m p lacitio r), co n co rp o ra lis E p h . 3 . 6,
con dign us, co n d u cticiu s I M ac. 6. 29, con figu ratu s, con
form is R o m . 8. 29, co n iu g alis R u th 1. 12, co n san gu in eu s.
per : p eran tiquus Jos. 9 . 5, p ergran d is Jos. 24 . 26, p erlu cid u s
A p o c . 21. 21, p erm agn ificu s E sth . 2. 18, p erm o d icu s
I I Chron. 24. 24, p erp au cu s, p ersen ilis Jos. 23. 1, p eru a-
lidus Isa. 30 . 14.
p rae: p raeclaru s, p ra e g ran d is E z e k . 13. 11, p ra e sa g u s G en .
41. i i , p raestab ilis Joel. 2 . 13, p raeu alid u s Isa. 31 . 1.
super : su p erglo rio su s D a n . 3 . 53, su p e rla u d a b ilis ib., su p e r
substan tialis M t. 6. 11, superuacuus.
§ 76. A d je c t iv e s com p ou n d ed w ith other w o r d s : an im ae-

2G-12 ‫־׳‬ H
5° The Native Element
quus, falsilo q u u s Job 16. 9, lo n gaeu u s, lo n gan im is, o m n i
m odus Is a . 66. 11, p rim ogen itu s, p u sillan im is, secu n d o p rim u s
Lie. 6. i , unanim is, u n ico lo r G en . 30. 35, unicorn is, un igen itus,
unoculus M t. 18. 9.
§ 77. P a rtic ip le s used as a d je c t iv e s 1 : ben ed ictu s, b e n e

p lacitu s, circu m o rn atu s P s. 144 ( 143). 12, com positus, con e-
lectus I P et. 5 . 13, d iscalceatu s, in argen tatu s B a ru ch 6. 7,
50, 56, 70, insensatus, placitu s, sen satus, su p erad u ltu s I C o r.
7. 36, tim oratus.
V erb s
§ 78. (a) S im p le : b u llire Job 41 . 22 (cf. It. b o llire, F r.

b o u illir), cu d ere Isa. 41 . 7 (to strik e), m inare (cf. It. m inare,
F r . m ener), p licare, se trica re E c c lu s . 32. 15 (to lin ger).
§ 79. (b) D e r iv e d :
(i) F ro m n o u n s: aeru gin are, an gu stiare, b aiu lare, b u cci-
nare P s. 81. 3 ( 80. 4), com p edire, crap u lari Ps. 78 ( 77). 65,
d u lco ra re Pro v. 27. 9, h ereditäre, m en surare, m erid iare Job
24. i i , p la g a re Z a ch . 13. 6 ( = to sm ite), sagin are, sagittare,
sco p are, sponsare, tribu lare, tritu rare.
(ii) F ro m a d je c t iv e s : am aricare A p o c . 10. 9, 10, a n x ia ri,
b reu iare, cap tiu are, d ecim are (to tithe), d em en tare A c t . 8 . 1 1,
exo ssare Jer. 50.1 7 (to b re a k the bones), h u m iliare, ieiu n are,
in quietare, m a lig n a re, m ed iare Joh. 7 . 14, n au fragare I T im .
1 T h a t is , u sed to exp ress state n ot action, u sed as e p it h e t s n o t a s

p r e d i c a t iv e a d je c t i v e s ; o f c o u r s e a ll p a r t i c i p le s a r e a d je c t i v a l in fo rm ; th ey
i t a k e p a r t ’ o f th e p r o p e r t ie s o f th e a d je c t i v e . T h is m ay happen with■
a ll fo u r p a r t i c i p le s : th e present s u ff e r in g , t h e future g lo r y , a w e l l -instructed
m a n , h o ly a n d reverend is H i s n a m e . T h e ill- in s t r u c t e d r e a d e r m a y fa ll in to
th e t r a p o f a p p ly i n g it in A c t s 7. 2 2 , w h e r e t h e A . V . t e l ls u s th a t M o s e s w a s
learned in a ll th e w is d o m o f th e E g y p t i a n s ; b u t th e G r e e k is Ι πα ώ ζ ύ θ η and
th e V u lg a t e eruditus e st ; th e R . V . r e m o v e s a ll a m b ig u it y b y r e n d e r i n g ?t?as
instructed .
1. 19, obu iare, onustare J u d ith 15. 7, p ig ritari A c t . 9. 38,
p rin cipari M k. 10. 42, p rop itiari, sim ilari H e b r. 2 . 17, tristari,
ueterare H e b r. 8. 13.
(iii) F ro m com p aratives : m inorare.
(iv) F ro m s u p e r la tiv e s : pessim are, p ro x im are .
(v) F ro m a d v e r b s : elo n gare, m an icare (from m ane) Lie.
21. 38.
§ 80 . V e rb s com p ou n d ed w ith p re p o s itio n s:
ab: abhorrescere I I M ac. 6. 12, a b la c ta re (to w ean ).
ad: a d aq u are G en. 29. 2, a d d e cim a re I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 8 .1 5 ,
ad im p lere, a d leu iare, ad pretiare, ad pro p iare, a d p r o x im a re
Ps. 32. 10 (31. 9), ad u n are.
circum : circu m aed ificare L a m . 3.7, circu m cin ge re E c c lu s .
45. 9, circu m fodere Is a . 34. 15, circu m fu lg ere, c ircu m
le g e re A c t . 28. 13, circu m u allare Isa. 29. 2.
a im : co ad u n are Joel 2. 16, co a g u la re , co a m b u la re W is d .
(S ap .) 19. 20, co an gu stare, c o a p tare E x . 36. 32, c o h a b i
tare, con laborare, con lu ctari E c c lu s . 51. 25, co n m acu lare,
con m an d ere P ro v. 30. 14, co n m an d u care A p o c . 16. 10
( = gnaw ), con pati, con p lan tare R o m . 6. 5, co n reg n are
I I T im . 2. 12, con resu scitare E p h . 2. 6, con uesci A c t .
1. 4.
de: d ecalu are , d ecan tare, d ecertare, d e co lla re ( = b e h e a d ),
deferuere E sth . 2. 1, d efrau d are, d e g lu tire , d eh o n estare
P ro v. 25. 8, den igrare, d esp u m are J u d e 13, destern ere
G en. 24. 32 ( = ungird), d eu iare, d eu itare ( = avo id ).
dis - : diffam are, diffugere, d iscep tare, d isco o p erire, d is
crim in are J u d ith 10. 3.
e, ex : effugere, elu cescere, e lu c id a re E c c lu s . 24. 31, e x c e r e
b rare Is a . 66. 3, e x c o la re M t. 23. 24, e x c o ria re M ic.
3. 3, e x p o rrig e re E c c lu s . 14. 13, exsu fflare.
i n : incrassare, in eb riari, infatuare, inhon orare, in lu cescere,
inm inuere, inproperare, insufflare.
I-I 2
ob : o b d u lcare J u d ith 5.1 5 , o b du rare, obfirm are, o b m u tescere,
o bstupescere, obten ebrare, o b tu rare, o b u m brare.
per\ pereffluere H e b r . 2. 1 ( = drift a w a y ), p erlin ire W isd .
(S a p .) 13. 14, p erm u n d are M t. 3 . 12, p erstillare, p er-
transire, p e ru rg e re .
prae\ p raecellere, p ra e co g ita re M k . 13. 11, p raed estin are,
praefin ire, p raeo rd in are.
praeter : praeterfluere, p ra e te rg re d i, p raeterm ittere.
pro : p ro lo n gare, p ro p a la re H eb r. 9. 8, p ro p itiari, p ro p u rg are
E cc lu s. 7. 33, p ro scin d ere Isa. 28. 24, protestari.
re\ reaed ificare, re e x p e c ta re Is a . 28.1 0 ,1 3 , refigu rare W is d .
(S ap .) 19. 6, refo cilla re , regen erare I P e t. 1. 3, rein uitare
L k . 14. 12, re m an d are Isa. 28. io , 13, rep ro p itiare, re ‫־‬
sp ergere, retru d ere G en . 41. 10.
su b : subinferre I I P e t. 1. 5, subintrare, su b lim are, su b n au igare
A c t . 27. 4, su b n eru are ( = to h am strin g), subsann are
( = to la u g h at), su b silire I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 6. 16.
super : su p erabu n dare, su p eraedificare, su p ercrescere, su p er
exten d ere, su p e rg a u d e re , su p erin p en dere I I C or. 12. 15,
su p erin d u ere I I C o r . 5 . 2, su p erlu crari M t. 25. 20, su p er
ordin are G al. 3 . 15, supersem in are M t. 13. 25, su p er-
uestire I I C o r. 5. 4.
su p ra : su p rased e re E c c lu s . 33. 6.
tran s : tran sfigu rare, tran sn au igare, tran sp lan tare,tran su ad ari
E z e c . 47. 5, transuertere.
S o m e o f th e verbs giv en a b o ve are, as m a y be seen, co m
pounded w ith tw o p re p o sitio n s: m an y o ther com p ou n d
form s m a y be d etecte d in the O ld L a t in M S S . C o m p o u n d s
oth erw ise form ed, such as ttalefacere, m a y b e treated as tw o
sep arate w o rd s.1
§ 81. V e r b s in -ficare. T h e se verb s form a sp ecial class,
1 S e e th e Praefatio to t h e E d it i o m in o r o f t h e V u lg a t e N . T , , p . x ii i.
and th ough th ey are found in both T estam en ts y e t th e

e x a m p le s w ith w h ich w e are m ost fam iliar o ccu r m ore
frequ en tly in the N e w : e. g. castificare I Pet. 1. 22, c la ri
fica re, con u iu ificare, gratificare, salu ificare o ccu r only in th e
N e w T e s t a m e n t ; m irificare on the o th er hand is found o n ly
in the O l d : aed ificare, beatificare, fructificare, glo rifica re ,
honorificare, iu stificare, laetificare, m agn ificare, m ortificare,
pacificare, sacrificare, san ctificare, sign ificare, testificare,
uiuificare o ccu r in both.
IV
L E X I C A L P E C U LI A R I TI ES (continued )
B. N EW A N D U N U S U A L M E A N I N G S
§ 82 . H e re w e re ach the h eart of the s u b je c t ; not the

form but the 7neaning o f w ords. T h e d ee p e r th ou gh ts
w h ich u n d e rla y th e o rig in a l H eb rew and G re e k d em an d ed
not o n ly new w ords b u t a new use o f old w ords, in ord er to
exp ress the h igh er id eals o f the new faith and the new life.
E v e n the O ld T e sta m e n t w as tran slated into L a t in b y m en
w h o w ere liv in g in th e lig h t o f the N e w .
§ 83. O n ly a selectio n o f new m eanin gs and o f referen ces
can be g iven here, in the ord er o f the different p arts o f
speech.
N ou n s:
allocutio = satisfaction, c o m f o r t : W isd . (S a p .) 3 . 18, 8. 9,
19. 12.
ambitio = pomp : I Macc. 9 . 37, Act. 25 . 23.
animositas = wrath : Hebr. 11. 27·
argumentum = (1) t o k e n : W isd . (Sap .) 5.. 11, 19. 1 2 ;
(2) a rid d le, d a rk sp eech : W isd . (S ap .) 8. 8.
artiadus = point of tim e : G en . 7. 13.
cau sa : sine cau sa = in vain : G a l. 3 . 4.
conditio = creation : E z e k . 28. 15.1
confessio = praise, t h a n k s g iv in g ; cf. confiteri.
confitsio = sh am e : H e b r . 12. 2, Ju d e 13.
1 ‘ Id e m est condere quod creare·, q u a m q u a m in L a t in a e lin g u a e co n
s u e t u d in e d ic a t u r a liq u a n d o acarc p r o co q u o d e st g ig n e re ; s e d g r a c c a
d is c e r n it . H o c e n im d ic im u s c r e a t u r a m q u o d illi χ τ ί σ μα u e l κ τ ί α ι ν u o c a n t ;
e t c u m s in e a m b ig u it a te lo q u i u o lu m u s n o n d ic im u s creare s e d condere \
Aug. D c fide ct Sym b. 5.
conquisitio = q u e s tio n in g : A c t . 15. 7.
consummatio — com pletion*
corniersatio — m ann er o f life.
correptio = reproof, correction : T it. 3 . ro.
depositio = la y in g a s id e : I P et. 3. 21, I I P e t. 1. 14.
detractio = s la n d e r : I P e t. 2. 1. In the N e w T e st, o n ly in
PI ur.
diffidentia = u n b e lie f: R o m . 4. 20, E p h . 2. 2, 5. 6.
eloquium = w ord (frequen t in Pss.)
fu n is, funiculus = m easu rin g-lin e, lot.
honestas = w ealth : E c c lu s . 11. 14.
incola = foreign er.
inflatio = sw e llin g (insolence) : I I C o r. 12. 20.
intentio = th ou gh t, p u rp o se : H e b r. 4 . 12.
iubilum = jo y fu l s h o u t : I I S a m . ( II R e g .) 6· * 5‫־‬
indicium = sen ten ce : Jer. 26. 11.
ius titia = righ teousn ess.
lacus = pit : M k . 12. I , A p o c . 14. 19.
libum = d rin k-o fferin g. .
lignum = t r e e : Jer. 11. 19 (but see the A . and R .V . t h e r e );
o f the cross : A c t . 5. 30, 10. 39, 13. 29, G a l. 3. 13, I P et.
2. 2 4 ; o f th e sto ck s : A c t . 16. 2 4 ; plur. = s t a v e s : M e.
14. 43, 48.
maleficus = sorcerer.
medietas = half.
opinio = ru m o u r (α κ ο η ): M t. 4. 24, 24. 6 (plur.)
oratio = p rayer.
i)raeuaricatio = tran sgression (so p raeu aricato r = tra n s
gressor).
querella 1 : sine q u e re lla = b la m e le ss: Lk«. 1. 6.
1 In th e A . V . o f C o l. 3. 13 c i f a n y m an h a v e a quarrel a g a in s t a n y
th e ‘ q u a r r e l ’ is a r e n d e r in g : o f th e V u lg a t e querella r a t h e r th an o f th e G r e e k
μο μφ ή ( R .V . complaint).
redemptor = red eem er (H e b r, go'el ) : A c t . 7. 35 o f M oses.
reditus = p ro d u ce.
refectio — g u e st-c h a m b e r: Mlc. 14. 14.
saeculum = tim e, past, present, or fu t u r e ; in s a e c u la = for
ever.
similitudo = b y - w o r d ; p a ra b le (but also co n stan tly in the
sense of likeness).
stabitlum = inn : L k . 10. 34.
substantia : om nem su bstan tiam = e v e ry liv in g th in g G en .
7. 4 e t c . ; = go o ds, p ossession s : L k . 8. 43, 15. 12 etc.
susceptor = h elp er (frequen t in Pss.).
testamentum = covenant.
testimofiium = w itness, often u sed of the ark and o f th e
tab ern acle.
titul7Ls = m onum ent (in O ld T est.) I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 18. 18.
traductio = r e p r o o f : W isd . (S a p .) 2. 14 etc., and so the
verb = to e x p o se to r e p r o a c h : M t. 1. 19, C o l. 2. 15.
uacuitas = leisure, in dolen ce : W is d . (S a p .) 13. 13.
uirga = rod, sceptre.
uirtus — pow er, a r m y ; 4D o m in u s uirtutum ’ = L o r d o f
hosts (ch iefly in P s s .) ; p lu r. = m igh ty , w o r k s ; also o f
a class o f A n g e l s : E p h . 1. 21, I P e t. 3 . 22.
tiisitatio = visitation b y G o d : L k . 19. 44, I P et. 2. 12, 5. 6.
A b s tr a c t for c o n c r e t e :
accubitus, d iscu bitu s, recu bitu s = seat.
captiuitas = cap tives : E p h . 4 . 8 ; cf. Ps. 6 8 .1 8 (67. 19) etc.
desidersiim = th in g d esired : P s. 21 (20). 3, 78. 30 (77. 29).
indictio = m en fo rm in g a le v y : I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 5.1 3 ,1 4 .
obligatio = bond : A c t . 8. 23.
sanctificatio = sa n c tu a r y : P s. 114 ( 113). 2.
transmigratio = cap tives : E zelc. 3. 11, 15 etc.
A b s tr a c t nouns are co n stan tly used in th e P lu r a l—
e s p e c ia lly in the P ss.— to denote con crete in s ta n c e s; cf. the
£n egligen ces and ig n o r a n ce s’ o f our L it a n y . T h e 119th

(118th) P salm alone furnishes num erous e x a m p le s : e lo q u ia ,
iu d icia, justificationes, iu stitiae, m iserationes, m iserico rd iae,
testim on ia.
§ 84. Adjectives:
aeidus = s k y -b lu e : E s th . 1. 6, 8. 15.
contrarius = on the w a y to : E c c lu s . 23. 12 (15).
modicus = sm all, o f tim e e tc.1 ; a w ord ch ara cteristic o f
p o p u lar L a tin ; pusillus is also used, but less freq u en tly ;
paritus ra re ly (o n ly on ce in the N e w T est., A c t . 12. 18).
pacificus = a p eace-o fferin g (with u ictim a or hostia).
pinguis = fr u it fu l: N u m . 13. 21, Ps. 68. 15 ( 67. 16) etc.
rudis — undressed (of c l o t h ) : M t. 9. 16, M k . 2. 21.
saecularis = etern al (o f t im e s ) : I I T im . 1. 9, T it. 1. 2 ; also
= w o rld ly , h avin g to do w ith this w orld : I C o r. 6. 3 ,4 ,
H e b r. 9 . 1.
singularis — alone : M k . 4 . 10 e tc.2
uacuus : in uacuum = in vain (ε ι ς Kwov) : I I C o r. 6. 1, G a l.
2. 2 ; uacuum (sc. tem p u s) = le is u r e : I C or. 16. 12.
§85. Verbs:
abire — go (sim p ly) : M t. 12. 1 etc.
abnegare = reject, d en y.
accipere — ta k e (sim p ly).
adhaerere, aedificare : used in figu rative sense.
aem ulari = d esire : I C o r. 12. 31, 14. 1, 39.
colligere = entertain : M t. 25. 35, 38, 43.
communicare = defile.
compungere : in pass. = to feel rem o rse : A c t . 2. 37‫״‬
concutere = s t rik e : Job. 1. 19, L k . 3. 14.
1 S e c L ü fstcd t, p. 1‫ ך‬.
2 ‘In P s . SO. 13 ( 70. 14) o c c u r s th e e x p r e s s i o n singularis ferns =-- th e w i ld
boar I tab cinghialc, F ren ch sanglwr).
deferre = respect, defer to : D t. 28. 50.
dimittere = (1) d ism iss : L k . 2. 29 e t c . ; (2) forgive M t. 6. 12
e t c .; (3) leave behind : G en. 42. 33 ; (4) p e rm it: M t. 3 .1 5 .
dissimulare — fo rb e a r: I S a m . (I R e g .) 23. 13.
dormire = d i e : I Cor» 7. 39 etc.
emendare = chastise (πα ι δ ε ύ ε ι ) : L k . 23. 16 .
eructare = utter : Pss., and M t. 13. 35.
euacuare = b rin g ‫ ־‬to n a u g h t : R o m . 3. 3.
festinare — strive : H e b r. 4 . 11.
intendere = look on, regard . '
meditari = im agin e (w ith a cc.) .
mittere = pu t (F r. m ettre) ; also = c a s t 1 : M t. 22. 13.
nubere — m a rry (general).
opponere = ta k e in p le d g e : D t. 24 . 6.
peregrinari (in) — ta k e stran gely, b e su rp rised at : I P e t.
4 . 12.
p e rir e : be lost.
possidere — a cq u ire : G en. 4. 1, L k . 18. 12.
praeterire — pass b y : M t. 24. 35, L k . 10. 31.
regnare = b e co m e k in g : I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 12. r.
retinere = k e e p in m ind : I I T h e ss . 2. 5.
silere — rest L k . 23. 5 6 ; frequen t in I M acc.
sustinere = w ait fo r ; frequent in Pss.
u elle : intrans. = d e lig h t : Ps. 112 ( 111). 1 ; trans, d e s ir e : M t.
27. 43· ^
uidere = b e w a re : M t. 18. 10.
§ 86. Verbs modified in meanings.
(a) T ran sitiv e s used in t ra n s it iv e ly :
auertere : P s. 89. 45 (88. 4 7 ); th e pass, is also used in the
sam e se n se : D t. 31. 20.
conuertere : B a ru ch 4 . 28, I M a cc. 1. 21, A c t . 7. 42.
1 S o in M t. 5. 29 ; b u t in 3 0 th e V g . h a s cat ( G r . p lu r . 0 λ η Ο 7} in 29; ά πέ λ θ τ )
X B D m in . in 3 0 , a n d J e r o m e fo llo w e d t h e s e M S S . ) .
elongare = b e fa r : Ps. 55 . 7 ( 54. 8).
mediare : Joh. 7, 14.
prosperare: Ps. 118 ( 117). 25. J
recordari (adtcersum): N e h . ( I I E sd r.) 13. 29.
retardare : E cc lu s. 16. 14, 51 . 32.
{b) In tran sitives as tran sitives :
complacere : Ps. 35 ( 34). 14. ’
em anare: Jac. 3. i i (em anat . . . aqu am ).
germ in are : G en . 1. i i , 3 . 18 etc.
plu ere: E x . 9 . 18, 23, Lie. 17. 29 etc. |V5 5 )
potare : Ps. 36. 8 (35. 9), A p o c . 14. 8 !/etc.
reclinare : J u d g. 16. 19, M t. 8. 20, L k . 2. 7.
transmigrare : L a m . 4. 22.
tremere (serm ones meos) : Isa. 66. 2.
(e) P erso n al as im p e r s o n a l:
capit — it is possible : L k . 13. 33.
complacet = it is a pleasan t th in g t o : Ps. 40. 16 (39. 14), L k .
12. 32 etc.
(d) Im p erso n al as p e r s o n a l:
paenitere: M k . 1. 15, A p o c . 2. 2 ‫ ז‬etc.
taedere: I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 10. 32, M k . 14. 33.
(e) A c t iv e as d eponen t, i. e. used in p assive form with
active m e a n in g : ‫׳‬
certari: E c c lu s . 11. 9.
m u rm u rari: E x . 16. 8, N u m . 14, 2.
obscurmd = h id e : Ps. 139. 11 ( 138. 12).
( / ) D ep o n en t used in active form :
gratificare: E p h . 1. 6.
lamentare: M t. 11. 17, L k . 7. 32.
(g ) D ep o n en t w ith p assive m e a n in g :
adm irari = b e ad m ired : E c c lu s 24. 3.
consolari: I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 13. 39, Ps. 77. 2 (76. 3) etc.
dem oliri: E z e k . 6. 6, Joel 1. 17, 2. 8‫־‬
bo The Native Element
interpretari', frequen t in the p h rase ‘ q u o d (qui) in terp re
tatur 1* etc.
m e tiri = be m e a su re d : Jer. 33. 22, A m o s 7. 17, M t. 7. 2
(cf. rem et. M k. 4 . 24, L k . 6. 3 8 ); in A p o c . 21. 17 the
best M S S . read ‘ m ensus est m urus ,, th ough the S ix t in e
and C lem en tin e editions h ave ‘ m ensus est m urum ’ and
the G re e k is ε με τ ρ η σ ε ν 70 τ ε ι χ ο ς .
promereri = b e fa v o u ra b ly im pressed : H e b r. 13. 16. ^
testificari : R o m . 3 . 21 (testificata = μα ρ τ υ ρ ο υ με ν η ).
(h) P assiv e w ith m id d le or re fle x iv e m ean in g 1 *:
confundi = b e ash am ed o f : M k . 8. 38.
glorificari = e x a lt o n e s e lf: E x . 14. 4, 17, 18, E z e k . 28. 22,
I M acc. 3 . 14.
la u d a ri : frequ en t in Pss. in the sense o f 4 b o ast oneself,
g lo r y b see Pss. 10. 3 (9. 25), 34. 2 (33. 3), 44 (43). 9, 63
( 62). 12, 64. 10 ( 63. 11), 105 ( 104). 3, 106 ( 105). 5.
magnificari = e x a lt o n e s e lf: Ps. 20. 5 ( 19. 6), E z e k . 38. 23,
D a n . 11. 36.
sa lu a ri : A c t . 2. 40.
§ 87. Adverbs:
adhuc = yet, still : a d h u c e x utero (w h ile still in) L k . 1. 15 ;
so in com p ariso n , ad h u c e x ce lle n tio re m uiam (still m ore
e x ce lle n t) I C o r. 12. 31, cf. P s. 92. 13 (91. 15), H e b r.
7. 15 ; see also M t. 26. 65, M k . 14. 63, A p o c . 22. 11 ;
w ith n e gativ e = not y e t : I I C h r. 20. 33, P ro v . 8. 26,
M k. 11. 2, H e b r. 11. 7 ; = no lo n g e r : I T im . 5. 23.
1 T h i s u s e i s q u it e n a t u r a l, a s t h e p a s s i v e w a s o r i g i n a lly a r e f le x iv e . I t is
fo u n d in V e r g i l : ‘ L i b y a e u e r t u n t u r a d o r a s Aen. i. 1 5 8 , ‘ im p le n t u r u c t e r is
B acch i ib. 2 1 5 , * i n u t ile fe r r u m c in g it u r ii. 5 1 1 . S o o b li u i s c o r , r e m in is c o r ,
e t c ., an d t h e ‘ s e m i - d e p o n e n t s ’ ; c o m p a r e t h e I t a lia nnon m i recordo, th e
F ren chje m en souviens, o r th e E n g l is h boast themselves { P s . 49. 6 ) , remember
themselves ( P s . 22. 27 P . B .) .
Lexical Peculiarities 6!
alioquin = oth erw ise : M t. 6. 1, 1 C o r. 5. 10, 7. 14, H e b r .
9. 17.
aliquando — πό τ ε : ‘ tan dem aliq u a n d o ’ R o m . 1. 10, P h il.
4 . 10 ; w ith n e ga tiv e : I I Pet. 1. 21.
amplitLs — further, b e s id e s : E c c l. 3. 9, J o el 2 . 27.
ante : ‘ p au lo ante * W isd . (S ap .) 15. 8, I I M ac. 3. 30, 6. 29,
9. 10 ; ‘ ante et retro ‫ ג‬A p o c . 4 . 6.
deinde \ o f su ccession in ord er ( = ε πε ι τ α ) : I C or. 15. 46,
I T h ess. 4. 17.
forsitan, forte — α ν : Ps. 81 (80). 15, 119 ( 118). 92, M t.
hie — herein : A p o c . 13. 10.

iam nunc (w ith futuri s u n t ) : G en. 41. 35 an d freq u en tly.
ibi for eo, and ubi for quo, after verbs o f m otion ; ueniens ibi :
I I M acc. 2 . 5, cf. N eh. ( I I E sd r.) 13. 9 ; ubi for qito is
not found in the V u lg . but often in the O ld L a t. M S . d.
igitur = in qu estion s ; quid ig itu r le x ? G al. 3. 19.
illic = i b i ; hic aut illic : M t. 24. 23.
ita — yes, v e rily : L k . 11. 5 1 , 12.5 , P h ilem . 20 ; non ita = no :
A c t . 16. 37 (ο υ γ α ρ , no in deed).
itaque : M t. 12. 1 2 ; id circo is a lso v e r y com m on .
mane — to -m o r r o w : I S am . (I R e g .) 9 .1 9 ; th en ce pop. L a t .
demane, Ital. dimani, domani, F r . domain,
necnon = a ls o : I C h r. 1. 22, I I C h r. 35. 9.
ne omnino = not at a l l : A c t . 4 . 18, cf. ne ultra, 17.
nimis tialde = v e ry , e x c e e d in g ly (so in e a rly L a t in ) : E z e k .
9. 9, 37. 10.
non . . . neque = not e v e n ; ita ut non cap eret neque ad ia n u a m :
M k. 2. 2, cf. 3 . 20, I C o r. 5. 11 ; n equ e ad h o r a m : G a l.
2* 5: . . .
paulominus = alm o st (m inim um abfu it q u in ): Pss. 94 (93).
17 , 119 ( 118). 87 . ^ ‫־‬
prout = a cc o rd in g a s : T o b . 1. 19, M k. 4 . 33, A c t . 2. 45.
quemadmodum : in O .T ., ch iefly in P ss. an d W i s d .; in N .T .
it som etim es = h o w : so L k . 8. 47, 21 . 14, 22. 4, 23. 55,
A c t . 15. 14.
quomodo = even a s : I I Pet. 1. 3.
sic . . . sic = one w a y . . . another w a y : I C or. 7. 7.
sicut . . . e/ = as . . . s o : M t. 6. 10, A c t . 7. 51.
sim ul = a lto g e t h e r: G en . 46. 7, E x . 36. 30.
tunc: ‘ ille tunc m u n d u s ’ = ό τ ό τ ε κ ό σ μο ς : I I P et. 3. 6.
iisque — even, w ith w ords d en o tin g tim e, p la ce , and rep eti
t io n :
(a) t im e : u squ e nunc, a d h u c ( = h ith erto), m o d o , in
h o d iern u m d ie m ; usque dum : L k . 12. 50.
{b) p la c e : u squ e hue, in a tr iu m : M k . 14. 5 4 ; foras
ciu itatem : A c t . 21. 5.
(e) rep etitio n : usqu e septies : M t. 18. 21. Q u o u sq u e ?
and u sq u e q u o ? a re fre q u e n t; u sq u eq u a q u e ( =
u t t e r ly ) : four tim es in Ps. 119 ( 118).
§ 88. C o n ju n c tio n s an d a d d it io n a l p a r t ic le s .
dummodo = p ro vid ed t h a t : o n ly tw ice in th e V u lg a te , G en.
19. 8 (d. uiris istis n ih il m ali faciatis), and A c t . 20. 24 (d.
con sum m em cu rsu m m eum = ω ς τ ε λ ε ι ω σ α ι ), see R .V .
m g.'
enim : resu m p tive ; p la cu it e. e i s : R o m . 15. 27 ; q u id enim ?
( = τ ι γ <χ ρ } : P h il. 1. 18, .
ergo : w ith oth er p a rticle s (quia, qu o n iam , s i) : H e b r . 2. 14,
4 . 6, 12. 8, I Joh. 4. 19 ; in questions : M t. 13. 27, 26. 54,
Joh. 18. 37, G a l. 3 . 21.
et = also ; p ro p terea e t : L k . 11. 49, cf. 12. 41 ; et quidem =
yes, in d e e d : R o m . 10. 1 8 ; e x c la m a t o r y = w h y ! A c t .
8. 3 ί (πω ς γ ά ρ ).
etenim — for, y e a : frequen t in Pss., e. g. 37 ( 36). 25, 84. 3
( 834 ‫)״‬, Joh. 13. 13. 1
etiam — yea, even so : M t. 13. 51, L k . 10. 21, A c t . 5. 8 , A p o c .
22 . 20.
non - n a y : Joh . 1. 21, I I C o r. 1. 18, 19, J ac. 5. 12.
numquid = num in qu estion s : M t. 12. 23, R o m . 9 . 20 , 1 C o r.
11. 22.
nusquam — in no w a y , not indeed ; I I M a cc. 11. 4, n. re co g i
tans dei p otestatem ; H e b r. 2.1 6 , n. en im a n g e lo s ad p re-
hendit.
p u t a : ut puta (ε ι τ υ χ ο ι ) : I C o r. 14. ί ο , 15. 37.
putas, piUasne : in tro d u cin g questions ; p u tasn e uiuent ossa
. ista? E z e k . 37. 3 ; qu is putas {α ρ α ) m aio r e s t? M t. 18. 1
and frequ en tly.
quidem . . . mitem {με ν . . . δ ε ) : I I T im . 4 . 4.
quidnam = w h a t e v e r : A c t . 5. 24 etc.
quippini = y e a ra th e r: L k . 11. 28 (see the note on this
p assage in the E d itio maior o f the O x fo rd V u lg a te ).
quod w ith other p articles :
eo quod {on ) : G en. 3. 10, Isa. 53. 11, 12 an d frequ en tly.
iu x ta quod {κ α θ ό τ ι ) : A c t . 2. 24.
propter qu o d {δ ι ό τ ι , 03 eVe/<ε ν ) : L k . 4 . 18, A c t . 8. 11,
18. 10.
quoniam quidem = sin ce : L k . 1.1 , R o m . 3 . 30, I I C o r. 5.1 9 .
saltern w ith n egativ e = ne . . . q u id em : Jos. 10. 28, I I S a m .
( I I R e g .) 13. 30.
sed = y e a : I I C o r. 7. 11 ; sed et = y e a , a n d : Joel 1. 20,
D an . 6. 22, L k . 24. 22 ; et si . . . sed ( a κ α ι . . . ά λ λ α ) =
even th ou gh . . . y e t : I I C o r. 5. 16 ; sed n eque = y e a
. . . n o t: D a n . 2. 10 ; so often in o ld L a t in .1
siquidem = sin ce : L k . 6. 33 ; s. sunt dii m ulti {ω σ πε ρ ):
I C o r. 8. 5.
utique = y e a , in d eed : P s. 58. 1 ( 57. 2 ) ; in apodosis, si . . .
d ed issem u . : Ps. 51.1 6 ( 50. 1 8 ); in an sw er to a question
1 S e e L ö is t e d t , p . 179.
— etiam , but stronger, = y e a : M t. 9. 28 ; non u tiq u e =
not in d eed : I C o r. 5. 10.
uero = b u t ; autem . . . uero ( = δ ε . . . δ ε ) : A c t . 3. 15.
uerwntamen = n everth eless : v e r y frequent in O .T . an d in
S . L u k e ; cf. P h il. 3 . 8 ( = α λ λ ά με ν ο υ ν γ ε ).
[ F o r prep osition s and su b o rd in a tin g con ju n ctio n s see
u n d er S y n t a x , §§ 111, 117, 140 ff.]
§ 89 . M ost of th e m ean in gs n oticed a b o v e represen t
a stag e on the w a y to m odern sp eech . S t ill w e m ust
b ew are o f assu m in g th at w ords in this stag e b e ar the sam e
m ean in gs as n o w : su ch w o rd s as gratificare (E p h . 1. 6),
m alitia, p raeo ccu p atu s (G al. 6. 1), p u p illu s, s c a n d a liz a re do
not represen t w h at the a v era g e E n g lish m a n w o u ld e x p e c t ;
and th ere are m an y oth ers. T h is caution e x ten d s even to
cases in w h ich the co rresp o n d in g E n g lis h w ord is found in
our A .V ., su ch as convenient, con versation , honest, in ju riou s,
m ansion, m o rtify, offence, p reven t, virtue. T h e a g e of th e
A .V . and o f S h a k e sp e a re w as, indeed, the classica l a g e o f
E n g li s h ; b u t the E n g lis h lan g u ag e, lik e the L a t in o f the
first C h ristian centuries, could never stand still.
V
IN FLEXIO N AL PECULIARITIES
§ 90 . L itt le need be said w ith resp ect to in flexio n al
p ecu liarities, i. e. irre g u la ritie s ch iefly in d eclen sio n an d
c o n ju g a tio n ; e s p e c ia lly as th ese o ccu r ch ie fly in th e O ld
L a tin versions (above a ll in d) and w ere, as a ru le, sile n tly
co rrected b y J ero m e in his revision o f the N e w T e sta m e n t.
S till, as A u g u stin e ,1 w hen a d d ressin g th e u n learn ed , w as
con ten ted for th e sa k e of clearn ess to u se th e ‘ b arb a rian ’
ossum in p la ce o f os (w h ich th ou gh magis Latim im w as
minus apertum ), w e m ust not b e surprised to find som e
g ra m m a tica l irreg u la ritie s in the V u lg a t e itself.
Nouns*
§ 91. {a) V a ria tio n s in D eclen sio n .
F irst for third : c o lly rid a m I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 6. 1 9 ; cra te
rarum Isa. 22. 2 4 ; h eb d o m ad aru m 2 D an . 10. 2 ; H e lla
d am I M acc. 8. 9 ; lam p a d a ru m E z e k . 1. 13.
S e co n d for third : ossum (O ld Lat.,, as above) ; p au o s I K g s .
( I l l R e g .) 10. 22 ; p raesep io L k . 2. 7, 12, 16, 13, 15.
T h ir d for se co n d : d iaco n ib u s P h il. I . 1, -nes I T im . 3 . 12
(-ni !0 C J.
F ir s t for s e c o n d : tribu las I G ir o n . 20. 3, 21. 23.
S e co n d for first; m a rg a ritu m P ro v . 25. 12.
1 A i!‫ ״‬, de doctr. Christ. I I I . 3 (on P s . 139 [ 138] . 1 5 ).
2 T h e u se of hebdomas fo r a week is d e r iv e d fro m th e H e b r e w t h r o u g h th e
LXX.
2C-J2 K
66 . The Native Element
S e co n d for fourth : tonitruo Isa. 29. 6, ton itruorum A p o c .
19. 6 (D ‫ י ס ג‬C ) .
(b) V a ria tio n in num ber.
S in g , for P lu r. (the classica l fo r m ): altare, scala, sertu m .
P lu r. for S i n g . : see H e b ra ism s an d A b s tr a c t s (§§ 17, 83).
A d je c t iv e s .
§ 92 . (a) Irre g u la r com p ariso n : 1

co m p la citio r P s. 77. 8 .76) ‫ ; ) ף‬n ecessario r I C o r. 12. 22.
(b) N u m e r a ls :
uno as d at. E x . 27. 14.
(e) P o s s e s s iv e :
melts as v o c. D eu s m eus, m eus D e u s frequ en tly.
(d) In d e fin ite :
alterae as dat. gen eratio n i a lte ra e J o el 1. 3.
infidele as abi. cum infidele (so th e best M S S .) I I C o r. 6 .1 5 .
mare as a b l. in m are M k . 5. 13 an d p o ssib ly 1. 16 (see th e
notes to these p a ssa g es in the Editio maior o f the
V u lg .).
§ 93 . V erb s.
odi is c o n ju g a te d th ro u g h o u t as if from o d ire : th us w e

h ave o d ie t, odient, o d ibu n t (P ro v . 1. 22), o d iu i, o d ite,
odiens, etc.
co m p o u n d s o f -eo h ave p erfect in -iui, so e x iu i M t. 12. 44,
M k . 11. 11 etc. ; e x ie s M t. 5. 26, e x ie t M t. 2. 6.
co n ju g atio n s a re confused : e .g . secon d and third, a tto n d en t
an d -en tu r E z e k . 44 . 20, N a h . 1. 12, lam b u eru n t, etc.
Jud. 7. 5, 6, 7 ; th ird and fourth, liniunt E z e k . 13. 11, 15,
liniri L e v . 14. 42, a ccersire A c t . 10. 22.
other ir r e g u la r it ie s : uetati sunt A c t . 16. 6 ; ab sco n su s
1 S e e a ls o b e lo w , § 94.
Inflexional Peculiarities 67
E c c lu s . 1 .3 9 ,4 . 21, 16. 22, 27 . 1 9 ; abscon sus is v e r y
com m on in the O ld L a tin ; orditu s Isa. 25. 7 ; frix u s
I I S a m . (II R e g .) 6. 19, 17. 28, I C h ron . 16. 3 ; prendi-
cierunt, etc. Io h . 21. 3, 1 0 ; m etibo r Ps. 60. 6 ( 59. 8).
H ere for con ven ien ce m a y b e noted other irregu larities,

not in flexio n al, in the use o f A d je c t iv e s , A d v e r b s , an d
Pronouns, w h ich cannot e a s ily be g ro u p ed under a n y other
h ead in g.
§ 94 . A d je c t iv e s .
(a) Irre g u la r C o m p ariso n b y th e use of A d v e r b s , m a g is,

plus, n im is : m agn a erit plus qu am H a g . 2. 10, p lu s
im pia quam E z e k . 5. 6, m agis plu ris estis M t. 6. 26.
(b) D o u b le com parison : beatius est m agis d a re A c t . 20. 35,
m ulto m agis m elius P h il. 1. 23, plu s m agis M k . 6. 51,
utilius est illi si . . . q u am ut L k . 17. 2 ; quam = rath er
than, ita gau d iu m erit . . . qu am L k . 15. 7.
(e) T h e C o m p a rativ e is used to im p ly som e e x ce ss o f the
positive q u a lity (this is q u ite classical) : fac citiu s
Joh. 13. 27, qu asi su p erstitiosiores A c t . 17. 22, sicu t tu
m elius nosti A c t . 25. 10 ; m inus sap ien s ( = πα ρ α φ ρ ο ν ώ )
I I C or. 11. 23 ; firm iores (δ υ ν α τ ο ί ) R o m . 15. I.
(d) S u p e rla tiv e e x p re sse d b y m ultum , or nim is, w ith p o si
tive : in clitu s m ultum I I C hron. 18. 1, m u ltu m m iseri
cors Ps. 103 ( 102). 8, iustus m ultum E c c l. 7. 17, p u lc h ra
nim is G en. 12. 14.
(e) In te rch a n ge o f d egrees. P o s itiv e for s u p e r la tiv e : m an
datum m agn u m M t. 22. 36, qu am celeriter ( = ω ς τ α χ ι -
. σ τ α ) A c t . 17. 15. C o m p a rativ e for su p erlative : m aio r
his I C o r. 13. 13, m inor est in regn o caelo ru m M t. 11.
i i . S u p e rla tiv e for p o s itiv e : v e r y frequent, e sp e c ia lly
with optim us, pessim us, m a x im u s, m inim us ; so caris-
K 2
sim us ( = α γ α πη τ ό ς ) M k. 9 . 7 an d co n stan tly, d ilectissi
m us R o m . 16. 8, H e b . 6. 9, J ac. 1. 16, 2 . 5, n equ issim u s
( = πο ν η ρ ό ς ) W is d . (S ap .) 3 .1 2 , E p h . 6. 16, p acatissim u m
( = ε ι ρ η ν ι κ ό ^ H e b r . 12. 11 ; an d, fo llo w in g th e G re e k ,
optim us ( = κ ρ α τ ι σ τ ο ς ) L k . 1. 3, A c t . 23. 26, 24. 3, 26 .
25· S u p e rla tiv e for c o m p a r a t iv e : m inim um est o m n i
bus sem in ibu s M t. 13. 32, p lu rim am ( πλ ε ί ο υ α ) h o stiam
qu am C a in H e b r. 11. 4. P rim u s is used n a tu ra lly for
the first o f tw o Joh. 19. 32, H e b r. 10. 9.
( / ) C o rre la tiv e s : unus . . . et unus M t. 24 . 4 0 ,2 7 . 38 ; but
also unus . . . et aliu s and unus . . . et a l t e r ; in altero
qu id em . . . in altero au tem H e b r. 10. 33 ; qu is . . . aliu s
I C o r. 3 . 4.
( ‫ )־ ״‬N u m e r a ls : trnus for quidam (see § 107) ; unus . . . non
( = not one), unus = prim us, etc. (see P lebraism s, § 23) ;
o ctau u s N o e ( = N o a h and seven others) I I P et. 2. 5.
§ 95. A d verbs. U n u su al co n n ex io n .
(a) W ith n o u n s: d e terra p rocu l, Is a . 13. 5, in tem p o re

uespere Is a . 17. 14 ; d ilu cu lo u ald e su rgen s M k . 1. 35.
(b) W ith verbs : d eteriu s h ab eb at M k . 5 . 26, m eliu s h ab u e rit
( = κ ο μφ τ ό τ ε ρ ο ν έ 'σ χ β ) Joh. 4 . 52. S u c h a d v erb s as bene,
iu x ta , lo n g e are often used p re d ic a tiv e ly w ith th e c o p u
lative verb ‘ to b e ’ e .g . ut ben e sit tibi E p h . 6. 3 ; or
w ith factum est, as factum est u espere G en . 1. 8, f. e.
sero M t. 20 . 8.
(e) W ith p repositions : A d v e r b ia l or p rep ositio n al p h rases
are a sp ecial feature o f the p o p u la r L a t in ; such p hrases
are :—■
a lo n ge T o b . 11. 6, a m odo, ab ante, ab intus P s. 45.
13 (44. 14) M k. 7 . 23 ; a deorsu m usqu e sursum E x . 26.
2 4 ; de deorsu m Joh. 8. 23 ; a sum m o u squ e d eorsu m
M t. 27. 51. ;
1 de foris, de intus, de retro, de su p er, de sursum , e t c . ;
de m ane R u th 2 . 7, e contra, in p a lam , in sem el (H e b r.
10. 10), in su p er, etc. ; uisa . . . tu rb a d e retro et a b an te
B a r. 6. 5.
(d) A d v e r b s used as prepositions.
foras\ f. castra L e v . 16. 27, f. H ie ru salem I I K g s . ( I V R e g .)
23. 6, f. p o rtam E zele. 4-7. 2, A c t . 16. 13, f. ciu itatem
A c t . 21. 5.
f o r is : f. H ie ru sa le m I I K g s .( I V R e g .) 23. 4, N eh . ( I I E s d r .)
13. 20 and often, f. tem p lu m A p o c . 11. 2. T h e d istin ction
betw een foras and foris is not a lw a y s observed.
intus\ quod intus est calicis M t. 23. 26.
retro', r. m e M k . 8. 33, r. S atan an I T im . 5 . 15.
2secus ( = iuxtci) : s. m are, s. uiam , etc., M k . 1. 16, L k . 8. 5
and often.
subtus', s. m e I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 22. 37, su b tu s altare, etc.
A p o c . 6. 9 and often.
Pronouns—including Adjectival Forms. .

§ 96 . (a) P e r s o n a l. The R e fle x iv e Pronoun and
A d je c t iv e (se and mud).
T h e G en. is som etim es used in stead of a Possessive, as,
de m edio tui, E x . 23. 25 ; in p raesen tia m ei, P h il. 2 . 12 ;
but, in absen tia m ea (G k . in both = μο υ ).
T h e R e fle x iv e se m a y refer to th e S u b je c t o f the m ain
verb : respondit autem P au lu s, annuente sibi p raesid e dicere,
1 In th is p o p u la r u s e w e s e e th e o r ig in o f t h e F ren ch dedans , dehors,
dessous, dcssus, dcnicrc, etc.
2 S e e th e n o te o n scats a s a p r e p o s it io n b y P r o f e s s o r F . C . B u r k it t in t h e
Journal o/Theol. Studies fo r J a n . 1908 (v o l. ix , p . 2 9 7 ).
‫סך‬ The N ative E lem en t
w hen the g o v ern o r h ad b e ck o n e d to him to sp e a k [α υ τ ω ).
A c t . 24. io .
O c ca sio n a lly th e o rd in ary 3rd P e rs. P ro n o u n o ccu rs
w h ere w e sh ou ld e x p e c t the R e fle x iv e :
co e p it illis d ice re q u a e essent ei euen tura (α υ τ φ ), M k . 10.
3 2 ; this is so w ith som e Im person al V e rb s ; as in M t. 16.
21, op orteret eum .
In p la ce o f se, e s p e c ia lly inter se, the p o p u la r L a t . uses
inuicem, even with a P r e p o s it io n :
ut possent in uic. co p u lari, b e co u p led to geth er, E x . 26. 4 ;
d ixeru n t . . . ad in u ic., Joh. 16. 17 (but inter uos, 1 9 );
idipsum inuic. sen tien tes, R o m . 12. 16. C f. 16. 16 ; Joh.
15. 17.
W ith P rep o sitio n , ab, ad , in, p r o ; lo cu ti sunt ad inuic.,
G en . 42. 21 ; m u rm u rare in in uic., Joh. 6. 43 ; o rate pro
inuic., Jac. 5. 16.
Inter se, h o w e v e r, is som etim es fo u n d ; q u an d o inter se

dicuntur, P ro lo g u e E c c lu s . ; d iu ersae inter se, D an . 7. 3 ;
cf. M k . 1. 27 ; 9 . 3 4 ; L k . 22. 23 ; so, r ix a ti sunt ad u ersu m
se, I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 14. 6.
T h e tw o form s a re som etim es found to geth er, inuicem

b ein g a d d ed to co m p lete th e s e n s e ; ita ut a d se inuic. . . .
acce d e re non ualeren t, E x . 14. 2 0 ; so a, co n tra se, sibi,
inuic.
O th er su bstitutes, e x p re ssin g re cip ro ca l relation sh ip, are

altem itnm (ch iefly in N .T .), mutuo, pariter :
ut quid nocetis a lte ru tru m ? A c t . 7 . 26 ; d ice b a n t ad alt.,
M k. 4 . 4 0 ; sa p ere in alt. R o m . 15. 5 ; m utuo lo qu eb an tu r,
G en . 37. 19 ; caesi sun t m utuo, I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 3 . 23 ;
secum p ariter d o rm ien tes, T o b . 8. 15.
Inflexional Peculiarities 7r
T h e D em o n strative A d j. alius, and the N u m e r a l A d j.
alter, are used in the sam e se n se :
alius alium per in u id iam occid it, W isd . (S ap .) 14. 24 ; p er
cussit a lte r alteru m (of tw o broth ers), I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 14.6
(see a b o v e ); alter ad a lte ru m , d ixerun t, N u m . 14.4 ; d icebant,
J u d ith 11. 18 ; clam ab a n t, Isa. 6. 3 ; d ix it, D a n . 13. 12.
§ 97. Su u s. Suns is used for the G en . eizcs, comm, and
v ic e v e rsa :
ne reu erearis p ro x im u m tuum in casu suo, E c c lu s . 4 . 27 ;
disp ersit su p erbo s m en te cordis sui, in the im agin atio n o f
th eir h eart ( α υ τ ω ν ), L k . 1. 51. C o n v e rse ly , eius for su am 1 ;
o rab at D o m in u m . . . ut d irigeret uiam eius . . . Judith
12 . 8 .
U s e d o b je c t iv e ly ; p er hostiam suam , b y th e sacrifice o f
h im self, H e b . 9 . 26.
Su u s, of cou rse, in clu d es £ their ; = f th eir ow n ; :
leuauerun t u o cem suam I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 13. 36, A c t . 14.
i i , 22. 2 2 ; quaestion es q u a sd a m de sua superstitione A c t .
25. 19.
i s : is qui foris est n oster h o m o = our o u tw ard m an,
I I C o r. 4 . 1 6 ; in eo . . . in qu o (ε ν ω ) — in th at, H e b r. 2. 18.
§ 98 . (b) P o s s e s s iv e . T h e possessive a d je c tiv e (as sims

above) is used instead o f the o b je ctiv e G en itiv e, w h ich
is th e classical form (as 1 quon am nostri tibi cu ra recessit ? ’
V e r g . A e n . I I . 595 = ‘ w h ith er has th y regard for m e
1 T h e w e l l- k n o w n p a s s a g e in H e b r . 11. 21 is a c a s e in p o i n t ; it is s a id
t h e r e th a t J a c o b , w h e n d y in g , b le s s e d J o s e p h , 1et a d o r a u it fa s tig iu m u i r g a c
e in s ’ (/rat 7τ ρ ο σ α ί ύ ν η σ ο ' ς πι to a/cpov 7‫־‬
‫־‬7}? ρ ά β δ ο υ α ύ τ ο υ ). In s t r ic t g r a m m a r t h is
s h o u ld m e a n Joseph's sta ff, a n d m a n y p a t r is t ic c o m m e n ta t o r s , b o th G r e e k
an d L a t in , so u n d e r s ta n d i t ; b u t t h e r e is lit t le d o u b t t h a t th e re fe ren ce
r e a l l y is to J a c o b ’ s o w n sta ff, on w h i c h h e le a n t , a n d t h a t ‘ u ir g a e e iu s 7
is fo r ‘ u ir g n e su ae’ ; B eza w as co rrect in re n d e rin g ‘ a d o r a u it su p er
e x t r e m o b a c u lo su o 5 ; s e e a ls o p . 12, n. 1.
A d v e r b ia lly : in h oc (acc.) = for this p u rpo se I Joh. 3. 8,

in hoc (abl.) = h e re b y I Joh. 2. 3, 3. 16.
Ihdusm odi : in N e w T e s t, w ith a noun u n d ersto o d ; to lle
de terra h u iu sm od i A c t . 22. 22.
in O ld T e s t , lmiuscemodi, w ith noun e x
pressed.
A lius an d alter. T h e o rd in ary classica l use is varied in
seve ral w a y s ; thus w e h a v e turns and unus, M t. 24. 40, 27.
38 ; unus and alius I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 22. 20 ; ttmts and alter
I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 12. 1, L k . 18. 10 e t c . ; in I I Chron. 18. 19
w e h ave cu m q u e d iceret unus h oc m od o et a lte r alio , alter
b ein g used lo o se ly ; alms and alius E c c lu s . 14. 19, a liis
atqu e aliis uasis = in vario u s k in d s o f vessels E s t h . 1. 7 ;
see a b o ve § 94 . .
§ 100. (d) R e la t iv e . F o r use of q 7d see S y n t a x §§ 105, 138 ;
for R e la tiv e w ith redu n d an t D em o n strative fo llo w in g, see
§§ 23 and 99 ; qui as a b l. A c t . 6 .1 0 , spiritui q u i lo q u e b a tu r.
§ 101. (e) In t e r r o g a t iv e . Quid and ut qtiid — w h y ?
(as the G k . τ ί \ ivarii), frequent in Pss., from the L X X ;
but also in the N e w T e st., e. g. q u id statis . . . otiosi ? M t.
20. 6, cf. 26 . 10, ut qu id p erd itio h aec (ε ι ς τ ι ;) M t. 26. 8,
cf. 27. 46, M k. 15. 34, I C o r. 10. 29, 15. 29, 30. T h e s e are
used a d v e rb ia lly .
§ 102. ( / ) In d efin ite . Aliqtds for qtds (after si, ne e t c .) :
ne a licu i diceren t L k . 8. 56, cf. A m o s 3. 4, A p o c . 21. %‫; ך‬
co n v e rse ly infirm atur quis in u obis ? Jac. 5. 14, cf. A c t . 26. 31.
1 Nullus, nidlum for nemo, n ih il : nullus te p ro h ib e re
poterit G en . 23. 6, cf. N u m . 24. 9, Jud. 3. 2 5 ; h o c gen u s in
nullo p otest e x ire M k. 9. 29.
1 J e r o m e h im s e lf w a s fo n d o f nullus, w h e n q u o t i n g ; c . g . in I C o r . 2. 8
t h e V u lg . h a s quam nemo , quam nullus ( v . 32 8 , 6 9 9 , 9 9 3 ,
bu t J e r o m e q u o t e s
v ii. 262 in V a l l a r s i ’s e e l.), a n d v . 15 a nemine V u lg . b u t a nullo J e r o m e
( v ii. 4 6 2 ).
2C •12 L
Quis, quid, for uter, utrum ( = w h eth er o f tw o) : q u is e x
duobus M t. 21. 31, q u id est facilius, d icere . . . aut d icere
M t. 9 . 5 ; cf. A c t . 1. 24.
U ir for each , e v e ry m an (a H e b ra ism , see § 14) ; but
unusquisque is also used.
Uterque (in plur.) for ambo) d o n au it u trisq u e L k . 7. 42,
su p er utrosque E c c lu s . 40. 23. B u t this is also found in
C icero , etc.
VI
SYN T A C T ICA L PECULIARITIES

S Y N T A X OF T H E S I M P L E S E N T E N C E
§ 103. S en ten ces are o f th ree k in d s : (1) Simple, (2) Double

or Multiple, (3) Complex. O f the tw o latter H e b re w p refers
th e D o u b le sen ten ce, w ith its clau ses co m b in ed c o -o r d i
n ately ; G reek and L a t in prefer the C o m p le x sentence,
w ith a d epen den t clau se in trod u ced su b o rd in a tely b y one o f
the con ju n ctio n s in w h ich both th ese la n g u a g e s a b o u n d .
T H E S I M P L E S E N T E N C E
§ 104. W e d e a l first w ith the S im p le sentence, in w h ich

th e tw o ch ief relations betw een w ords are those o f A g 7*ee-
ment and Gove7mment.
AGREEM ENT.
§ 105. P assin g over th e th ree C o n co rd s, w e need c o n

sider o n ly A g r e e m e n t a cc o rd in g to S E N S E — ration al or
lo g ica l agre e m e n t— a form found e s p e c ia lly w ith co lle ctiv e
nouns, such as 17iultitudo, populus, turba, natio, etc. H e re
the verb is found in th e p lu r., the a cco m p a n y in g a d je ctiv e
o r pronoun in th e m a s c .; th us : '
‘ p lu rim a . . . tu rb a strauerunt ’ M t. 21 . 8 (so also the G k . ) ;
c m isereo r tu rb ae q u ia . . . p erseu eran t . . . et d im ittere eos
ieiunos nolo ’ M t. 15. 32 ; * m u ltitu d o m ilitiae caelestis,
lau d an tiu m D e u m 5 L k . 2 . 1 3 ; c con cu rrit om nis pop u lu s . . .
stu p e n te s’ A c t . 3 . 1 1 ; c inuenit T o b ia m . . . et exsilien s
L 2
76 Syntactical Peculiarities
o scu lati sunt se in u icem ’ T o b . 9 . 8 ; ' tu rb a h aec . . . m a le
d icti s u n t 5 Joh. 7. 49.
S im ila r variatio n s a r e :
(i) T h e A ttra c tio n o f the R e la tiv e ; found in th e O ld
L a tin , a s 1 'd e o m n ib u s m alis q u ib u s (q u ae V u lg .) fecit
H ero d es ’ L k . 3 . 19 d f .
(ii) In verse attractio n , w h ere the A n te c e d e n t is d raw n
into the case of the R e la tiv e (cf. ‘ urbem qu am statu o uestra
e s t ’ V e r g . Aen. i. 5 7 3 ); ' qu em ego d e co lla u i lo h a n n en h ic
a m ortuis r e s u r r e x it ’ M k. 6. 16, cf. J o h . 14. 24, I C o r. 10.
16 (calicem cod d . p lu r.), I Joh. 2. 17 ; ' om ni . . . cui m u l
tum datum est ’ L k . 12. 48 ; lap id e m quem rep ro b au eru n t
a ed ifica n te s’ Ps. 118 ( 117). 2 2 ; so quoted in M t. 21. 42,
M k. 12. 10 (but lapis in I P e t. 2. 7).
(iii) A ttra c tio n of the R e la tiv e to the P re d ica te in its
ow n c la u s e : 's e m in i tuo qu i est C h r is t u s ’ G a l. 3 . 16, cf.
E p h . 6. 1 7 ; this, h o w ever, is q u ite norm al. In 'e iu s qui
in m e lo qu itu r C h ristu s ’ I I C o r. 13. 3 Christus is a p p a re n tly
attracted into the case o f the relativ e qui . .
(iv) A t tra c tio n o f the C o p u la to the P re d ica te : ' b yssin u m
enim iu stification es sunt s a n c to r u m ’ A p o c . 19. 8 (G r. ε σ τ ι
with neutr.) ; 2 ' m em b ra u estra tem p lu m est S p iritu s san cti ’
I C o r. 6. 19.
T H E A R T I C L E .
§ 106. L a tin , as is w ell k n o w n , has no A r t ic le , D efin ite

or In d e fin ite ; lux m a y = light, the light, or a light, a c c o r d
ing to the co n te x t. T h e w an t is e s p e c ia lly felt in a tra n s
lation from , or into, la n g u a g e s w h ich possess one or bo th ,
1 T h e s e a r e r e a lly c o m p le x s e n t e n c e s ; b u t it is m o r e c o n v e n ie n t to g r o u p
t o g e t h e r a ll d e v ia t io n s fro m t h e ‘ T h r e e C o n c o r d s ’ . .
2 So in A . V . ‘ t h e w a g e s o f sin is d e a th ’ , R om . 6 . 13 ( G r . a n d L at.
la c h t h e v e r b ) .
The Simple Sentence 77
an d it is the cau se of m a n y defects and a m b ig u ities in ou r

ow n A .V ., the E n g lis h o f w h ich, as w e h ave often poin ted
out, is g re a t ly affected b y the V u lg a te . S t r a n g e ly en ough ,
th e D o u a y V e rsio n , th o u g h m ad e d ire c tly from the V u lg a t e ,
often rep ro d u ces the a rt ic le m ore fu lly and faith fu lly.
A m o n g p assages in th e o rigin al h a v in g the a rticle w e
find : G en. 19. 1 4the tw o a n g els ’ R .V . and D o u a y , follow -‫־‬
in g the H e b r .; but A . V . ‘ t wo a n g e ls ', an d V u lg . ‘ duo
a n g e l i ; 5 G en. 35. 8 ‘ the o a k 5 R .V . fo llo w in g th e H e b r.,
b u t A .V . and D o u a y 4 an o a k ’ , and V u lg . ‘ q u ercu m 5;
I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 18. i o c an o a k 5 A .V ., R .V ., and D o u a y ,
V u lg . ‘ qu ercu 5.
In the N .T . M t. 1. 23 η 7τ α ρ θ ε ν ο ς , Joh. 13. 5 Tov ν ι πτ η ρ α ;
16. 13 πά σ α ν rijv α λ ή θ ε ι α = ‘ all the truth 5 R .V ., but 4 a ll
truth 5 A .V . and D o u a y ; A c t . 2. 42 τ η κ λ α σ ε ι τ ο υ ά ρ τ ο υ Kal
τ α ι ς πρ ο ε υ χ α ι ς = ‘ in b re a k in g o f b read and in p ra y e rs 5
A .V ., ‘ in . . . the b re a k in g o f b read , and in p ra y e rs 5 D o u a y ,
‘ in the b re a k in g o f b read and the p r a y e r s 5 R .V . ; 1 10. 47,
τ ο ύ δ ω ρ = ‘ w ater ‫ י‬A . V . and D o u a y , ‘ the w a t e r 5 R . V . ; 28.
4, η δ ί κ η = 4v e n g e a n c e 5 A .V . and D o u a y an d V u lg . ‘ ultio 5;
R .V . co rre ctly has 4J u s t ic e 5 (p e rso n ifie d ); I C o r. 10. 13,
T t j v €/c/3acnr4 = ‫ ׳‬a w a y to escap e 5 A .V ., 4 issue 5 D o u a y ,
4 the w a y o f escap e 5 R . V . ; A p o c . 7. 14, τ η ς θ λ ι φ /ε ω ς τ η ς

με γ ά λ η ς = 4great trib u latio n 5 A .V . an d D o u a y , 4 the g rea t
tribu latio n 5 R .V .
T h e sam e con fusion arises betw een th e G r e e k πα ς , πο λ ύ ς .
Χ ρ ι σ τ ό ς , Π ν ε υ μα , used w ith or w ithout th e A r t ic le .
πα ς w ith a r t .: Lie. 2. 10, πα ν τ ί 7ω λ α ω = ‘ to a ll p e o p le 5
A .V ., p o ssib ly from V u lg . ‘ om ni p o p u lo ’, b u t 4to a ll the
p eo p le ’ R .V . and D o u a y ; πα ς w ithout art. = 4 e v e ry ’ : so
1 T h e V u lg . ‘ in c o m m u n ic a t io n e fr a c tio n is p a n is 7, a n d th e D o u a y 1in th e
c o m m u n ic a t io n o f th e b r e a k i n g 7, e tc . b o th d e v ia t e fro m t h e G r e e k .
L k . 4. 13 πά ν τ α πε ι ρ α σ μό ν = 4 e v e ry te m p ta tio n ’ R .V ., but
A .V . and D o u a y 4 a ll th e te m p ta tio n ’ ; E p h . 3. 15 πα σ ά
πά τ ρ ι α = 4e v e ry fa m ily ’ R .V ., 4a ll p a t e r n it y ’ D o u a y an d
4 om nis p a te rn ita s’ V u lg ., 4the w h o le fa m ily ’ A .V .
πο λ υ ς , p lur. ο ι πο λ λ ο ί = 4th e m a n y ’ : so M t. 24. 12 R .V .,
but ‘ m a n y ’ A . V . and D o u a y ; R o m . 5. 15, 19, 4 the m a n y '
R .V ., 4m a n y ’ A . V . and D o u a y , 4 m u lti ’ V u l g . ; I I C o r. 2.
17, 4the m a n y ’ R .V ., 4m a n y ’ A . V . and D o u a y , 4p lu r im i’
V u lg . e
ο Χ ρ ι σ τ ό ς , th e title, o ccu rs freq u en tly in the A c t s ,1 as in
the G o sp e ls ; in the P au lin e E p is tle s th e a rticle , as a rule,
is d ropped, and the title b eco m es a n am e ; b u t this distine-
tion can n ot be p reserved in the L a t in .
N o r can that b etw een t o IZ V eijta, th e (personal) S p irit,
and πν ε υ μα , th e spirit as an influence.
N o r can a title, such as 4the M a g d a le n e ’, 4o f K e rio th ’,
4the b r o t h e r ’ (I C o r. 1. 1) b e fu lly e x p ressed in th e
L a tin . .
N o r can th e G r e e k 4 p raep o sitive a r t i c le ’, w h ich d istin ‫־‬
gu ish es th e su b je ct from the p r e d ic a t e ; thus 4sem p itern u m
habet sacerd o tiu m ’ in H e b r. 7 . 24 does not fu lly represen t
the 4h ath h is priesth ood u n c h a n g e a b le ’ , α πα ρ ά β α τ ο υ ε χ ε ι
T7]v ι ε ρ ω σ ύ ν η ν , o f the G reek . In Joh. 1. 1 Θ ε ό ς η ν 6 λ ό γ ο ς
is u n am b igu o u s, but 4D eu s erat uerbu m ’ co u ld m ean 4G o d
w as th e w ord
§ 107. H e n c e in p o p u lar L a tin an attem pt w as m ad e to
su p p ly this d e ficie n cy b y the use o f hic, ille, or ipse , to
exp ress th e definite A r tic le , and also, p a rtly , th e p ron ou n
o f the 3rd Person . W e have, in fact, the begin n in g o f the
process b y w h ich ille w as split up so as to form , in Italia n
and F re n ch , both the definite art. and the 3rd P e rso n al
1 H arn ack fin d s in th is fa c t a s ig n o f e a r ly d a te fo r th e book ; see
Die Apostelgeschichte , p . 2 2 0 ( L e i p z i g , 1 9 0 8 ).
p ro n o u n . Ille e sp e c ia lly rep ro d u ces the o rig in a l D e m o n
strativ e sense o f th e G re e k A r t ic le .
D efin ite A r t ic le rep ro d u ced b y ille\ Joh. 14. 22, ο ύ χ 6
Ί σ κ α ρ ι ω τ η ς = non ille S c a r io t h ; 20. 3, 4, o α λ λ ο ς μα θ η τ η ς
= ille a liu s d is c ip u lu s ; G a l. 2. 13, τ η υ πο κ ρ ι σ ε ι = illa
sim u latio n e ; H e b r. 3 . 15, ε ν τ ω πα ρ α πι κ ρ α σ μφ = in illa
e x a c e r b a t io n e ; I I P e t. 2. 22, τ ο τ η ς α λ η θ ο υ ς πα ρ ο ι μί α ς =
illud ueri prouerbii.
R e p ro d u c e d b y hie : In th e O ld T e sta m e n t in the p h rase
' e x hoc n u n c ’ = α πο τ ο υ ν υ ν , see Pss. 115 ( 113) 18, 121
( 120.) 8, 131. 4, ( 130. 3). In the N ew T e sta m e n t ο κ ό σ μο ς
is freq u en tly rendered ' hic m u n d u s 5, cf. Joh. 9 . 39 etc. ; it
is v e r y frequent in the O ld L a tin .
R e p ro d u c e d b y ipse : G en . 24. 24, τ ω Ν α γ ω ρ (H e b r.
2 — ^ ‫ נ ח ו ר‬psi N a c h o r ; in the titles to th e P sa lm s τ ω Δα υ ε ι δ
is often rendered ' ipsi D a v id 5! see also a b o v e § 99.
In d efin ite A r t ic le : trntis is e m p lo y e d = τ ι ς ; ‘ a ’ ‘ an 5,
th us le a d in g up to the m o d ern Ita lia n and F r e n c h ; see
ab o v e, § 94.
S o L k . 9. 19, ‘ p ro p h eta unus J = πρ ο φ ή τ η ς τ ι ς ; 1 D a n . 6.
17, ‘ allatu sq u e est lap is u n u s 5 = l a stone w as b r o u g h t 5;
I I C h ro n . 18. 33, r unus e p o p u lo 5 = c a certain m a n 5;
I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 20. 28, ‘ unus uir D e i 5 = c a m an o f G o d 5;
39 'u i r u n u s 5 = c a m a n 5; I S a m . (I R e g .) 17. 49 'u n u m
la p id e m 5 = ' a stone \
F re q u e n tly in the N e w T e sta m e n t th e L a tin n u m eral is
a lite ra l tran slation o f th e G re e k , th ou gh th ere also it o n ly
h as th e force o f an indefinite a r t ic le ; so M t. 8. 19 'u n u s
7 B u t I S a m . ( I R e g ;.) 1. 1 ‘ u ir u n u s 1 is d e c e p t iv e ; t h e L X X . is ά ν θ ρ ω πό ς
τις, b u t J e r o m e w a s p r o b a b l y t r a n s la t in g d ir e c t fro m t h e H e b r . ‫א ח ל‬ ‫; א י ש‬
in H e b r e w , n o le s s , th an in H e lle n is t i c G r e e k , th e n u m e r a l w a s f r e q u e n t ly
u s e d fo r th e in d e fin ite a r t i c l e ; s e e D a v id s o n , In lrod ud ojyIicbreiv Gram m ar
§ ii.
scrib a 5 = 619 γ ρ α μμα τ ε ί ς , £a scrib e 5; 21. 19 c fici arborem
unam 5 = σ υ κ η ν μι α ν , c a fig tree 5; cf. 26. 69, M k . 12. 42,
A p o c . 9. 13, 19. 17 etc.
GOVERN M EN T. TH E NOUN.
T h e N o m in a tiv e ,
§ 108. (i) S u s p e n d e d N o m in a tiv e (Nominatiuus pendens).
T h is loose con stru ction , w h ich is, in d eed , com m o n in later
L a tin , m a y b e p a r t ly d u e to th e H e b re w s ; see abo ve, § 19.
A sim ilar use o f th e n o m in ative is found after eeee (ι δ ο ύ ) :
so ‘ ecce u o x d e cae lis 5 M t. 3. 17, ' e cce eg o et p u eri m e i5
H eb r. 2 . 13, from Is a . 8. 18.
§ 109. (ii) Im p e r s o n a l V e r b s . V e r b s used o n ly in the
3rd Pers. sin g., and w ithout a nom in ative, are calle d Im
person al (see § 136 infra).
T h e y are in use (1) to den ote natural phenomena (rain,
ligh tn in g, th under). T h e s e are used p e rso n a lly , for if the
G reek s o rig in a lly said Ζ ε υ ς , Θ ε ό ς , υ ε ι , and the R o m a n s
sp o k e o f T u p p ite r ton ans V or 1 p lu u iu s \ m uch m ore did
th e C h osen P e o p le refer su ch p h en o m en a to the direct
action o f G o d . T h u s w e g e t the full e x p ressio n 4 p lu it
D o m in u s J, etc., freq u en tly (G en. 2 . 5, 19. 24, E x . 9 . 23 etc.),
as also 4 intonuit D o m in u s 5 (I S a m . [ I R e g .] 7. 10, P s. 18.
13 [ 17. 14], 29 [ 28.] 3, E c c lu s . 46 . 20), an d th e a p p e a l to
G o d 1F u lg u r a coru scatio n em 5 Ps. 144 ( 143). 6 ; but also
the im person al v erb 4 p lu i t 5 L k . 17. 29, J ac. 5 . 17, A p o c . 11.
6, and in th e O ld T e st.
(2) to d en ote mental emotions.
paenitet : often u sed in O ld T e st, o f G o d ; p. m e, p. eum , etc.,
follow ed b y quod w ith su b j. or used a b s o lu t e ly ; not
w ith gen . U s e d im p e rso n a lly in N e w T e st. (p. m e L k .
17. 4, I I C o r. 7. 8, cf. H eb r. 7. 21), b u t som etim es p er-
1 ‘ C a e l o t o n a n te m c r e d id i m u s Io u e m R e g n a r e ’ , H o r . Od. iii . 5. 1.
so n a lly (paenitem ini M k . 1. 15, A c t 3 . 19, paen iteren t
L k . 10. 13, paen iteri A p o c . 2. 21).
-piget : o n ly once in th e V u lg a t e B ib le , E c c lu s . 7 . 39 ‘ non te
p ig ea t uisitare infirm um
pudet : also o n ly once, Is a . 54. 4 4 neque eru b esces : non
enim te p u d e b it \
taedet : used n o rm ally, Jo b 9. 21 ‘ taed eb it m e uitae m eae
cf. E c c l. 2. 17, and J o b 10. 1 ; I I C o r. 1. 8 ‘ ita ut
taed eret nos etiam u iu ere ’ (rod ζ η ν ) ; used p e r s o n a lly
‘ ca e p it t a e d e r e ’ N u m . 21. 4, I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 10. 32,
cf. M k . 14. 33.
(3) to den ote duty, interest, etc.
oportet : ch iefly found in N e w T e s t , ( —δ ε ι , ο φ ε ί λ ε ι ), an d
used n o rm a lly ; in the O ld T e st, notice I I S a m . ( I I R e g .)
4 . 10 c cui o p o rtebat m erced em d are pro n u n tio ‫ == ״‬w h ich
w as the fittin g rew ard for his tid in gs (‘ w h ic h w a s th e
rew ard I g a v e him for his t id in g s ’ R .V .)
decet : is rarer, and is used as often p e rso n a lly as im p erso n
a l l y ; Ps. 65. 1 ( 64. 2) ‘ te d ecet h y m n u s ’ , cf. 93 ( 92). 5 ;
T it . 2. i ‘ q u ae decent sanam d o ctrin a m ’. Dedecet is not
found.
interest : o n ly G al. 2. 6 ‘ nihil m ea in t.’ R efert is not fo u n d.
libet', o n ly G en . 16. 6 o f H a g a r ‘ u tere ea ut li b e t ’, an d
P ro v. 26. 2 ‘ passer quo lib et u a d e n s ’ .
lice t : frequen t and n o r m a l; a b s o lu te ly or w ith D a t.
F o r accidit, contingit, fit etc. see § 134 (a) b elo w .
The Accusative.
§1 1 0 . (1) A ft e r verb s u s u a lly intransitive (g e n e ra lly
a G r a e c is m ) : M t. 5. 6 ‘ qu i esuriunt et sitiun t iu stitiam ’ ;
s im ila rly after confundi, erubescere, etc., see ab o v e § 47 ; a fter
au d io ( = h ear of) E p h . 1. 15, C o l. 1. 4, P h ile m . 5, Jac. 5. 11.
2C ■i 2 M
(2) T h e Cognate Object (u su a lly w ith ep ith et) akin in
m ean in g to the verb : 4p astores . . . cu stod ien tes u ig ilias
n o c tis ' L k . 2. 6 : ‘ iustum iu d iciu m iu d ic a t e ’ Joh . 7 . 2 4 ;
4certa bonum certam en ’ I T im . 6. 2 ; 4tim o rem eorum ne
tim u e ritis’ (rov φ ό β ο υ α υ τ ω υ μη φ ο β η θ η τ ε ) ; 4cap tiu am d u x it
cap tiu itatem 5 E p h . 4 . 8, from Ps. 68. 18 ( 67. 19) ; 4can tate
D o m in o can ticu m nouum ’ Ps. 98 (97). 1.
(3) Double accusative (person and thin g), after v e rb s of
te ach in g and a s k in g ; a n orm al c o n stru c tio n : 4ille uos
d o ce b it o m n ia ’ Joh. 14. 26 e t c . ; 4quem si p etierit filius suus
panem ’ M t. 7. 9.
S o also celare : 'h u n c celau it me p ater m eus serm onem
. . . ? ’ I S am . (I R e g .), 20. 2.
an d traducere \ ‘ B e rz e lla i ‫ ־‬. . tr a d u x it regem Io r d a n e m ’
I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 19. 31.
(4) Accusative with Infinitive. T h is o rd in a ry con struction
is n o ticeab le o n ly from its r a r i t y ; it is u su a lly r e p la c e d b y
quod, quia, or quoniam : but w e h ave 4d icu n t eum uiuere
L k . 24. 23 ; 'a e s tim a n te s eum m ortuum e s s e ’ A c t . 14. 19,
cf. R o m . 2. 19, I C o r. 7. 10, 11, P h il. 3 . 13, I T im . 2 . 8 :
w ith esse understood b u t not ex p re sse d , 4 m iseru n t in sid ia
tores qui se iustos s im u la r e n t’ L k . 20. 2 0 ; ficture infinitive,
4testes inuoco h o d ie caelu m et terram cito p eritu ro s uos
esse d e terra ’ D t. 4. 26. .
(5) £ Greek ’ Accusative (w ith verbs o f c lo t h in g ) ; see § 44 e.
S im ila r ly the accu sativ e o f Respect : 4aspersi c o rd a ’ (kppavrL-
σ με ν ο ι τ α ς η α ρ δ ι α ς ) H e b r. 10. 22.
(6) O th er uses :
absolutely', 4in lum in atos o c u lo s ’ E p h . 1. 18.
loosely : 4testificor coram D e o , et C h risto Iesu qui iu d ica -
turus est uiuos ac m ortuos, et aduentum ipsius, et
regn um e iu s ’ I I T im . 4 . 1.
§ 111. (7) Accusative with prepositions .
a. P r e p o s it io n s t a k in g o n ly th e A c c .
ad (1) = io: ‘ facie ad f a c ie m ’ E x . 33. 11, D t. 0. 4, J u d .
6. 22, I C o r. 13. 12 ; 'o s ad o s ’ (N u m . 12. 8) I I Joh.
13, I I I Io h . 1 4 ; 'c la m a r e ad D o m in u m ’ Ps. 3 . 4 '( 5 )
and o fte n ; 'd ic e r e a d ’ (instead o f dat.) Isa. 18. 4, 21 .
. 16, 29. 22, Joh. 4 . 15 etc. ; ‘ factus est serm o D o m in i ad ’
I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 12. 22, Jerem . 13. 3, E z e k . 6. 1 an d
often ; also ‘ factum est uerbum D o m in i a d ’ E z e k . 1.3 an d
often ; ' non respondit ei ad u llum uerbu m ’ (πρ ο ς ο υ δ ε ε ν
ρ η μα ) M t. 27. 14·
w ith usque : ‘ u squ e ad D a u id ’ , etc. M t. 1. 17 ; ' u squ e ad
t e m p u s ’ L k . 4 . 13, A c t . 13. 11.
(2) = tow ards : 1p atien tes . . . ad om n es ’ I T h ess. 5. 14 ;
' inim ici . . . ad in uicem ’ L k . 23. 12 ; 'a d aq u ilo n em ’ =
on th e north, I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 16. 1 4 ; 'a d u e s p e r a m ’
Gen. 8. 11 and often.
(3) =: against : ' tam q u am ad latron em ex istis ’ M t. 26. 55.
(4) = at, in the neighbourhood o f : ' a d m a m illa s ’ A p o c . 1.
1 3 ; 'a d rad ice m ’ M t. 3. 10 ; ' ad m anus . . . trah en tes
(γ ε ι ρ α γ ω γ ο υ ν τ ε ς ) A c t . 9 . 8, cf. ' ad m anum d e d u c t o r e s ’
cod . d A c t . 13. i i .
( 5) = according to (a stan dard ; κ α τ ά ) : ' ad im a g in em
n o s tra m ’ G en . 1. 26, 27 ; 'a d oculum se r u ie n te s’ E p h .
6. 6 ; 'a d d u ritiam c o r d is ’ (in con sid eratio n o f ; πρ ο ς )
M t. 19. 8.
(6) = f o r (purpose), esp. w ith g e r u n d ; cf. § 129 (1 ): ' ad
b ella n d u m ’ D t. 3. 1, 20. 9, Jos. 14. 11, Jud. 5. 14, e t c . ;
' ad con cu p iscen d u m e a m * M t. 5. 28 ; ' ad non p a rc e n
d u m co rp o ri . . . ad satu ritatem carn is Σ C o l. 2. 23 ; ' ad
con su m m ation em sanctorum ’ E p h . 4 . 12 ; 'a d h o c ’ (for
this v e r y p u r p o s e ; ε ι ς τ ο υ τ ο ) A c t . 9. 21.
Μ 2
(7) = apud : £claritatem ad tu rb as* W is d . (S a p .) 8. 10 ; ‘ ad
m eip su m ’ (w ithin me) P s. 42. 6 (41. 7) ; cf. P ro v . 30. 10.
aduersum, aduersus = towards, aga in st : so I M a c c. 0. 52,
58, E p h . 6. 1 2 ; — κ α τ α w ith gen. A c t . 6. 13, R o m . 8.
33, ] C o r. 15. 15 ; = kvavriov A c t . 28. 17.
ante = before, used m ore fre q u e n tly of p la ce than o f tim e,
e sp e c ia lly in th e H eb ra ism s ante faciem , ante oculos, ante
uultum, etc. G en. 30. 38, E x . 34. 11, I K g s . ( I l l R e g .)
18. 15 e t c .; also ‘ sic p la cu it ante t e ’, etc., M t. 11. 26,
L k . 1Ö. 21 ; ‘ ante D e u m ’ I T h e ss . 3. 13.
O f tim e : ‘ an te unum et alteru m d iem * ( = in tim e past)
D t. 4 . 42 ; ‘ ante annos q u attu o rd ecim 5 (fo u rteen ,years
a g o ; πρ ο ε τ ω υ δ ε κ α τ ε σ σ ά ρ ω ν I I C o r. 12. 2.
apud — in the presence of\ in the opinion o f (esp. o f G o d ), so
the F re n ch chez, aiiprbs de :
‘ opto ap u d D e u m ’ (Glc. dat.) A c t . 26. 29 ; ‘ in d icari ap u d
iniqu os et non ap u d s a n c to s ’ I C o r. 6. 1 ; ‘ a p u d se
p o n a t 5 (la y b y at hom e) I C or. 16. 2 ; ‘ testam en ta saecu li
posita sun t apud illu m * E c c lu s . 44. 19 ; ‘ p ru den tes ap u d
uosm et ipsos ’ (in y o u r o w n o p in io n ; πα ρ ε α υ τ ο ι ς )
R o m . 12. 16. ‫י‬
cata = κ α τ ά : ‘ cata m ane m ane ’ (m orning b y m orn in g ; τ ο
πρ ω ί ) E z e k . 46. 14, 15. T h is G raecism is often found
in the titles to the G o sp els in O ld L a tin M S S . (cata
• M arcu m , cata L u ca n u m , etc.).
circa, circum, circiter = aroun d, abo u t, con cern ed w it h :
‘ circa uiam ‘ circa m are ’ (by) M k . 4 . 4, 15 ; c ir c a
d o m o s ’ (/car’ oiKov) A c t . 2 . 46, 5. 4 2 ; ‘ circa m ed iam
n o ctem ’ (κ α τ ά with acc.) A c t . 27. 27, ‘ circa ortum d iei ’
Judith 10. 11 ; cf. M t. 20. 3, 5, 6, 9, 27. 46, M k . 3. 8 ;
‘ sa ta g e b a t circa frequens m in is te riu m ’ L k . 10. 4 0 ;
‘ lan gu en s c irca q u a e s tio n e s ’ I T im . 6. 4 ; ‘ circa fidem
n au fragau eru n t ’ I T im . 1. 1 9 ; ‘ q u ae c ir c a m e (uos)
s u n t ; = m y (your) affairs, E p h . 6. 21 (τ α κ α τ ’ 6μ6), P h il.
1. 12, 2. 19 (τ α πε ρ ί υ μω ν ).
contra = against, opposite to, towards ; cf. contraruis, § 84 :
‘'c o n tra m e r id ie m 5 I S a m . (I R e g .) 27. 10, cf. D t . 2.
3, N um . 24. I , D a n . 6. 10 ; 4 con tra ipsam ’ A c t . 27.1 4 ; 1
in I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 8. 44 the first contra = again st, th e
others = tow ards ; 4asp icere con tra D e u m ’ (to lo o k
upon G od = ε ν ώ πι ο ν L X X ) E x o d . 3. 6 ; 4iratu sq u e est
D o m in u s con tra m e ’ (in p la ce of dat.) D e u t. 4 . 21, so
Ita l. adirato contro, and F re n ch se facher contre.
crga = towards, with a vino to : 4qu o d non esset (facies
L a b a n ) e rg a se sicu t h e r i ’ G en . 31. 2 , 5 ; ‘ e rga m eum
obsequium (πρ ο ς ) P h il, 2. 30 ; 4e rg a fratres tuos ’ (w ith
regard to) G en. 37. 14, I S a m . (I R e g .) 17. 22 ; frequen t
in I I M acc.
extra ~ outside o f: 4 e x t ra ciu itatem , p o rtam , castra, etc.
G en . 19. 17, E x o d . 29. 14, E z e k . 40, 44 e t c .; 4e x tra
c o r p u s ' I C o r. 6. 18, I I C o r. 12. 3 ; ‘ e x t r a flu m e n 3
(b eyo n d th e river) I M a c c . 5. 41 ; 4e x t ra d is c ip lin a m ’
(w it h o u t ; χ ω ρ ί ς ) H e b r . 12. 8.
inter = between, am on g : 4 inter duos m ilites 5 (με τ α ξ ύ ) A c t .
12. 6 ; ‘ iu d ica t d iem inter d i e m ’ (esteem eth one d a y
ab o v e an oth er ; κ ρ ί ν ε ι η με ρ α ν πα ρ ’ η με ρ α ν ) R o m . 14. 5 ;
4tu rb atio inter m ilites ’ (am on g th e so ld iers ; ε ν τ ο ι ς
σ τ ρ α τ ι ω τ α ι ς ) A c t 12. 18.
intra = w ith in : intra portas, etc., as w ith extra, E x o d . 20.
10 e t c .; ‘ in tra s e ’ (ε ν ε α υ τ ω ) L c . 7. 39‫ י‬c ^· 49 e t c 7‫־‬
4 in tra u o s ’ M t. 3 . 9 e t c .; 4 intra t e ’ (on this sid e o f
thee) I S am . (I R e g .) 20. 22.
iuxia ~ near , b u t also in V u lg . = according to ; 2 4iu x t a
1 T h e G k . is κ α τ ' α ν τ 7}s, w h i c h th e A . V . t r a n s la t e s 1a g a in s t i t 7 ( i . e . th e
s h ip = V u lg ‫־‬.), b u t t h e R . V . 1fro m i t 7 (i. e . fro m C r e t e ) .
2 J e r o m e h im s e lf w a s fo n d o f iuxta, w h i c h o fte n w h e n q u o t in g fr o m
m e m o r y h e s u b s t it u t e s fo r t h e secundum o f th e V u l g a t e ; t h u s fo r secundum
con u allem M am b re ’ Gen. 13. 18 etc. ' iu x ta genus suum ’
Gen. 1. .11 e t c .; 'iu x t a traditio n em s e n io ru m ’ M k . 7.
5 ; ' iu x ta q u o d ’ N u m . 6. 21.
ob = on account o f ( = δ ι α with A c c . ) : ' ob quam cau sam ’
I I T im . 1. 12, T it . 1. 13.
penes = in the power o f: u s u a lly penes me, penes te : c penes
tem etipsu m ’ (Kara σ α υ τ ό ν ) R o m . 14. 22 ; c penes regem
noli u elle u id eri sa p ie n s’ (d isp la y not th y w isdom before
the k in g ; πα ρ α β α σ ι λ ε ι ) E cc lu s. 7. 5.
per — through, by means o f (δ ι α w ith G e n .) :
(1) O f place , e sp e c ia lly in d istribu tive sense, e. g. per lo ca,
p er d u ita tem ; 1p er d u it a t e s ’ T i t 1. 5 ; 'p e r stad ia
d u o d ecim m ilia ’ (ε πί σ τ α δ ί ω ν δ ώ δ ε κ α χ ι λ ι ά δ ω ν A p o c .
21. 1 6 ; 'p e r p r a e c e p s ’ (κ α τ α τ ο υ κ ρ η μυ ο υ ) M t. 8. 32,
L k . 8. 33 ; ‘ per c ir c u it u m ’ (κ ύ κ λ ω ) R o m . 15. 19.
(2) O f time, in an sw er to th e question how long? p er
totam n octem , p er m ultum tem pus, e t c .: ' per dies q u a d
ragin ta (Sd ή με ρ ω ν τ ε σ σ . = at ‫־‬in tervals durin g) A c t . 1. 3 ;
so im p ly in g re p e titio n ,' per om nes annos ’ ( = e v e ry ye a r)
L k . 2. 41 ; £p e r t e r ’ A c t . 10. 1 6 ; ' per partes (in t u r n ;
dvb με ρ ο ς ) 1 C or. 14. 27.
(3) = by means o f: ' per fidem et non p er sp eciem ’ I I C o r.
5. 7 ; 'p e r c h a r t a m ’ I I Joh. 1 3 ; 'p e r c h o r o s ’ (in
dances) I S a m . (I R e g .) 21. 11.
(4) In oaths: 'p e r m em etipsum iuraui ’ G en. 22. 1 6 ; 'p e r
c a e lu m ’, 'p e r t e r r a m ’, etc. M t. 5. 34, 36, 26. 63 etc.
post = a fte r ; som etim es of th e pattern follow ed : ' unus
p ost unum ’ J011. 8 . 9 ; ' post u elam en tu m . . . secun dum ’
H eb r. 9. 3 ; ' requ ieu it post D o m in u m ’ 1 S a m . (I R e g .)
ciindcm spiritum ( I C o r . 12. 8 ) o f th e V u lg ·. h e q u o t e s ( V . 7 9 S ) iuxia eundem

spiritum ; P s . 119 ( U S ) , 2 5 , 107 has secundum nerbum tuum in th e G a lli c a n
P s a lt e r , b u t iuxta uerbum iuum in t h e Psalt. iuxia Hebraeos ; t h e r e a r e
n u m e r o u s o t h e r i n s t a n c e s ; s e e a ls o G o e lz e r , Latinitcde S . Jerome, p . 3 3 2 .
7. 2 (,'re ste d follow in g th e L o r d ' D o u a y ; ‘ lam en ted
after the L o r d 5 E . V . ) ; ‘ post carnem am b u lan t 5 I I P e t.
2. 10 ( 07π σ ω ), cf. J u d e 7.
braeter : (1) = except (πλ η υ ) : M k . 12. 32, A c t . 8. 1 ; ‘ p raeter
folia ’ (ε ΐ μη φ ύ λ λ α ) M k. 11 . 13 ; ‘ p raeter eum 5 (ε κ τ ό ς τ ο υ
υ 7τ ο τ .) I C o r. 15. 27.
(e) = besides, in addition to : ‘ p raeter i l l a 5 (χ ω ρ ί ς r&v πα ρ .)
I I C o r. 11. 2 8 ; ‘ altari p raeter a ltare D o m in i5 Jos. 22.
19, 29.
(3) — beyond', ‘ p raeter o m n e s' (m ore than al l ; πα ρ α
πα ν τ α ς ) L k . 13. 4 ; c p raeter d o c trin a m J (con trary to th e
d o c t rin e ; πα ρ ά τ η ν δ ι δ α χ ή v) R o m . 1 6 .17, ‘ p raeter tem p u s
aetatis ’ (past a g e ; τ τ α ρ α κ α ι ρ ό ν η λ ι κ ί α ς ) H e b r. 11. 11.
prope — near to: ‘ p ro p e fo n te m 5, etc. G en. 24. 13, 30 etc.
p ro p ter 1 = on account of: ‘ p ro p ter nim iam caritatem suam 5
(δ ι α τ η ν πο λ λ η ν α γ ά πη ν α υ τ ο υ ) E p h . 2. 4> cf· P h il·
1. 15 ; ‘ p rop ter tem p u s 5 H e b r . 5. 12 ; ‘ p ro p ter p eccatu m
. . . iu stificationem 5 (δ ι α w ith A c c .) R o m . 8. 10, b u t
‘ propter in h ab itan tem sp iritu m 5 11 = δ ι α w ith G en .
In Pss. = ε ν ε κ α : e. g. ‘ p ro p ter inim icos tuos ‫ י‬P s. 8. 2 (3)
e t c . : = ε ι ς (for the p u rpo se o f ) ; ‘ p ro p ter eu an geliu m 5
I I C or. 2. 12.
p ro p ter quod = δ ι ό (therefore) I I C or. 4 . 13, 16.
re tro : I T im . 5. 15, see ab o v e § 95.
seamdum (lit. ‘ fo llo w in g 5) : in V u lg . m ain ly = ‘ in a c c o r d
an ce w ith 5 (κ α τ ά ), ‘ a f t e r 5; so ‘ secun dum sp eciem su am 5
Gen. 1. 12, cf. Ps. 51. 1 ( 50. 3), 95 8 ( 9 4 .9 ); ‘ secu n d u m
uolun tatem eius 5( = πρ ο ς .τ ο θ ε λ η μα α ύ τ ο υ ) L k . 12. 47 i
1 N um . 24. 7 ‘ t o lle t u r propter A g a g r e x c i u s ’ is o b s c u r e ; t h e H e b r e w

a p p e a rs to m e a n ‘ h is k in g ( o r k in g d o m ) s h a ll b e higher than A g a g ’ , b u t
a L a p id e (ad loc.) because o f A g a g
e x p l a in s it, ‘ h is k in g s h a ll b e t a k e n a w a y
a n d th e D o u a y V e r s io n re n d e rs ‘ For A gag h is k in g s h a ll b e r e m o v e d ’ ,
w h e r e ‘ fo r ’ m u st = ‘ fo r th e s a k e o f ’ .
£secundum tem p u s ’ (Kara κ α ι ρ ό ς = c at th e appoin ted
tim e ’ R o m . 5. 6 ; £secun dum D e u m ’ = ' a cc o rd in g to the
w ill o f G o d ’ R o m . 8. 2 7 ; ‘ secu n d u m h o m in e m ’ =
'a c c o r d in g to the m anner of m e n ’ , from m ere hum an
m otives (P lu m m er) I C or. 15. 3 2 ; ‘ secundum ig n o b ili
t a t e m ’ = ‘ b y w a y o f d isp a ra g e m e n t’ I I C o r. 11. 21 ;
‘ secun dum d u o s 5 (Kara δ υ ο ) = ‘ to the n u m ber o f t w o ’
I C o r. 14. 27 1j ‘ secun dum S alm o n em ’ (Kara Σ α λ μ ω ν ψ )
= ‘ over a g a in st S a lm o n e ’ A c t . 27. 7 ; see a lso ab o v e,
under iuxta.
secus\ in V u lg a te o n ly as preposition , in cla s sica l L a tin
m a in ly as a d v e rb ; see above, § 95.
subtus : used as preposition in V u lg a te , in classica l L a tin
o n ly as a d v e r b ; see abo ve, § 95.
supra : freq u en tly = super.
= above ; ' su pra id qu o d uidet m e ’ I I C o r. 12. 6, 1supra
uirtutem ’ I I C o r. 1. 8, 's u p r a m odum ’ (κ α θ ' υ πε ρ β ο λ ή ν :
= e x c e e d in g ly ) I I C o r. 1. 8, 4 . 17.
= upon ; i su p ra s in g u lo s ’ A c t . 2 . 3, cf. H e b r . 11. 1 3 ;
‘ su pra sa c r ific iu m ’ (ε πί rfj θ υ σ ί α ) P h il. 2 . 17.
= over : 1su p ra ( s u p e r / ) om nia q u ae possidet ’ L k . 12. 44.
also as A d v e r b ; L k . 11. 44, H e b r. 4 . 7.
trails = across’, 'tr a n s locum illu m ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 14. 1,
cf. M t. 14. 22, Joh. 6. 2 2 : ‘ trans Io r d a n e n ’ (b eyo n d
Jordan) D t. 1. 1, 5, 3 . 8, N u m . 22. 1, Jos. 9 . 1.
ultra = beyond : ' u ltra te ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 20. 22, 37, ' ultra
u o s ’ I I C o r. 10. 16, 'u lt r a uires ’ E x . 18. 1 8 ; in m o ral
sense 'p e s s im o u ltra om nem t e r r a m ’ D a n . 3 . 32 (m ost
w ick e d b e y o n d a ll th at are upon the earth ).2
1 i. e . at e a c h s e r v i c e ; n o t ‘ b y t w o s \ fo r t h e y w e r e to s p e a k s e p a r a t e ly
( p e r p artes, ά ν α pepos) ; s e e a b o v e , p. 86.
2 Cis an d itcrsus d o n o t o c c u r in th e V u lg a t e ; infra o n ly a s a d v e r b ,
Ex. 40. 18, M t. 2. 16.
b. P r e p o s itio n s t a k in g A c c . an d A b l, T h e ir use w ith A c c .

in {ε ι ς ) denotes m otion into ; action p assin g o ver to, to w ard s,
upon, again st, a n y one ; a cc o rd in g to the co n tex t. It s
use is frequent in the P a u lin e E p p ., e sp e c ia lly E p h .
Its vario u s u sages— m a in ly p a ra lle l with the G r e e k —
can sc a r c e ly b e classified.
= 7tpon : 4in d iscip u lo s ’ L k . 6. 20, cf. M k . 1 4 . 6 , E p h . 5 . 6.
= unto : ‘ in a d o p t i o n e m etc., E p h . 1 . 5, 3 . 20, 4 . 16.
= according to: 4in m ensuram ‫ י‬E p h . 4 . 16.
= against : 4in filium . . . in spiritum ’ L k . 1 2 . 10.
o f tim e : 4in crastin um ’, etc., M t. 6. 34, P h il. 1 . 1 0 ,1 T im .
1 . 17, A p o c . 9 . 15.
of p la ce (d ire ctio n ): 4in s u a ’ Joh. 1 9 . 27, cf. A c t . 2 1 . 6,
L k . 6. 48 (fodit in altu m ), ‘ in o ccu rsu m ’ to m eet, G en .
1 4 . 17 and freq u en tly in O ld T e st,
o f p u rpose ( = the H e b r. ‫ ל‬, see § 22) ex p re ssin g w h a t
a th in g is to be, or to be regarded as: 4in lau d em ’ , etc.
E p h . 1 . 12, 14, 2 . 15, 21, 2 2 ,4positus est in ruin am ’ L k .
2 . 34, cf. A c t . 1 9 . 27, R o m . 2 . 26.
sub denotes m otion u n d e r: 4ut intres sub tectu m m e u m ’
, M t. 8. 8, 4g a llin a c o n g re g a t p u llo s suos sub a l a s ' M t.
2 3 . 37. ^ β β
siebter = under : fa irly frequen t in O ld T e st. ; not found in
N e w ; som etim es used as ad verb , D t. 2 8 . 13, Ju d . 7 . 8,
Isa. 1 4 . 9, A m o s 2 . 9.
super = over , upon (strictly o f m otion, but also o f rest) :
4su p er firm am en tu m ’ G en . 1 . 7, cf. M t. 2 4 . 2, Joh. 1 9 . 19 ;
v e r y frequent. E x p r e s s in g a u th o rity o v e r : 4 su p e r
om nem Is r .’ I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 4 . 7. cf. 1 1 . 28, A c t . 6. 3,
P h il. 2 . 9, H e b r. 2 . 7.
A s P lebraism , o f the em otions, after m isereri, d olere, etc.
‘ p lan ge q u a si u irgo . . . su p er uirum ’ Joel 1. 8, cf. Jon.
9o Syntactical Peculiarities
3 . 10, 4 . 1 ;‫ ס ו‬m isereor super t u r b a m ’ M k . 8. 2, cf. Jon.
3 . 10, I I M acc. 1 1 . 10, M k . 6. 34.
= unto : ‘ testim on ium nostrum su p er uos ’ I I T h e ss . 1. 10
(ί φ * υ μ α ς ).
‘ non est s u p e r ’ ( = c non s u p e r e s t’) G en . 42 13 .‫׳‬. Super
is a h ard -w o rk e d preposition .
T h e D a t iv e .
§ 112. S p e a k in g g e n e ra lly , w e m a y s a y th at the D a t iv e
(u su ally = person) corresp on d s to th e N o u n , th e G en itiv e
(ex p ressin g q u a lity ) to th e A d je ctiv e , the A b la t iv e (d en o tin g
atten d an t circu m stan ce) to the A d v e r b .
T h e D ativ e, on the w h ole, is used n o rm a lly in th e V u lg a t e
as the in d irect o b je ct o f the V e r b , the person in (or again st)
w h ose interest so m eth in g is d o n e ; e sp e c ia lly after verbs
com p ou n d ed w ith ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub,
in clu d in g th e com p ou n d s o f esse; also after esse itself, w ith
a P re d ica tiv e N ou n or A d je c t iv e .
1. W ith verb s w h ich h ave, or m a y h ave, a direct o b je c t :
‘ p ara m ihi h o sp itiu m ’ P h ilem . 22.1. T h is in clu d es a ll w ords
of giv in g in th e w id est sense (im p artin g, sh o w in g, sp eak in g,
e t c .) ; so d eb ere R o m . 1 3 . 8, e x h ib e re R o m . 6. 13, M t. 2 6 .
53 etc., p raeb ere (frequen t in O ld T e st.), m etiri (quam
m ensus est nobis D e u s I I C o r. 1 0 . 13).
2. W it h verb s w h ich h ave no d irect o b je c t : v e rb s d e
n o tin g to please, o b e y (an d th eir opposites), ap p ear, p ard o n ,
hurt, and m an y others ; so m in istrare M t. 4 . 11, seru ire R o m .
1 . 9, a p p arere A c t . 1 . 3, p raecip ere 1 . 2, uid eri I C o r. 1 5 . 5, 8,
ign o scere w ith dat. o f person D t. 2 9 . 20, I I K g s . ( I V R e g .)
5 . 18, of thing Jos. 2 4 . 19, W is d . (S ap .) 1 3 . 8, D a n . 4 . 24,
nocere (but also accu s., see N u m . 5 . 9 ‫נ‬, L k . 4 . 35, A c t . 7 . 26
‘x T h e r e a r e m a n y d a tiv e s in th is s h o rt E p i s t l e ; s e e v e r s e s 1 - 4 , 8 11, 13
1 6 -1 9 , 22 j b u t 21 confidens is u s e d w i t h a b l.
1 8 . io ), nubere L e v . 2 1 . 3 (used for m a rriag e in general, e. g.

Mt. 2 2 . 30, I C o r. 7 . 9, I T im . 4 . 3), stu dere Pro v. 2 3 . 3 0 :
e x p e d it (fr e q u e n tly ); ire o b u iam (frequen tly).
3. D a tiv e o f interest, e s p e c ia lly w ith esse or fie r i and
a P re d ica tiv e N o u n , show in g to o r for w h om so m eth in g is
p red icated , or to w h om it is (belongs) : thus 4 ign o m in ia est
illi . . . g lo ria est i l l i ’ I C o r. 11. 14, 15, ‘ in im icu s uobis factus
sum ’ G al. 4 . 16.
H en ce the D a tiv e after esse denotes the p o ssesso r: ‘ cui
nom en erat Io h a n n e s ’ (w h ose nam e w as John) Joh. 1 . 6,
‘ erit S a r ra e filius 5 (S a ra h sh all h ave a son) R o m . 9 . 9, cf.
3. I.
In th e p red icatio n ju st m en tioned the D a tiv e is used

instead of the N o m in ative to denote w h at a person or
th in g is regard ed as b ein g or b e c o m in g : thus ‘ oneri e s s e ’
I T h ess. 2. 7 ‘ to be burdensom e, cf. ‘ facti sum us d esp ectu i ’
N eh . ( I I E s d r.) 4 . 4 ·1
T h e sam e con struction is found w ith th e ad d ed D a tiv e of
the person interested ; ‘ eritis odio o m n ib u s ’ M t. 1 0 . 22, cf.
2 4 . 9, M k . 1 3 . 13, L k . 2 1 . 17, W isd . (S a p .) 1 4 . 9, ‘ testim onio
estis u obism et ip s is ’ M t. 2 3 . 31, ‘ est tib i c u r a e ’ L k . 1 0 . 40,
cf. A c t . 1 8 . 17. .
4. D a tiv e after a d je ctiv e s, often as p re d icativ es w ith e s s e :
‘ to lerab iliu s e rit terrae S o d o m o ru m ’ M t. 10. 15, ‘ carissi
m um . . . m ih i’ P h ilem . 16, ‘ com m o diu s t ib i’ I K g s . ( I l l R e g .)
2 1 . 2, ‘ nihil m ihi con sciu s sum ’ I C o r. 4 . 4, ‘ nim ium cre d u
lus uerbis co n iu gis ’ G en . 3 9 . 19,2 ‘ in im ica est D e o ’ R o m . 8.
7,3 ‫ ‘ ״‬u ictui n e c e s s a r ia ’ G en. 4 2 . 7, ‘ p a ria D eo se n tire ’
1 B u t th is c o n s t r u c t io n , w h i c h is c la s s i c a l, is f r e q u e n t ly r e p l a c e d b y th e
H e b r a is m o f esse in w i t h A c c . o r A b l . ; s e e § 22.
2 T h e s e w o r d s a r e a n e x p l ic a t i v e a d d it io n to th e text on th e p a rt of
J e r o m e ; t h e r e a r e o t h e r s in t h is c h a p t e r .
3 S o ££) (£ ( in im ic it ia e s t in D e u m O x f. E d . ) ; b u t i in im ic a e st D e i ’J a c . i. 4.
9 2 Syntactical Peculiarities
I I M acc. 9 . 12, ‘ m ihi pro p rio r est r e x ’ I I S am . ( I I R e g .)
1 9 . 42, ‘ his qui ei p ro x im i s u n t ’ N u m . 2 7 . 11, cf. D t. 1. 7,
H eb r. 6. 8 , ‘ prope est D o m in u s om n ibus in uocantibus eum 7
P s. 145 ( 1 4 4 ). 18, cf. Jer. 12 . 2 ; so s im ilis 1 and d issim ilis
W isd . (S a p .) 2 . 15, D an . 7. 7, u tilis an d inutilis P h ilem . 11 ;
th e ad v erb p raesto m a y tak e a d a t iv e ,‘ m u lta sim ilia praesto
sunt e i 5 Job 2 3 . .14, ‘ n ullus altario p raesto f u it 5 H ebr. 7 . 13,
‘ cui enim non p raesto sunt h aec 5 I I P e t. 1 . 9 (these th ree
are the o n ly instances in the V u lg a te ).
5. Irre g u la r constructions :
‘ S a crificiu m D e o spiritus con tribu latu s 5 Ps. 5 1 . 17 ( 5 0 . 19)
from the L X X τ ω Θ 6 ω ; in the Psalt. iuxta Hebr. Jerom e
wrote D ei.
‘ com itetu r ei ’ T o b . 5. 27.
‘ iu d icau it m ihi D o m in u s ’ G en, 3 0 . 6, cf. L e v . 1 9 . 15, E z r .
(I E sd r.) 7 . 25, Ps. 10 . 20 (9 . 43), 82 ( 8 1 ). 3, Isa. 1 . 17, 23.
‘ iussit m inistris u t ’ G en. 4 2 . 25 etc.
‘ perm issum est P a u lo m anere s ib im e t ’ (/cad’ ε α υ τ ό ν ) A c t .
2 8 . 16.
‘ p rin cip es non sunt tim ori boni o p e r is ’ R o m . 1 3 . 3.
‘ unde ergo nobis in deserto p an es ta n t o s ’ M t. 1 5 . 33
(πο θ ε ν η μι ν kv ε ρ η μι α α ρ τ ο ι τ ο σ ο υ τ ο ι ).
‘ m ihi u in d ictam ’ R o m . 12 . 19 (ε μο ι ε κ δ ι κ η σ ι ς ).
‘ non a llig a b is os b o u i trituranti ’ I C o r. 9 . 9 , 1 T im . 5 . 18,2
cf. ‘ a llig an s sibi pedes et m anus ’ A c t . 2 1 . 11.
1 Siniitis in t h e O ld T e s t , is often fo u n d w it h t h e G e n ., mci, tin, e s p e c ia lly
w h e n u s e d o f G o d ; b u t in t h e P s a lm s it u s u a l l y t a k e s D a t. A s w e fin d
‘ a d iu t o r iu m s im ile s ib i ’ a n d ‘ a d iu t o r s i m ilis e i u s ’ , G e n . 2. 18, 2 0 , it w o u ld
seem im p o s s ib le to m a k e an 3 ‫ ז‬d is tin c tio n , c . g . as b etw een extern al and
in t e r n a l lik e n e s s . In t h e N e w T e s t ., fro m t h e in f lu e n c e o f th e G r e e k , th e
D a t . is r e g u la r , a n d e v e n t h e ‘ c a u d a s s i m i le s s c o r p i o n u m ’ o f A p o c . 9. ίο
p r o b a b l} ' = * t a ils lik e those o f s c o r p i o n s ’ , w h i l e th e ‘ c o r n u a d u o s im ilia
A g n i’ of A p o c. 13. 11 c l e a r l y = ‘ h o r n s lik e those o f a L am b ’.
2 B u t J e r o m e w h e n t r a n s la t in g i n d e p e n d e n t ly fro m t h e H e b r . ( D t . 25. 4)
w r o t e ‘ n o n l i g a b is o s b o u is t e r e n tis in a r e a f r u g e s t u a s ’ .
T h e G e n itiv e .
§ 113 . T h e ch ief use o f th e G en itiv e is to q u a lify an oth er

noun, and to denote q u a lity , possession, or con n ex io n . It is
also used as the O b je ct of certain verbs, and o f nouns akin
in m ean in g to a verb.
Adjectival G en itive. W ith this, as in c la s s ic a l L a tin ,
nouns den otin g kinship are g e n e ra lly understood (c f.c H e cto ris
A n d r o m a c h e ’ A e n . 3 .3 1 9 ): so 'Ia c o b u m Z e b e d a e i’ M t. 4 . 2 1 ,
cf. L k . 6. 16, 2 4 . io , Joh. 6. 7 1 , 1 9 . 25 ; in M k . 5 . 35 one M S .
(V ) has ‘ ab a rc h isy n a g o g i ’ ; in I C or. 1. 11 w e h ave ‘ ab his
qui sunt C h loes ’.
Predicative G en itiv e, w ith esse, denotes possession , or
m a r k : so 'q u i sunt C h r is t i’, etc. G al. 3 . 29, 5 . 24, cf. L k .
2. 4 9 ; ‘ est co n su e tu d in is’ G en. 2 9 . 26, H e b r. 1 0 . 25 (bu t
elsew h ere ' est con su etu do ’ I I M a cc. 1 3 . 4, J oh . 1 8 . 39, A c t .
2 5 . j 6 ) ; 'n o n esse g au d ii sed m a e ro r is ’ H e b r . 1 2 . i i ;
‘ uestrum est scire iu d ic iu m ’ M ic. 3 . 1.
G en itive of Q uality : la r g e ly H e b ra is tic (see ab o ve, § 2 0 ).
S o 'p assio n e s ig n o m in ia e ’ R o m . 1 . 26 (πά θ η α τ ι μί α ς )',
‘ iustitiis c a rn is’ H e b r . 9 . 1 0 ; 'iu d ic e s co gitatio n u m in i
q u a r u m ’ J ac. 2 . 4 (δ ι α λ ο γ ι σ μέ πο ν η ρ ω ν )', ‘ sim ilis fo r m a e ’
I P e tr. 3 . 21 ; 'f a ls i nom in is scien tiae ’ I T im . 6. 20.
Epexegetical or defining G en itive, used b y w a y o f A p p o s i
tion, to e x p ress consisting of, or i n : so ' de tem p lo corp oris
s u i ’ Joh. 2 . 21 ; 's ig n u m . . . c ir c u m c is io n is ’ R o m . 4 . 11 ;
' p rim itias S p iritu s 5 R o m . 8. 23, cf. I I C o r. 5 . 5 ; ‘ dom u s
huius h a b ita tio n is’ I I C o r. 5 . 1.
T h is G en itiv e is found w ith nam es o f p la ces, w h ere, in
classica l usage, the seco n d noun w o u ld b e in th e sam e case
as th e fir s t : so ‘ de terra A e g y p t i ’ G en. 2 1 . 21 e t c .; ‘ terram
A e t h io p ia e ’ G en. 2. 1 3 ; ' in m onte C a r m e li5 I K g s . ( I l l
R e g .) 1 8 . 1 9 ; 'in m ontem . . . O liu eti ’ L k . 19 . 29, 3 7 ;
‘ Io rd an is h u m u m ' Jos. 1 5 . 5, cf. Ju d . 7 . 25 (but 4 in Io rd an e
flu m in e ’ is the righ t read in g in M k . 1 . 5 ; also ‘ ab u rbe
R o m a ’ I M acc. 7 . 1, 1 5 . 15).
S o , too, the G en itiv e is used after medius, extremus , etc.,
w h ich in classica l L a t in are treated as sim p le a d je c t iv e s :
so 4de m edio ign is ’ E z e k . 1 . 4 ; ‘ in noctis m ed io ’ E x . 1 2 . 29,
b u t ‘ m ed ia n o c t e ' 1 1 . 4, cf. A c t . 1 6 . 25, 20. 7 ; ‘ ex tre m a
Io rd an is ’ Jos. 1 5 . 5 ; ‘ in e x tre m is m a r is ’ Ps. 1 3 9 . 8 ( 1 3 8 . 9)
etc., but the classical use is also freq u en tly found.
G en itive o f Partition — an A d je c t iv a l G e n itiv e — den o tin g
the w h ole, o f w h ich a p art is m en tioned (the p art b ein g
taken from , or out of, the w h ole). Its use in th e V u lg a t e is
m o stly n o r m a l; after quis (interrog.), nemo, mms, and other
num bers, card in al o r ord in al, after su p erlatives (esp. m ini
mus), after pars, particeps, expers (H e b r. 5 . 13) e t c . : so M t.
1 9 . 16, M k . 1 1 . 2, L k . 1 0 . 36, A c t . 5 . 14, I C o r. 1 5 . 9, E p h .
3 . 8, A p o c . 8. 7.
W ith n e u te r: ‘ nihil . . . o n e ris' A c t . 1 5 . 2 8 ; ‘ nihil . . .
m a li' A c t . 1 6 . 28 ; 4 id . . . tribu latio n is n ostrae ’ I I C or.
4 . 17 ; ‘ quod im possibile erat l e g i s ' R o m . 8. 3 (τ ο α δ ύ ν α τ ο ν
τ ο υ ν ό μο υ ) ; ‘ in incerto d iu itiaru m ' I T im . 6. 17.
In a m ore gen e ral sense = b elo n gin g to, form in g part o f :
‘ oues qu ae p erieru n t dom us I s r a h e l' M t. 1 5 . 2 4 ; ‘ electis
ad u en is d isp e rs io n is' I P et. 1 . 1.
G en itiv e of O rigin . T h e A d je c t iv a l G en itiv e also
ex p resses o rig in ( = arising , springing fro m ), lik e the
G reek .
A rising, springing from \ ‘ iustitiam f id e i’ R o m . 4 . 1 3 ;
‘ consolationem s c rip t u ra ru m ' R o m . 1 5 . 4 ; ‘ p ericu lis flu
m inum . . . latron u m ; I I Cor. 1 1 . 2 6 ; ‘ m aled icto legis ' G a l.
3 . 13 ; ‘ scan d alu m cru cis ' G al. 5 . 11 ; ‘ cru cis C h risti p erse
c u tio n e m ' G al. 6. 12 ; ‘ operis f id e i' etc. I T h ess. 1. 3.
G en itive e x p re ssin g general relation or co n n ex io n , sc a rce ly
fallin g un der a n y p a rticu la r h ead (this is c la s s ic a l) : ‘ tran s

m igratio n e B a b y lo n is ’ M t. 1. i i ; ‘ fam am Iesu ’ (co n ce rn in g
Jesus) M t. 1 4 . 1 ; ‘ b ap tism u m paen iten tiae ’ M k . 1. 4 ;
‘ resurrection em u ita e ’,e tc. J o h . 5 .2 9 ; ‘ d ispersion em g en tiu m ’
(am on g the G entiles) Joh . 7 . 3 5 ; ‘ iustification em u it a e ’
R o m . 5 . 18 ; ‘ a le g e u ir i5 (re la tin g to a h u sban d ) R o m . 7 . 2,
cf. L e v . 7 . i ; ‘ iu n ctu ram su b m in istra tio n is’ E p h . 4 . 1 6 ;
‘ intentator m alorum ’ J ac. 1 . 13 ; ‘ secu n d i locus J (p lace for
a second) H e b r. 8. 7 ; ‘ S p iritu s . . . b lasp h em ia ’ (again st
the Sp irit) M t. 1 2 . 31 ; ‘ residuu m lo cu sta e ’ (w hat the lo cu st
leaves) J o el 1 . 4.
§ 116 . T h e G en itiv e as Object w it h V e r b s sig n ify in g to

remember, to forget , to pity , and w ith N ou n s and A d je c t iv e s
ak in to V e rb s, the referen ce b e in g often to G o d or C h r i s t :
thus ‘ m em orari testam en ti t u i ’ 1 L k . 1 . 72 e t c .; ‘ ut o b ii-
u iscatu r operis u e s t ri’ H e b r. 6. 10 e t c ,; ‘ m iserere m e i ’ P s.
51 (50 ). i and o ft e n ; ‘ au x ilia tu s sum tui ’ Is a . 4 9 . 8 (but
often w ith d a t .) ; ‘ fidem D e i ’ M k . 1 1 . 22 ; 1 o ratio n e D e i ’
L k . 6. 1 2 ; ‘ aem u latio n em D e i ’ (zeal for G o d) R o m . 10. 2 ;
‘ o b sequ iu m C h r is t i5 (obedien ce to Christ) I I C or. 1 0 . 5 2 ;
‘ con scien tiam D e i ’ I Pet. 2 . 1 9 ; ‘ zelu s dom us t u a e ’ J o h .
2 . 17 ; ‘ in benefacto hom inis infirm i ’ A c t. 4 . 9 ; ‘ religio n e
an gelo ru m ’ C o i. 2. 18 (cf. 3 . 5 ) ; ‘ in pro u o catio n em carita tis
et bon orum o p eru m ’ (to p ro v o k e unto love, etc.) H e b r .
10. 24 ; ‘ m em oriam uestri facio ’ R o m . 1 . 9 ; ‘ m ei m em ores
e s t is ’ I C o r. 1 1 . 2 and o fte n ; ‘ plen us d ie r u m ’ G en . 2 5 . 8
and often. S o m etim es w e have a succession of G e n it iv e s :
‘ q u o m o d o ecclesiae D e i d iligen tiam h a b e b it ’ I T im . 3 . 5 ;
1 M e m in i, r e c o r d o r , r e m in is c o r , o b li u i s c o r , a r e o c c a s io n a l ly f o llo w e d b y
t h e A c c u s . ; s e e E c c lu s . 41. 5, Isa . 4G. 8, P s. 42. 4 ( 41. 5 ) , I I C o r . 7. 15,
Job 28. 4 e tc. .
2 D e is s m a n n c a l ls t h is th e ( m y s t ic g e n i t i v e ’, w h e r e 1o f C h r i s t ’ a lm o s t
= ‘ in C h r i s t J ; s e e P lu m m e r in Ini. Crit. Com m.. I I T h e s s ., p . 2 77 a n d n .
‘ a d inlum inationem scien tiae claritatis D e i ’ I I C o r. 4 . 6 ;
‘ O altitu d o d iu itiaru m sap ien tiae et scien tiae D e i 5 R o m .
1L 33\ .
Genitive Absolute : see above, § 44.
T h e A b la tiv e «
§ 115. T h e A b la t iv e exp resses circu m stan ces w h ich
m o d ify P red icatio n , su ch as cause, instrum ent, m anner,
q u a lity , p rice, m atter, respect, tim e, p la ce, co m p ariso n ; it is
also the case o f sep aration . T h e different d ivisio n s often
run into one another, v a ry in g a cco rd in g to the N o u n and
th e w ord (verb, ad je ctiv e, or a d verb ) with w h ich it is used.
E x a m p le s a r e : ‫־‬
A b la t iv e o f Cause : ‘ non h aesitau it diffidentia sed con
fortatus est fide ' R o m . 4 . 20 (G k . τ η α πι σ τ ί α . . . τ η πί σ τ ε ι ).
Instrum ent : ‘ com bu ret i g n i ’ M t. 3 . 12 ; ‘ interficere
g la d io , fam e, et m orte ’ A p o c . 6. 8.
M anner and Means', ‘ g ra tia estis s a lu a t i' E p h . 2 . 8 ;
‘ u ocauit nos p ro p ria g lo ria et u irtu te ' I I Pet. 1 . 3 ; ‘ p ro
p osito cordis p erm an ere in D o m in o ' A c t . 11 . 23 ; ‘ re u elata
facie g lo ria m D o m in i s p e c u la n t e s ’ I I C o r. 3 . 1 8 ; ‘ n atu ra
filii ir a e ' E p h . 2 . 3 ; ‘ qu is m ilitat suis s t ip e n d iis ? ’ I C o r.
9. 7 ( = con dition , ‘ at his ow n c o s t ').
QiLality, w ith ep ith et: ‘ b eati m un do c o r d e ' M t. 5 . 8.
Respect ( = p la ce w h e r e ; often fig u r a t iv e ly ): ‘ infirm us
p e d ib u s ' A c t . 14 . 7 ; ‘ pau p eres sp iritu ’ M t. 5 . 3, cf. I C o r.
7 . 34, 1 4 . 2 0 ; ‘ duri ceru ice et in circu m cisi c o r d ib u s ' A c t .
7 . 5 1 ; ‘ prurientes a u r ib u s ' I I T im . 4 . 3 ; ‘ d u p le x a n im o '
J ac. 1 . 8, cf. 4 . 8 ; ‘ num ero qu asi qu in qu e m ilia ’ Joh. 6. 10.
P rice : ‘ plus quam trecen tis d e n a r iis ' M k. 1 4 . 5, cf. Io h . 12 .
5 ; ‘ uen undari m ulto ' M t. 2 6 . 9 ; ‘ m u lta sum m a d u ita te m
h anc con secutus s u m ' A c t . 2 2 « 28 (G k . πο λ λ ο υ κ ε φ α λ α ί ο υ ) ‫־‬
Time (in clu d in g not o n ly when, but also how long) : thus
o f point o f tim e, 4n o c t e ’, ‘ qu arta uigilia, n octis ’, etc. G en .

1 4 . 15, M t. 2 . 14, M t. 1 4 . 25, L k . 12. 38 e t c . ; o f duration,
4seru ieru n tqu e ei octo an n is ’ Jud. 3 . 8, cf. G en. 7 . 4, 12,17 ;
4cum ieiunasset q u a d ra g in ta d ieb u s etc. M t. 4 . 2 e t c . ;
‘ m ulto tem p o re ’ D t. 4 . 40 ; 4m ultis tem p o rib u s ’ L k . 20. 9 ;
4m ysterii te m p o rib u s aeternis t a c it i’ R o m . 1 6 . 2 5 ; in is
som etim es a d d e d to e x p la in the case, 4in anno prim o ’, 4in
illis diebus e t c . , c in h a c d ie et in h o c tem p o re ’ I K g s . ( I l l
R e g .) 1 4 . 14 ( = even now ).
Comparison (a) — than : 4 m ultis p asseribu s m eliores estis ’
M t. 1 0 .3 1 ; 4 p rior m e erat ’ Joh. 1 .1 5 ; 4 p lus S alo m o n e ’ L k .
1 1 . 31, cf. 32. F o r the H e b ra ism w ith ab see abo ve, § 2 2 .
( b) = by (m easu re o f co m p ariso n ): £ m ulto £eo ’ , 4qu an to ’ ,
etc., £d ecem p artib u s m aio r ego s u m ’ I I S a m . ( I I R e g .)
1 9 . 43 ; also w ith o u t com p arative, 4altam q u attu o r d igitis ‫ג‬
E x . 2 5 . 25 ; c ciu itas m a g n a itin ere triu m d ieru m ’ Jon. 3 . 3.
§ 116 . T h e A b la t iv e as Object, w ith V e r b s and A d je c t iv e s
o f p le n ty and w an t, and w ith V e r b s e x p re ssin g use (from ),
or en jo ym en t (of), as friti, f m g i, potiri, uti, uesci. In th ese
cases th e A b la t iv e ex p resses the m atter or th in g {with
zvhat ? ) : so 4esurientes in p leu it bonis ’ L k . 1 . 53 ; 4 rep leti
fructibus ’ P h il. 1 . 1 1 ; 4susten tate eum p an e tribu latio n is ’
I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 22. 27 ; 4s i . . . c u lp a u acasset ’ H e b r. 8. 7 ;
4egem u s t e s t ib u s ’ M t. 2 6 . 6 5 ; 4qu i cu ra in d ig e b a n t’ L k .
9. i i ; 4D o m in u s his opus h a b e t ’ M t. 2 1 . 3.1
' I t also ex p re sse s th e p la ce (where and fro m zvhicJt); th is

1 T h e s e la s t t h r e e a r e r e n d e r i n g s o f th e G r e e k χρείαν Ζχειν; w e a ls o h a v e
th e G r e e k G e n it i v e , ‘ n u lliu s e g e o ’ , A p o c . 3. 17, cf. I C o r . 12. 24, P s . 16
( 15). 2, a n d o t h e r r e n d e r i n g s , ‘ d e b e r e ’ , M t. 3. 14, ‘ d e s id e r a r e ’ , M k . I t . 63
( c f. ‘ o p eram d e s id e r a r e 7 L k . 19. 31) ‘ n ecesse h a b e r e 5, M t. It. r6
( ‘ n e c e s s a r iu m h a b e r e ’, Lk. 19. 3 4 ), ‘ n e c e s s it a t e m p a t i’, Eph. t. 28,
f n e c e s s e e s t ’, I T h ess. 1. 8, cf. ‘ D o m in o n e c e s s a r iu s e s t ’ (ο K. χ ρ ε ί α ν
α ύ τ ο υ ε χ ε ι ), M k. 11. 3 i a ls o 4 q u ib u s o p u s sit u o b is ’ (ώ ν χ ρ ε ί α ν ε χ ε τ ε ),
M t. 6. 8, ‘ n o n o p o r t e t n o s (ο υ χ ρ ε ί α ν 6χ ο με ν 7)με ί ς ) . . . re sp o n d ere t ib i’ ,
D an. 3. 16.
20 42 Ο
A b la t iv e is freq u en tly su p p lem en ted b y preposition s,
e sp e cially before in d eclin ab le p lace-n o u n s, e. g. ‘ in B e t h a n ia ’ ;
‘ in B e th le h e m ’ ; ‘ de B eth el *; ‘ e x N in iu e ’ ; ‘ H ie r o s o ly m is J
is found w ith in an d ab, and also w ith o u t p reposition.
T h e Ablative Absolute is lo o s e ly u s e d ; see G raecism s,
§ 52.
I t som etim es follow s the p rin cip a l clause, in w h ich case
it is equ ivalen t to ‘ a n d ’ ; e. g. ‘ p ro fe ctu sq u e est p o p u lu s de
H asero th , fixis tentoriis in d eserto P h a r a n ’ ( = ‘'jo u r n e y e d
. . . an d p itch ed their te n ts ') N u m . 1 2 . 16 ( 13 . 1 in V g . ) ;
‘ quem p ersecu ti com p reh en d eru n t caesis su m m itatib u s
m anuum eius et p e d u m ' ( = th e y pursued after him and
cau g h t him , andcvX off his th u m bs an d his g re a t t o e s ’ ) Jud.
1 . 6 , cf. E stin 9 . 16.
It is used e llip tic a lly : ‘ au d ito qu o d R o m a n i e s s e n t ’ A c t .
16 . 3 8 ; ‘ com p erto quod hom ines essent sine lit t e r is ’ A c t .
4 . 13.
A ls o ir r e g u la r ly : ‘ et seden te L o t ' G en. 1 9 . 1.
§ 117. T he A blative with Prepositions.

A. P r e p o s itio n s ta k in g A b la t iv e o n ly .
A , ab [—from^ on the side of) w ith agen ts, by) : ‘ p ro ice abs
t e ’ M t. 1 8 . 8, 9 ; ‘ alien ati a uita D e i ’ E p h . 4 . 1 8 ;
‘ d eso lati a u obis ’ (α τ τ ο ρ φ α ν ι σ θ ε ν τ ε ς — b e re a v e d o f y o u )
I T h e ss. 2 . 17 ; ‘ p ereg rin am u r a D o m in o ’ (α πό ) I I C o r.
5. 6 ; ‘ d ecid an t a co gitatio n ib u s suis ’ (‘ let th em fall
b y th eir ow n coun sels ’ A . and R .V ., ‘ from their
c o u n s e ls ’ m g.) Ps. 5 . 10 (1 1 ); ‘ u e x a b a n tu r a sp iritibu s
in m u n d is ’ L k . 6. 18 ; ‘ la b ia nostra a nobis s u n t ’ (‘ our
. lip s are our o w n ’ A . and R .V ., ‘ are w ith u s ’ m g., and
‘ n o b iscu m s u n t’ Psalt. iuxta Hebr.) Ps. 12 . 4 ( 1 1 . 5 ) ;
‘ a u o ce e x p ro b a n tis ’ (‘ for the vo ice o f the slan d erer
i. e. arisin g from , b ecau se o f) P s, 4 4 . 16 (4 3 . 17).
absque = (1) sine, ‘ w ith o u t ’ : 4ab sq u e lib e ris', etc., ‘ absqu e

n o x a ’ (gu iltless), ‘ a b sq u e r e tr a c ta tio n e ‫ג‬ (a ssu red ly )
I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 4 . 39.
(2) ‘ b e sid e s', ‘ in ad d itio n t o ’ : 1d u x it u x o re m a b sq u e iis
quas priu s h a b e b a t ‫ י‬G en. 2 8 . 9 ; ‘ n ullus serm onis nostri
testis est a b sq u e D e o ' (‘ but G o d ’ D o u a y ) G en. 3 1 . 50,
cf. Isa. 4 5 . 14, C an t. 4 . 1 ,3 , 6. 6.
(3) ‘ outside o f ’ : ‘ a b sq u e sy n a g o g is facien t u o s ’ (a 7ro-
σ υ ν α γ ω γ ο υ ς τ τ ο ι η σ ο υ σ ι ν υ μα ς ) Joh. 1 6 . 2.
coram = ‘ in the p re sen ce of ‘ before (the face of) ’ : ‘ co ram
m e ’ E x . 2 0 . 3 e t c . ; v e r y frequent in O ld T e s t . ; ‘ b e fo r e '
(as op p o sed to ‘ b e h in d ') Joel 2 . 3.
cum =: ‘ w it h ’, (1) o f a cc o m p a n im e n t: ‘ co n fig ere . . . D a v id
cu m p a r ie t e ' I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 8 . 11 ( = to sm ite D a v id
even to the w all).
(2) but also of m an n er ( h o w ) : ‘ cu m festinatione, la crim is,
im p o sitio n e ',1 etc. T h is A b la t iv e is so m etim es found
in classica l L a tin , as ‘ cu m cru ciatu n e c a r e ', w h ere the
sim p le A b l. w o u ld b e an epithet, as ‘ o m n ib u s cru ciatib u s
aliq u em a d f ic e r e '.
de — ‘ from ‘ c o n c e r n in g ', ‘ o f ’ (p a r t itiv e ):
(1) ‘ f r o m ’ : ‘ d e facie tem p li (from th e forefront of the
tem p le) et d e \ etc. I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 1 6 . 1 4 ; ‘ non de
errore neque de in m u n d itia ' I T h ess. 2 . 3; ‘ d e c a m e m etet
c o rru p tio n e m ' G a l. 6. 8 ; ‘ con u alu eru n t d e infirm itate ‫י‬
H eb r. 11. 34) cf· 35 ; ‘ m ensus est d u ita te m d e h aru n d in e ’
(w ith the reed) A p o c . 2 1 . 16 ; ‘ de u ob is n e g o t ia b u n t u r ’
(m a k e m erch an d ise o f y o u ) I I Pet. 2 . 3.
(2) ‘ con cern in g ’ : ‘ de b o n o op ere ‫״‬. . . d e b lasp h e m ia 'J o h .
1 C f. E . W . W atso n , The Lan guage and Style o f St. Cxjprian, p . 2 45 n.

(in Studia Bibi, et Eccles., iv , O x fo r d 1 8 96). '
O 2
!‫ס ס‬ Syntactical Peculiarities
10. 33, cf. M t. 20. 24, R o m . 8. 3 , 1 C or. 6. 2, A p o c . 1 9 . 2 ;
‘ de c e t e r o 1 (fin ally) I I C o r. 1 3 . 11.
(3) p artitive (lead in g up to Ital. ‘ d i ', F r . ‘ de ’) : 1 effundam
d e spiritu m e o ' A c t . 2. 17 ; £de uno pan e p a rticip am u r ‫י‬
I C o r. 1 0 .17 ; ‘ d e C aesaris dom o ’ P h il. 4 . 22 ; ‘ d e n octe
su n -e x it1 (rose e a rly ) I S a m . (I R e g .) 15. 1 2 ; ‘ onus
duorum bu rd on u m de t e r r a ' (of earth) I I K g s . ( I V R e g .)
5.1 7 ; ‘ d a b o de s y n a g o g a S a t a n a e ' (men o f the sy n a g o g u e
o f Satan ; a H e b ra ism ) A p o c . 3 . 9.
desuper = ‘ from o f f ' : ‘ desu p er tu n ic a ' M ic. 2 . 8 ; ‘ d esu p er
eis . . . d. o s s ib u s ’ 3 . 2 ; ‘ castra p o su it desu p er B e th -
bessen ' (over ab o v e) I M acc. 9 . 64, cf. E z e k . 10. 4 ; e lse
w h ere in th e V u lg a te it is a d v e rb ia l, see § 9 5 .
e, ex = ‘ out o f ’, ‘ f r o m ’. A s w ith α τ τ ο and eK, it is often
h ard to see a n y distinction betw een th e use o f de and of
ex; e. g. ‘ os e x o ssib u s m eis et caro de carn e m e a ' G en.
2 . 23. U s u a lly it is em p lo y ed o f th e o rigin (sp rin gin g
from , or out o f), or o f position (from , o r on ; = ab).
(1) ‘ a risin g f r o m ': ‘ e x le g e , fide, consensu, a eq u alitate ,
tristitia, n e ce ss ita te ', etc. I I C o r. 9 . 7 ; ‘ e co n tra rio '
I P et. 3 . 9 ; 1 e x a b u n d a n ti' I I C o r. 9 . 1 ; c B a la a m e x
B o s o r ' (τ ο υ = son of) I I P e t. 2 . 15·
(2) o f p o sitio n : ‘ e x a d u e rs o ' (in front) I I S a m . ( I I R e g .)
10. 9, cf. I S a m . (I R e g .) 2 6 . 1 ; c e x latere altaris ad
a q u ilo n e m ' (on the N . side o f th e altar) I I K g s . ( I V
R e g .) 1 6 . 34.
(3) T h e unusual ‘ conuentione facta . . . e x (ek) den ario
d iu r n o ' M t. 2 0 . 2 should be noticed.
prae = ‘ in co m p ariso n w ith ’ ; and, w ith n egativ e, ‘ f o r ',
‘ ow ing to ' : so ‘ differentius p rae illis n o m e n ' H e b r. 1. 4,
cf. 3 . 3, Ps. 45 (4 4 ). 3, I I C o r. 1 2 . 13 ; c p rae {α τ τ ο ) g a u d io
non a p eru it ia n u a m ' A c t . 12 . 14.
The Simple Sentence ι ο ί
pro — (1) ‘ in front o f ’ : ‘ pro tr ib u n a li' (67τ ΐ τ ο υ β ή μα τ ο ς )

A c t . 2 5 . 6, cf. M t. 2 7 . 19.
(2) c as V for ‫ י‬: ‘ pro u elam in e ' I C o r. 11.15 ; ‘ pro in u ic e m '
I C o r. 1 2 . 25 ; ‘ p ro b o n a u o lu n ta te ' P h il. 2 . 13.
(3) ‘ instead o f ‫ י‬: ‘ pro te ' P h ilem . 13 etc.
sine = ‘ w it h o u t J: ‘ sine o ffe n d ic u lo ’ A c t . 24. 16; ‘ sine
s u m p t u ’ I C o r. 9 . 18 etc.
B. P r e p o s itio n s ta k in g A c c u s a t iv e a n d A b la t iv e .
In w ith A b l. = ‘ !*est i n ' o r Lon ' : co n stan tly w ith D e o ,
D o m in o . Ch risto, Iesu , etc.
(1) of c o n d itio n : ‘ in stu p o re m e n tis' A c t . 22. 1 7 ; O n
o b sequ io ' I I . K g s . ( I V R e g .) 5 . 2, ‘ in m e ’ (in m y case)
G al. 1. 2 4 ; ‘ in p raeu aricatio n e ’ I T im . 2 . 1 4 ; ‘ in s e r
m one ad u latio n is ’ (found in, using) I T h ess. 2. 5 ; ‘ in
h o c ’ (on this con dition) I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 1 . 2, cf. A c t .
2 1 . 24 ‘ in illis ' (for th em R .V .), I T im . 4 . 15, 16.
(2) of tim e and p lace, see a b o v e , § 1 1 6 : also ‘ in b reu i ‫י‬
E p h . 3 . 3 ; { in c ir c u it u ' E x o d . 3 8 . 31 etc.
(3) instrum ental, see H eb raism s, § 22 : so ‘ in p y t h o n e 5
I S a m . (I R e g .) 2 8 . 8.
(4) = ‘ in ad ditio n to ’ : ‘ in his om n ibus ’ ( h πα σ ι τ ο υ τ ο ι ς )
L k . 16 . 26.
(5) o f m a n n e r: ‘ in a b s c o n d it o ’ (in s e c re t ; ε ν 75‫ ־‬κ ρ υ πτ ά )
M t. β . 18 ; ‘ in o c c u lt o ' (secretly ; kv κ ρ υ πτ ά ) Joh. 7 . 4,
1 8 . 20.
(6) constructio praegnans = ‘ into ‫י‬, ‘ so as to b e in J: ‘ in
p arap sid e ’ M t. 2 6 . 23 ; ‘ in m onum ento ’ L k . 2 3 . 53 ; ‘ in
d ie ir a e ’ R o m . 2. 5 ; several uses o f ‘ in ’ o cc u r in A c t .
1 7 .3 1 .
(7) w ro n g ly for ε ι ς , e s p e c ia lly in relation to b a p t is m ; so
M t. 2 8 . 19, A c t . 1 9 . 3, 4 e t c .; also ‘ in in fe rn o ’ A c t .
2. 27, 31 (eh α δ ο υ ), q u o tin g Ps. 16 ( 15 ). 10 (w h ere the
L X X is ε ι ς α δ η ν ) ; ‘ in do m o ’ ( 67π rov olKov) L k . 1. 33 ;
‘ in m anu factis s a n c t is ’ (m anufacta S a n c ta S O ) H e b r.
9. 24 (eh χ ε ι ρ ο πο ί η τ α a y id).
(8) co n stan tly for ε πί w ith D a t., not o n ly w ith the id ea o f
c rest in ’ or * on ’, b u t also as = ‘ in t h a t ’ w h en im p ly in g
cause ; thus ε φ * ω = ‘ in q u o ’ not o n ly M k . 2 . 4, L k . 5 .
25 (‘ in quo iaceb at ’), A c t . 7 . 33 (‘ in qu o stas ’ ), b u t also
R o m . 5. 12 (‘ in q u o om nes p e c ca u e r u n t’ == ε φ ’ <2 πα ν τ ε ς
η μα ρ τ ο ν ,.ί or that, b ecau se, all m en sinned) ; 1 in I I C o r.
5. 4 ε φ ’ ω ob θ ε λ ο με ν ε κ δ ύ σ α σ θ α ι (not for that, b ecau se,
w e w o u ld be u n clo th ed), th ou gh = ‘ ee‫ ׳‬quod uolum us
e x p o lia r i’ in the V u lg a te , is rendered 1in quo ’ etc., in H
d e r H il. A u g .
sub w ith A b l. = ‘ under ’ , ‘ a b o u t ’, ‘ in th e tim e o f ’ : ‘ sub
obtentu ’ M k. 1 2 . 4 0 ; ‘ sub S tep h an o ’ (67π Σ τ ε φ τ ώ )
A c t . 1 1 . 1 9 ; ‘ sub A b ia t h a r p r in c ip e ’ (ε πί w ith gen .),
M k. 2 . 26, cf. L k . 3 . I .
after verbs of m otion : ‘ d ed it . . . sub m anu ’ B a r. 2 . 4 ;
‘ e g o sub n u lliu s red ig a r p o te s ta te ’ I C o r. 6. 12, cf.
I I M acc. 3 . 6.
super w ith A b l. = ‘ ab o u t ’, ‘!con cern in g’, ‘ b ecau se o f ’ : ‘ super
m iserico rdia tua et u eritate ’ Ps. 1 15 . 1 ( 1 1 3 . 2 see.) Jer.
3 1 . 12.
after verbs e x p re ssin g em otion (anger, p it y ,e t c .) : 1irasceris
super h ac r e ’ I I S a m . (II R e g .) 1 9 . 4 2 ; ‘ m isertus est
D o m in u s su per afflictio n e ’ I I S a m . ( II R e g .) 2 4 . 16, cf.
A m . 7 . 3, 6, Jon. 4 . 2, 6, 9, Jer. 3 1 . 15.
subter not found w ith A b l. in the V u lg a te .
1 T h e W e s t e r n t h e o lo g ia n s t o o k ‘ in q u o ’ m o re l i t e r a l l y , a n d th e V u lg a t e
fo rm o f R o m . 5. 12 w a s n ot w it h o u t its in f lu e n c e on t h e d o c t r i n e o f O r i g i n a l
S in .
V II
SYN TACTICAL PECULIARITIES
{continued)
S Y N T A X OF T H E V E R B
In d ic a tiv e M ood.
§ 118. Indefinite subject. T h e 3rd Perso n S in g u la r is

used in d efin itely, in th e sense o f ‘ o n e ’, ‘ t h e y ' ; see
Hebraisms, § 30 . S o ‘ c a n e t J {σ α λ πί σ ε ι ) = he (the tru m
peter) shall sound, I C o r. 1 5 . 52 ; also ‘ a i t ,, ‘ dicit ‘ in q u it 1
= he (or th e S crip tu re ) saith (frequent in the E p p .).
§ 1 1 9 . Present tense. T h e H isto ric Presen t is co n

stan tly em p lo y ed , eith er in d ep en d e n tly or, m ore freq u en tly,
in im itation of th e g ra p h ic G re e k ; thus in M k. 5 . 14 -1 6
th e V u lg a te faith fu lly follow s the v a r y in g tenses o f th e
o rigin al, * p asceban t, ueniunt . . . u id en t, u e x a b a tu r . . .
tim u e ru n t,, cf. A c t . 1 2 . 9. T h e Presen t is som etim es
g r a p h ic a lly used for the F u tu re, so ‘ cred im u s ’ Mt. 2 7 . 42,
‘ m o ritu r' J o h . 2 1 . 2 3 ; also for the P a st, w ith G a m ', see
Jer. 2 0 . 8, M k . 8. 2, Joh. 5 . 6 ‘ m u ltu m iam tem pus h abet
(haberet S & j ‫ג‬, cf. I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 4 . 2.
§ 120. Past imperfect . T h e V u lg a te is far stricter than

our own A u t h . V ersio n in th e use of th e P a st Im p e rfect to
den ote (1) con tin ued, (2) rep eated , (3) con tem p lated ,
(4) poten tial, action.
S o (1) D istin gu ish ed from the A o ris t, c accesseru n t et
m in istra b a n t’ M t. 4 .11 ‘ e x ie ru n t et uen ieban t ’ Joh. 4 . 30 etc.
(2) R e p e a te d or c u sto m a ry a c t io n : ‘ d im ittere so le b a t ’
(α πε λ υ ε ν ) M k . 15 . 6 ; ‘ q u em p o rtab an t cotid ie ’ A c t . 3 . 2.
(3) C o n ative Im p e rfect ( = so u gh t to ,b e g a n to) : £ Io h a n -
nes . . . p ro h ib eb at eum ’ M t. 3 . 14, ‘ u o cab an t eum Z a ch a -
r ia m ’ L k . 1. 59, ‘ ru m p eb a tu r rete 5 (δ ι ε ρ ρ η γ ^τ ο ) 5 . ό .
(4) W ith verb s o f w is h in g : ‘ u o leb am et ipse h om in em
au d ire ’ A c t . 2 5 . 22 ; 4o p tab am . . . ip se ego an athem a e sse ’
(η ύ γ ο μη ν ) R o m . 9 . 3.
§ 121. Future. H e re , too, the V u lg a te c lo s e ly fo llo w s

the G reek .
(1) C o m m an d and p ro h ib itio n : ‘ u o cab is nom en eius
Iesum ’ M t. 1 . 21, cf. L k . 1 . 13, 31 ; ‘ non eritis ut h y p o
critae * M t. 6. 5.
(2) S tro n g n e g a tio n : = the G re e k ob μη with (a) F u tu re
In d ie., (b) S u b ju n ct. (the re ad in g in the G re e k is so m etim es
u ncertain or a m b igu o u s, as in πι σ τ ε ύ σ ω Joh. 2 0 . 25)·
(d) ‘ non erit tibi h o c 5 (ob μη ε σ τ α ι σ ο ι 7 0 ‫־‬097‫ )־‬M t. 1 6 . 22,
‘ non te n egab o * (ob μη σ ε α πα ρ ν η σ ο μα ι ) M k . 1 4 . 31 ; 4 non
s it ie t ’ (ob μη δ ι ψ η σ ε ι ) Joh. 4 . 13·
(b) ‘ non intrabitis (ob μη ε ι σ ε λ θ η τ ε ) M t. 5 . 20, ‘ iam non
b ib a m ’ (ob μη πι ω ) M k . 1 4 . 25, 4nihil u obis nocebit ’ (ob μη
α δ ι ^σ η ) L k .10 . 19.
T h e L a tin , h o w ever, m isses so m eth in g o f th e stren gth of
the G reek ; the E n g lis h A .V . h as so u gh t to rep ro d u ce it b y
‘ in no case ’, ‘ in no w ise ’.
(3) P e rip h rastic F u tu r e . T h e G re e k με λ λ ε ι ν (to b e ab o u t
to), w h ich o ccu rs freq u en tly in the N e w T e st., is c a r e fu lly
rendered b y the F u tu re P a rtic ip le w ith esse, or (tw ice) b y
ficturum est tet, and (once) b y th e G eru n d A d j., ‘ filius
h om inis trad en d u s est ’ M t. 1 7 . 22 ; once th e stro n g future
is used, ‘ m oriem ini ’ R o m 8. 1 3 ; in A c t . 2 7 . 10 w e have
Syntax of the Verb 105
( u id eo quon iam . . . in cip it esse n au igatio J = ‘ is b egin n in g

(is about) to be ’ (θ ε ω ρ ω . . . με λ λ ε ι μ ε σ ε σ θ α ι )} T h e V u l
g a te is free from the am b igu o u s ‘ w i l l 5 b y w h ich the A .V .
som etim es ren ders the G re e k θ ε λ ε ι ν . T h e r e is no a m b ig u ity
abo u t ‘ uultis f a c e r e ’ Joh, 8. 44, cf. 7 . 17, ‘ n ubere u o lu n t ’
I T im . 5 . 11, 4 uolunt d is c e r e ’ I Cor. 1 4 . 35.
§ 122. Perfect . T h e L a tin P erfect in clu d es both co m

p leted and m o m en tary action in th e p ast, an sw erin g to
both P erfect an d A o ris t in the G re e k . T h e confusion
betw een these tw o tenses in the A .V . m a y be p a r t ly du e to
rem in iscen ce o f the V u lg a t e am on gst th e tran slators. T h e
R .V . m a y h ave gon e to ex cess in its correctio n o f this con
fusion, but the distin ction itself is o f the utm ost im p o rtan ce.
§ 123. P ast Perfect. T h is tense is not o f v e r y frequen t

o c c u r r e n c e : ‘ d ecreu eram ’ N um . 2 4 . 11, ‘ fun data e r a t 1 M t.
7 . 25, ‘ p e r ie r a t ’, 18 . 11 ; in A c t . 1 4 . 23 the P e rfe ct ‘ cred i-
d e r u n t ‫ י‬stands for the P ast Perfect in the G reek (πε πι σ τ ε υ -
κ ε ι σ α ν ). T h e P a st P e rfe ct is found, b u t o n ly in the O ld
T e st., in con jun ction w ith iamque, e. g. ‘ iam q u e ad u en erat
u ig ilia m atutin a * E x . 1 4 . 24, cf. 1 9 . 16, etc.
§ 124. Future Perfect . M ost frequen t in th e d ep en d en t

clau se of a c o m p le x sen ten ce, w hen th e verb o f the m ain
clau se is in the F u tu re, or in th e Im p e ra tiv e : ‘ h od ie, si
uocem eius audieritis, nolite ‫ = י‬if y e shall (not will) h ear
his vo ice, etc. Ps. 95 (94 ). 8 = H e b r. 3 . 7.
1 C o m p are v. 2 o f th e sa m e c h a p te r ‘ a sc e n d e n te s au tem n au em h a d ru -
m e t in a m i n c ip ie n t e m n a u ig a r e 1 (67nßavres δ 6 ■ πλ ο ί ω Ά ΰ ρ α μυ τ τ η ν ω μέ λ λ ο ν τ ι
‫ ז ד‬λ α ν ) ; t h e r e c a n b e n o d o u b t th a t ‘ in c ip ie n t e m ’ (n o t ‘ - t e s J) is t h e r ig h t r e a d
i n g - t h e s h ip w a s a b o u t to s a il. O t h e r in s t a n c e s a r c ‘ in c ip ie b a t e n im
m o r i 7, J o h . 4. 477 ‘ in c ip ie n t e s in t r o ir e in t e m p lu m 7, A c t . 3. 3, cf. 19. 2‫} ך‬
23. 27, 27. 30, 3 3 , J a c . 2. 12 ; n o t ic e e s p e c i a lly ‘ in c ip ia m t e e u o m e r e e x o r e
m eo7 (μέ λ λ ω σ ζ έ μέ σ α ι ttc τ ο υ σ τ ό μα τ ό ς μο υ ), A poc. 3. 16 — I a m g o in g
to s p u e t h e e out o f m y m o u th .
2642 P
T h e E n g lish idiom often requires th e F u tu re P e rfect to
b e translated b y the P r e s e n t: ‘ qu o d fecero s e c ta m in i’ (as
I do so sh all y e do) Jud. 7 . 1 7 ; ‘ nihil m e h abere puto
qu am d iu u id ero J (I think I have n o th in g so lon g as I see)
E sth . 5 . 13 etc.
T h e F u tu re P e rfe ct is som etim es used as an Im p e r a t iv e :
/ uos ipsi u id e r it is ’ (see to it y o u rselves) A c t . 1 8 . 15.
Im p e r a t iv e M o o d .
§ 125. A proh ibition is u su a lly e x p re sse d b y noli w ith

in fin .: ‘ nolite iu d icare ’ M t. 7 . 1, ‘ nolite tim ere ’ Joh. 6. 20.
T h e d istin ction draw n in G re e k betw een a con tin ued and
a m o m en tary a ctio n — the Presen t Im p e ra tiv e or A o r is t
S u b ju n ctiv e — cannot b e m aintained in L a tin .
S u b ju n c t iv e M ood.
§ 126. In sim p le sentences th is e x p re sse s :

(1) In 1st or 3rd persons a H o r ta t o r y Im p e r a t iv e : ‘ non
scindam us eam sed sortiam ini de illa ’ Joh. 1 9 . 24 ; ‘ p acem
h abeam u s ad D e u m ’ (ε χ ω με ή R o m . 5 . 1, cf. I C o r. 1 5 .
32 etc.
(2) D o u b t or u n c e rta in ty : as in ‘ q u are ieiunem c (w h y
should I fast?) I I S a m . ( II R e g .) 12. 23 ; ‘ qu is au d eat m o r i’
(one m igh t p o ssib ly d are to die) R o m . 5 . 7.
B u t in the V u lg a te this idea seem s u s u a lly t o b e e x p re sse d
in other w ays, g e n e ra lly b y the F u tu re In d ica tiv e , e. g. ‘ q u id
faciem us ? ’ A c t . 2. 37.1
(3) A w ish ( = th e G reek O p t a t iv e ) : * non illis rep u tetu r ’
I I T im . 4 . 16, cf. A c t . 7 . 60, ‘ e g o te fruar in D o m in o ’
P h ilem . 20, cf. I I Pet. 1 . 2. T h e G re e k O p tativ e w ith av
1 B a t h e re , a s in A c t . 4. 16, th e G r e e k t e x t v a r i e s b e t w e e n πο ι ή σ ω μα ι ;
f t A B , e tc , a n d πο ι ή σ ο με D r e ll.
Syntax o f the Verb 107
is som etim es translated b y the In d icativ e, ‘ et qu o m o d o

p ossu m ? * ( = πω ς γ α ρ civ δ υ ν α ί μη ν ) A c t . 8. 31, ‘ opto a p u d
D e u m ’ ( = ε υ ξ α ι μη ν α ν τ ω Θ ε φ ) A c t . 26 . 29 6I co u ld w ish
to G od ’.
(4) A p ro h ib itio n . Ne w ith th e P e r fe c t S u b ju n c t i v e ;
c n e c re d id e r is i l l i s ’ (d o n o t b e lie v e th em ) A c t . 2 3 . 21, cf.
1 6 . 28.
(5) E llip t ic a l: ‘ non q u o d e x c id e rit u erbu m D e i ’ R o m . 9 .6 .
In fin itiv e M ood.
§ 127. The in fin itiv e is a V e r b a l N o u n , a n d sta n d s as

th e S u b je c t o r O b je c t (u s u a lly th e la tte r) o f th e se n ten ce.
T h e o th e r o b liq u e C a s e s , w h ic h in G r e e k a r e e x p r e s s e d b y
a P re p o s itio n , plus th e A r t ic l e , plus th e In f in it iv e ,1 a re e x
p re s s e d in L a t in b y th e G e r u n d o r G e ru n d A d je c t i v e w ith
a P re p o sitio n , o r b y ttt w ith th e S u b ju n c t iv e . S t i l l m o re
fr e q u e n t ly th e S u b je c t o r O b je c t is e x p r e s s e d b y th e o r d in a r y
c o n stru ctio n o f th e A c c u s a t iv e w ith In fin itiv e , u sed w ith
v e r b s w h ic h c o u ld n o t t a k e an In fin itiv e a lo n e .
(1) In fin itiv e a s S u b j e c t : ‘ bonum tib i e st . . . i n g r e d i ’
M t. 1 8 . 8, 1u e lle a d ia c e t m ih i ’ R o m . 7 . 18} cf. I I C o r . I . 8,
G a l. 6. 14, P h il. 1 . 21, 24.
(2) In fin itiv e in A p p o s it io n to th e S u b je c t : * h o c ip su m ,
s e c u n d u m D e u m c o n tr is ta r i u o s ’ I I C o r . 7 . r 1, cf. E p h . 3 . 8 ,
P h il. 1 . 22.
(3) In fin itive as O b je c t : ‘ perficere . . . non in u e n io ’
R o m . 7 . 18.
(4) In fin itiv e w ith D o u b le O b j e c t : c fe c e rim u s h u n c a m
b u la r e ’ A c t . 3 . 12. 1
1 S e e u n d e r ‘ A r t i c u la r I n f i n i t i v e ’ in a n y G r a m m a r o f N e w T e s t a m e n t
G reek.
!0 8 Syntactical Peculiarities
(5) In fin itiv e w ith V e r b s o f p re v e n tin g (in ste a d o f ne w ith
th e S u b ju n c t iv e ) : ‘ im p e d ie b a r . . . u e n ir e ’ R o m . 1 5 . 22,
‘ p ro h ib e re n tu r p e r m a n e r e 5 H e b r . 7 . 23, cf. I T im . 4 . 3.
(6) In fin itiv e w ith V e r b s o f h o p in g , fe a rin g , p r o m is in g ,
s w e a rin g (in ste a d o f A c c u s a t iv e a n d In fin itiv e , o r ut or ne
w ith th e S u b ju n c t i v e ) : ‘ sp e ra tis a c c i p e r e ‫ ג‬L k . 6. 34, cf. 2 3 .
8, A c t . 2 6 . 7, I I I J o h . 14 etc. (b u t s u ch V e r b s a r e a ls o u sed
w ith quod , quia , a n d th e S u b ju n c t iv e , R o m . 1 5 . 24 etc.).
For timeo w ith In fin itiv e , see G e n . 1 9 . 3 0 , M t. 1 . 20 e tc. ;
b u t th is is a lso c la s s ic a l. Polliceor is fo u n d w ith s im p le
In fin itiv e in M t. 1 4 . 7 (‘ p o llic itu s est ei d a r e 5), b u t a lso w ith
tct an d S u b ju n c tiv e , ‘ p o llic itu s su m ut n o n f a c e r e m ' J u d .
2 . i , cf. I I C h ro n . 6 .1 , 20, a n d m o re o ften a b s o lu t e ly o r w ith
A c c u s a t iv e o f th e R e la t iv e . S im ila r is th e u se o f prom itto ,
se e T o b . 7 .1 0 , J u d ith 9 . 11, I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 8. 19, I I C h ro n .
2 1 . 7, Iuro is fo un d w it h th e In fin itiv e in H e b r . 3 .1 8 (iu ra u it
non in tro ire), b u t a ls o w ith ut, 116, quad, a n d th e S u b ju n c tiv e ,
o r a b s o lu t e ly o r w ith A c c u s a t iv e o f th e R e la t iv e .
(7) The In fin itiv e o f purpose , an d th e In fin itiv e a fter
A d je c t iv e s , have been n o ted under G r a e c is m s (see
a b o v e § 5 0 ) sin ce, t h o u g h th e y o c c u r in L a t in p o e t r y , t h e y
a r e r e p la c e d in c la s s ic a l p ro se b y o th e r c o n s tr u c tio n s , a n d
th e ir u se in th e V u lg a t e is m a in ly d u e to th e o r ig in a l G r e e k .
(8) S o is th e use o f th e In fin itiv e in an Im perative sen se,
e. g . ‘ g a u d e r e c u m g a u d e n tib u s , flere c u m f le n t ib u s 5 R o m .
1 2 . 15,1 th o u g h in P h il. 3 . 16, τ £> α ύ τ ω σ τ ο ι χ ε ι υ is ren d ere d
* in e a d e m p e rm a n e a m u s r e g u la \
T h e P a r t ic ip l e .
§ 128. (1) T h e P a r t ic ip le is u se d , in ste a d o f th e In fin i

tiv e , a fte r V e r b s d e n o t in g c o m p le tio n , a n d V e r b s o f se n se .
1 S e e B la s s , < G r a m m a r o f ·N .T . G r e e k ’ ( E n g l . T r a n s l.) , § GO. 1.
Syntax o f the Verb 109
T h is is p a r t ly a G r a e c is m (see a b o v e § 5 1 ) ; b u t it is a ls o
found in L a t in p o e t r y , a s 4 m e d io s se n sit d e la p s u s in h o s t e s '
A e n . ii. 377. T h u s w e h a v e 4 ne u id e a r is h o m in ib u s ie iu -
n an s ( ν η σ τ ε υ ω ν ) M t. 6. 17, 4in u en ta e st . . . h a b e n s ( ε χ ο υ σ α )
M t. 1 . 18.
(2) T h e P a r t ic ip le as a P r e d ic a t iv e A d je c t iv e o ccu rs,
e s p e c ia lly a fte r V e r b s o f p e r c e iv in g : th u s ‘ a u d iu im u s e u m
d ic e n t e m ’ , etc. fre q u e n t ly ; £ u id e r u n t b a r b a r i p e n d e n te m
b e s t ia m ' A c t . 2 8 . 4> ‘ u id e r itis a d p r o p in q u a n t e m d ie m ’
H e b r . 1 0 . 25.
(3) I t is so m e tim e s e q u a l to an A d v e r b , o r to a c o n
d e n se d a d je c t iv a l o r a d v e r b ia l c la u s e :
(a) u se d a d v e r b i a l l y : 4 u isu s est eis q u a s i lu d e n s lo q u i ’
(je s t in g ly ) G e n . 1 9 . 14, ‘ se r u ia m u s p la c e n te s D e o ’ ( a c c e p t
a b ly ) H e b r . 1 2 . 28, 4 la te t e o s h o c u o le n te s ’ (θ ε λ ο ν τ α ς — th is
t h e y w ilf u lly fo rg et) I I P e t. 3 . 5, cf. I T i m . 1. 13.
{b) as a ‘ q u i ’ c la u s e : f d o r m ie n tib u s ’ (th o se w h o s le e p )
I T h ess. 4. 13, 4 la b o r a n te m a g r i c o l a m ’ (the h u s b a n d m a n
th a t la b o u re th ) I I T im . 2 . 6. It is a ls o in c o r r e c t ly u se d to
tra n sla te th e G r e e k A r t i c l e w ith P a r t ic ip le , a s 4 a c c ip ie n t e s ’
(ο ι λ α μβ α υ ο υ τ ε ς , th o se w h o re c e iv e ) R o m . 5 . 17.
(e) as an a d v e r b ia l c la u se , d e n o t in g tim e , c a u s e , c o n c e s
sio n , etc. : 4o ra n te s ’ (w h en y e p r a y ) M t. 6. 9, cf. £ m a n e n s ’
A c t . 5 . 4, 4m o rie n s ’ H e b r . 1 1 . 21, 4 non in u en ien te s ’ (sin ce
t h e y c o u ld n o t find) A c t . 4. 21, 4 le g e m c o n s u m m a n s ’ ( if it
fulfil th e la w ) R o m . 2 . 27, 4 et q u id e m sc ie n te s ’ (th o u g h y e
k n o w ) I I P e t. 1 . 12 ; a su cc e ssio n o f s u c h P a r t ic ip le s o c c u rs
in I P e t , 2 . 1 8 -3 . 12.
(4) P e r ip h r a s t ic o r A n a ly t ic a l u se o f th e P r e s e n t P a r t i
c ip le . In c la s s ic a l L a t in th e P r e s e n t P a r t ic ip le (in th e
N o m in a tiv e ) c a n b e u se d w ith esse o n ly w h e n it h a s b e c o m e
an A d je c t iv e , a s d iligen s, sapiens , e tc. ; in p o p u la r s p e e c h it
c a m e to b e f r e e ly e m p lo y e d to fo rm a finite T e n s e : th u s
no Syntactical Peculiarities
‘ s t e lla e e ru n t d e c id e n t e s 5 M k . 1 3 . 25, c e ra t e x p e c t a n s 5 M lc.
1 5 . 4 3 , L k . 1 . 21, cf. 20, 22, 5. 1 0 ; ‘ q u a e s u n t r a tio n e m . . .
h a b e n t ia ’ C o l. 2 . 2 3 ; ‘ e st d e s c e n d e n s ’ J a c . 3 . 15. T h is
a n a ly t ic a l u se , th o u g h it is u n iv e r s a l in E n g lis h , is im p o s
s ib le in F r e n c h e x c e p t w h e r e th e P a r t ic ip le h a s b e c o m e
a s im p le A d je c t i v e .
(5) A d je c t iv a l u se. T h e P a r t ic ip le is o ften s im p ly an
A d je c t i v e : th u s c m o rie n te s h o m in e s ’ (m o rta l m en ) H e b r .
7 . 8, ‘ m a n e n te m s u b s t a n t ia m ’ P le b r. 1 0 . 34, cf. 1 3 . 14,
* a rg u m e n tu m non p a r e n tu m ’ (a p r o o f o f th in g s in v is ib le )
H e b r . 1 1 . 1.
S o w ith th e P erfect P a r tic ip le P assiv e, ‘ rem issas m an us
et so lu ta g e n u a ’ P lebr. 12. 12, ‘ destin atam u o lu n tatem ’
I I C o r. 8. 19, cf. 9 . 5, E p h . 1. 19, P h il. 3 . 8, and see
a b o v e § 77. ‫י‬
W h e n so u se d , th e P a r t ic ip le a d m it s o f c o m p a r is o n : th u s
‘ a m a n tis s im u s D o m i n i ’ D t . 3 3 . 12,1 cf. A m o s 5 . 11, a n d
in N e u t. p lu r . Is a . 4 4 . 9, H o s . 9 . 16, ‘ fratres m e i d e s id e r a
tissim i ’ (ε πι πό θ η τ ο ή P h il. 4 . i ; α γ α πη τ ό ς is ren d ered
‘ d ile c t is s im u s ’ R o m . 1 6 . 8, H e b r . 6. 9, J a c . 1 . 16, 2 . 5 (b u t
n o t 1. 19 in th e O x fo r d e d itio n ), ‘ n o m in a tissim u s ’ I C h r o n .
I I . 2 4 , cf. p p . 67, 6 8 ; C o m p a r a t iv e s a re ‘ e m in e n t io r ’ J u d ith
1 3 . 16, ‘ e x c e lle n t io r ’ I C o r . 1 2 . 31, ‘ h o n o r a t io r ’ L k . 1 4 . 8.
(6) B y th e o m issio n o f its N oun th e P a r t ic ip le it s e lf
b ecom es a N o u n : th u s ‘ u in c t u s ’ = a p ris o n e r E p h . 3 . 1
(bu t n ot 4 . 1) H e b r . 1 3 . 3 ; ‘ c r e d e n t e s ’ = b e lie v e r s , A c t . 4 .
32 e t c . ; ‘ d is c e n te s ’ = d is c ip le s L k . 1 9 . 37 (bu t ‘ d e s c e n d e n
tiu m ’ codd. p lu r . S , ‘ d is c ip u lo r u m ’ V C ) , J o h . 21. 12 (b u t
‘ d is c u m b e n tiu m ’ codd. p lu r. S C ; th is is a lso fo u n d in th e
O ld L a t in M S S ., e. g . J o h . 6 2 .2 1 ,6 6 ‫־‬ d , L k . 6. 1 e, 12.
S e e ab o ve § 66.
C o m p a r e ‘ s e r u a n tis s im u s a e q u i ’ , V e r g . A cn ., ii. 4 2 7 .
Syntax o f the Verb II I
(7) T h e P a r t ic ip le re ta in s th e p o w e r o f g o v e r n in g a c a s e ;
th u s c sc ire . . . s u p e re m in e n te m s c ie n tia e c a r it a t e m C h r i s t i ’
E p h . 3 . 19, ‘ d e s id e r a n tiu m u o s ’ I I C o r . 9 . 14, cf. I T im . δ .
io .
(8) The P resen t P a r t ic ip le A c tiv e is s o m e tim e s in
c o r r e c t ly u sed to tr a n s la te th e G r e e k A o r is t P a r t ic ip le ,
w h ich h a s n o e q u iv a le n t in L a t i n : th u s * d a m a n s . : . e m isit
s p iritu m ’ (κ ρ ά ζ α ς . . . α φ η κ ε τ ο πν ε υ μα ) M t. 2 7 . 5 ° 1 ‫ י‬e g r e -
d ie n te s . . . u e n e ru n t ’ (ε ζ ε λ θ ο ν τ ε ς η λ θ ο ν ) M k . 1 . 29 etc.
In M t. 2 7 . 49 ‘ lib e r a n s ’ = th e G reek fu tu re P a r t ic ip le
(σ ω σ ω ή .1 In A c t . 2 0 . 11 th ere is a m ix t u r e o f P r e s e n t a n d
P a s t P a r t i c i p l e s , 4 a s c e n d e n s .·. . fra n g e n s . . . a l lo c u t u s ’ (th e
G r e e k h a s a o rists th ro u g h o u t) ; E n g lis h a d m its o f th is lo o s e
u s a g e , b u t n o t F r e n c h o r It a lia n . In m a n y c a s e s th e G r e e k
a o rist is r e n d e re d in to L a t in b y cum w ith th e P a s t P e r fe c t
S u b ju n c t iv e ( m a k in g th e sen ten ce c o m p le x ) or, w h ere
p o s s ib le , b y th e A b la t i v e A b s o lu t e ; in th is c a se th e in
a c c u r a te P r e s e n t P a r t ic ip le is a v o id e d .
T h e w a n t o f a P a s t P a r t ic ip le A c t i v e is o ften s u p p lie d ,
a s in o r d in a r y L a t in , b y th e u se o f a D e p o n e n t V e r b , w h e re
th e P a s t P a r t ic ip le h a s an a c t iv e m e a n in g ; s o m e o f th e
c o m m o n e st in s ta n c e s a r e : 4 a d s e c u to ’ L k . 1. 3 / c o m p le x u s ’
(σ υ μπε ρ ι λ α β ω ν ) A c t . 20. 10, ' u o ce d e la p s a ’ (φ ω ν η ς ε ν ε χ θ ε ι -
σ η ς ) I I P e t. I . 17, ‘ d o m in a t u s ’ (κ α τ α κ υ ρ ι ε υ σ α ς ) A c t . 1 9 .1 6 ,
4 e x h o r t a t u s ’ (πα ρ α κ α λ ε σ α ς ) A c t . 2 0 . ι e t c . ; th is u se is v e r y
freq u e n t, a n d in a lm o s t e v e r y c a s e th e G r e e k is an A o r i s t
o r P e rfe c t P a r t ic ip le .
(9) T h e P a r t ic ip le a s V e r b a l. The P e r f e c t P a r t ic ip le
P a s s iv e is s o m e tim e s u se d in th e se n se o f th e G r e e k V e r b a l
in - 70 s ; th u s c c a n tic u m p ro d ile c t o ’ (ω δ η . . . υ πε ρ τ ο υ
α γ α πη τ ο ύ ) P s. 4 5 title (4 4 . 1), ‘ in te r n a t o s ’ (kv γ ε ν ν η τ ο ϊ ς )
1 S o ‘ lib e r a n s ’ but f h a s ‘ s a lu a r e d 1e t liu e r a t \ l c et l i b e r e t Ί,
and a bcq ‘ et li b e r a u i t ( o r - b it) r ‘ e t s a lu a b it \ .
1 12 ' Syntactical Peculiarities
M t. 1 1 . 11. ‘ in c o rru p ta m c o r o n a m ' (ά φ θ α ρ τ ο υ στεφαρορ)
I C o r . 9 . 25, cf. 1 5 . 5 3 , W is d . ( S a p .) 1 8 . 4.
T h is P a r t ic ip le is a ls o u se d a n a ly t ic a lly , e s p e c ia lly w ith
habere an d facere : th u s ‘ exosam h a b u e r in t d is c ip lin a m ’
P r o v . 1. 29, cf. H o s. 9 . 15, ‘ a u d it u m h a b e b a n t ' (α κ ο υ ο ν τ ε ς
η σ α ν ) G a l. 1. 2 3 ; ‘ a u d itu m f a c e r e ', ‘ n o tu m f a c e r e ' a r e
fre q u e n t in th e O ld T e s t , se e N u m . 1 6 . 5, E c c l u s . 4 5 . 11,
4 6 . 20 e tc., P s . 3 9 . 4 ( 3 8 . 5) e tc.
T h e G eru n d .
§ 129. T h e G e ru n d is an A c t i v e V e r b ‫־‬n o un , a n s w e r in g
to th e E n g lis h V e rb -n o u n in -in g ; it is v e r y c o m m o n in th e
V u lg a t e , c h ie f ly in .A c c u s a t iv e , G e n it iv e , a n d A b la t iv e .
(1) T h e G re e k In finitive o f p u rp o se is u su a lly ren dered
b y th e Accusative o f the G erun d w ith a d : ‘ ad p erd en d u m
eum ' (τ ο υ α πο λ ε σ α ι α υ τ ό ) Mt. 2. 13, ‘ ad d elu d en d u m ' (ε ι ς
τ ο ε μπα ι ξ α ι ) M t. 20. 19 ; sim ila rly ε ι ς w ith N oun, ‘ ad m a n
d u can d u m ' (eh β ρ ω σ ι ρ ) I I C o r. 9 . 10 ; also after utilis, e .g .
‘ u tilis ad docen d u m ' (ω φ ε λ ι μο ς πρ ο ς δ ι δ α σ κ α λ ί α ν ) I I T im .
3. 16, c f I T im . 6. 17.
(2) T h e dep en d en t or q u a lify in g In fin ite (with or w ith out
rod) is e x p re sse d b y the Genitive o f the G e r u n d : e .g .
‘ aures au d ien d i ’ (ω τ α α κ ο υ ε ι ρ ) M t. 13. 9, ‘ potestatem c a l
c a n d i' (ε ξ ο υ σ ι α ρ τ ο υ πα τ ε ι ρ ) L k . 10.
19 e t c .; ‘ c o r . . .
d is c e d e n d i' H e b r. 3 . 12 = κ α ρ δ ι α . . . ε ρ τ ω α πο σ τ η ρ α ι .
(3 ) T h e Ablative o f th e G e r u n d is s o m e tim e s u se d in
p la c e o f th e P r e s e n t P a r t ic ip le , as a r e n d e r in g o f th e P r e s e n t
P a r t ic ip le in th e G r e e k : th u s ‘ b e n e fa c ie n d o et sa n a n d o ‫י‬
(ε υ ε ρ γ ε τ ω ρ κ α ι Ι ω με ρ ο ς ) A c t . 1 0 . 38, cf. 3 3 ‫ ‘ י‬M b o ret o p e r a n d o '
(κ ο πι α τ ω ε ρ γ α ζ ό με ν ο ς ) E p h . 4 . 28, cf. C o l. 1 . 29, ‘ in D a u id
d i c e n d o ' (ε ρ Δ. λ ε γ ω ρ ) H e b r . 4 . 7, ' d a n d o ' (δ ι δ ο υ ς ) H e b r .
8. 10, 10. 1 6 ; A o r is t P a r t ic ip le ‘ in c a s u lis h a b ita n d o ' (ε ρ
σκηραΐς κατοιιεησας) H e b r . 11. 9, cf. C o l. 1 . 2 9 ,1 T i m . 5 . 21.
Syntax of the Verb 113
C o n v e r s e ly th e P r e s e n t P a r t ic ip le is u sed in p la c e o f th e
G e r u n d ' q u is u estru m c o g it a n s p o te st a d ic e r e * M t. 6. 27,
p r o b a b ly b e c a u s e th e G r e e k h a s με ρ ι μν ω ν .
(4) T h e G e ru n d is s o m e tim e s fo u n d w ith a n O b je c t in th e
A c c u s a t iv e , a u s a g e w h ic h is g e n e r a lly a v o id e d in c la s s ic a l
p ro se: 't e m p u s re q u ire n d i D o m in u m ’ H o s . 1 0 . 12, ' a d
s e p e lie n d u m m e f e c i t ‫י‬ πρ ο ς τ ο ε ν τ α φ ι α σ α ι με ε πο ι η σ ε ν ) M t.
2 6 . 1 2 , ' a d s a n a n d u m e o s J (ε ι ς τ ο Ι α σ θ α ι α υ τ ο ύ ς ) L k . 5 . 1‫ ך‬,
cf. M t. 2 . 13 a b o v e (1).
§ 130. T h e G e r u n d A d j e c t i v e (o r G e ru n d iv e ) is a P a s s iv e
V e r b - A d je c t iv e , d e n o t in g w h a t zvill b e d on e, o r is to be
d o n e ; it is u se d in tw o w a y s .
( ‫ ) ז‬W it h ' t o b e ’ , e ith e r p e r s o n a lly o r im p e r s o n a lly , to
e x p r e s s fu tu rity , a n d o b lig a tio n o r n e c e s s ity ; h e n c e it is
so m e tim e s e q u iv a le n t to a F u t u r e P a r t ic ip le .
(a) P e r s o n a lly : 'c u m . . . b e n e d ic e n d a e sin t in illo o m n es
n a tio n e s te rr a e ’ G e n . 1 8 . 18, ' ip su m q u o d fa c ie n d u m e s t ’
(th e t h in g th a t w ill b e) E c c l . 1 . g, 'e x is t im a b a n t e u m in
t u m o re m c o n u e rte n d u m et su b ito c a s u ru m ’ ( = t h e y w e r e
e x p e c t in g th a t h e w o u ld s w e ll, πρ ο σ ε δ ό κ ω ν α υ τ ό ν με λ λ ε ι ν
πι μπρ α σ θ α ι ) A c t . 2 8 . 6 , ' n ih il reicie n d u m J (ο υ δ ε ν α πό β λ η τ ο ν )
I T im . 4 . 4 = n o th in g is to b e r e je c t e d .
(b) Im p e r s o n a lly : ‘ q u i p r a e d ic a s non fu ra n d u m fu ra ris ‫י‬
R o m . 2 . 21, 'q u i a non d ix e r it , ca u e n d u m ’ M t. 1 6 . 1 2 ;
' u in u m n o u u m in u tre s n o u o s m itte n d u m e st*, L k . 5 . 3 8 ,
s h o u ld a lm o s t c e r t a in ly b e p la c e d u n d e r th is h e a d ( 't h e r e
m u st b e a p u ttin g o f n ew w in e in to n e w w in e -s k in s J), a s
fro m th e a n a lo g y o f th e G r e e k oivov vkov ε ι ς α σ κ ο ύ ς κ α ι ν ο ύ ς
β λ η τ ε ο ν 1 it is c le a r th a t uinum is A c c u s a t iv e , n o t N o m i
n a tiv e .
1 S e e M o u lto n . Introd. to the Study o f N .T. Greek, p . 2 0 0 (4 th e a . , 1 9 1 4 ) ;

a ll t h e E n g l i s h v e r s io n s fro m th e G re e k , h o w e v e r , t r a n s la t e ‘ n ew w in e
2G-12 Q
11 4 Syntactical Peculiarities .
(2) A s A t t r i b u t e to a N o u n . H e r e it lo s e s its se n se o f
o b lig a tio n , a n d b e c o m e s e q u iv a le n t to a P r e s e n t P a r t ic ip le
P a s s i v e : ‘ a d m a n ife sta n d a m s o llic it u d in e m n o stra m 5 (ε ι ν ε -
κ ε ν τ ο υ φ α ν ε ρ ω θ η ν α ι τ η ν σ πο υ δ η ν υ μω ν ) I I C o r . 7 . 12, cf.
I T h e s s . 3 . 5, I I T i m . 2 . 25, ‘ s p e r a n d o r u m s u b s t a n t ia '
(ε λ πι ζ ο με ν ω ν υ πο σ τ α σ ι ς ) H e b r . 1 1 . 1. I n M t. 1 7 . 22 ‘ filiu s
h o m in is t r a d e n d u s e s t ' th e G r e e k e x p r e s s e s s im p le fu tu r ity
(με λ λ ε ι ο υ ι ό ς τ ο υ α ν θ ρ ώ πο υ πα ρ α δ ί δ ο σ θ α ι ), b u t d o u b tle s s
th e C h r is tia n tr a n s la to r h a d in m in d th e u n d e r ly in g n e c e s s ity .
In P r o v . 2 2 .1 3 ‘ d ic it p ig e r ; le o est foris, in m e d io p la te a r u m
o c c id e n d u s s u m ' ( I s h a ll b e sla in in th e stree ts), th e G e r u n d
A d je c t i v e is s im p ly e q u iv a le n t to a F u t u r e (fu tu ru m e st u t
o c c id a r ), b u t w ith th e a d d e d id e a th a t th e fu tu re is in e v it a b le
(I a m su re to b e s l a i n ) ; ‘ u en ies in lo c u m u b i c e la n d u s es ‫= י‬
th e p la c e w h e re y o u m u st (are to) h id e , I S a m . ( I R e g .) 2 0 .
19, b u t th e L X X a n d th e A . a n d R . V . tr a n s la te ‘ w h e r e
th o u d id s t h id e t h y s e lf '.
T h e S u p in e s .
§ 131. (1) The S u p in e in -u m is th e A c c u s a t iv e of
a V e rb -n o u n o f th e 4 th D e c le n s io n , u sed to e x p r e s s th e
o b je c t o f m otion tozm rds, a n d h e n c e th e p u r p o s e o r en d in
v ie w . T h e r e a r e so m a n y o th e r w a y s in o r d in a r y L a t in o f
e x p r e s s in g th is id e a , b e sid e s th e la t e r e x t e n d e d u se o f th e
In fin itiv e a n d o f P re p o sitio n s, th a t th e S u p in e r a r e ly o c c u rs
in th e V u lg a t e .
W e h a v e , h o w e v e r , ‘ p riu s a u tem q u a m ire n t c u b itu m ’
(b e fo re t h e y w e n t to lie d o w n ) G e n . 1 9 . 4 ,1 t h o u g h o n th e
o th e r h a n d ‘ d u m a u te m irent e m e r e ' M t. 2 5 .1 0 , a n d ‘ p r o p e r a t
tib i in o c c u r s u m ' (he is h a s te n in g to m e e t th e e ) G en . 3 2 . 6 ;
m u st b e p u t in to fr e s h w i n e s k i n s ’ (o r e q u iv a le n t ) ; L u t h e r w a s m o r e e x a c t :
‘ S o n d e r n d e n M o s t s o ll m a n in n e u e S c h la u c h e fa s s e n \
1 T h is is fo u n d in P la u t u s , C i c e r o , J u v e n a l, e t c .
, Syntax of the Verb 115
th is la st c o n s tru c tio n is a k in to th e H e b r a is m o f esse, fieri,

habere, haberi, etc., fo llo w e d b y in w ith th e A c c u s , (see
a b o v e , § 2 2 ) ; c e sse . . . in d e r is u m ’ is c o m m o n in J e r e m ia h ;
a n d so w ith a n o th e r H e b r a is m , th e c o g n a te A c c u s ., as
‘ a u d it u m a u d iu i a D o m in o 7 J er. 4 9 . 1 4 ; th u s w e have
th e s im p le V e r b - n o u n r a t h e r th a n th e S u p in e . In th e
freq u e n t p h ra se . ‘ p o tu m d a r e ’, potum is not a s u p in e b u t
a n o u n , as is sh o w n b y its b e in g p a r a lle le d w ith cibum,
escam, e tc., an d b y its u se w ith o th e r C a s e s b o th S in g u la r
a n d P lu r a l, a n d w ith o th e r V e r b s , as ‘ p o tu m sitie n ti a u f e r a t 7
Is a . 3 2 . 6. T h e ‘ q u ic u m q u e p o tu m d e d e r it uni e x m in im is
istis c a lic e m a q u a e 7 o f M t. 10. 42 (cf. M k . 9 . 4 0 ), th o u g h it
is tr a n s la te d ‘ w h o s o e v e r s h a ll g iv e to d r in k 7 in b o th
A u t h o r iz e d a n d R e v is e d V e r s io n s ,1 ca n h a r d ly b e r e g a r d e d
as a rea l e x c e p t io n ; in c p o tu m u en ie n t . . . iu u e n c i7 (th e
ste ers w ill c o m e to d rin k ) o f V e r g il, E e l. 7 . 11, th e s u p in e
fo llo w s a V e r b o f m o tio n ; a n d as a r u le it o n ly f o llo w s
s u c h v e r b s (m o tio n e x p r e s s e d o r im p lie d ).
(2) T h e S u p in e in -u is a ls o o f ra re o c c u r r e n c e ; in d e e d
v e r y few v e r b s p o sse ss it. T h e c h ie f a r e v e r b s o f p e r c e p
tio n (in c lu d in g s a y in g an d d o in g ) ; th u s ‘ non s a t u r a t u r
o c u lu s u isu , n e c a u ris a u d it u im p l e t u r 7 E c c l . 1 . 8, cf.
‘ a s p e c tu , u isu , p u lc h e r 7, e tc., I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 6 . 12, 1 7 . 4 2 ,
G e n . 2 . 9, Is a . 2. 16, ‘ a c c e s s u d if fic ile 7 I I M a c c . 1 2 . 21,
‘ d iffic ilio r a in te lle c tu 7 I I P e t. 3 . 16. H e r e w e a re a g a in on
th e b o r d e r la n d b e tw e e n th e S u p in e a n d th e s im p le N o u n ;
if th ese w o r d s a re V e r b s t h e y a r e t r u ly c a lle d sttpine, i. e.
ly in g on th e ir b a c k , o u t o f a c t io n .2 I t is d o u b tfu l w h e t h e r
w e sh o u ld in c lu d e th e H e b r a is m ‘ a u d it u a u d ie tis 7 M t. 1 3 .
14 (see a b o v e , § 2 6 . i i ) ; w e h a v e a u d itu s p r e c e d e d by
v a rio u s p re p o sitio n s, ex, in, p ro , s u p e r ; in G a l. 3 . 2, 3, (‘ e x
1 B o t h M ofTatt a n d th e T w e n t i e t h C e n t u r y N .T . o m it to drink.
2 S o n n e n s c h e in , New Latin Gram m ar, p. 234 n.
Q2
1 16 Syntactical Peculiarities
auditu fidei ’ = from the h ea rin g o f faith) it can n o t p o s s ib ly
be a supine.
W e h ave an e x a c t ly sim ilar use of the D a t iv e : c n u b en tes
et nuptui tr a d e n te s ’ {ε κ γ α μί ζ ο ν τ ε ς ) M t. 2 4 . 38,1 ‘ quis c re d i
dit auditui nostro ? ’ (w h o b e lie v e d the rep ort w h ich w e
h ea rd ?) Isa. 0 3 . 1, and su ch p h rases as ‘ h ab e ri con tem ptui,
d e s p e c tu i,, etc., Gen. 2 9 . 3 3 , 1 6 . 5 ; so L i v y has c M a ce d o n ia
d iu isu i facilis e s t ’ (is e a s y to partition) x lv . 30. 2.2
1 So <5 a n d (X ; b u t th e O x f o r d E d . o f th e V u lg a t e r e a d s nuptum w i t h th e
m a jo r it y o f M S . a u th o r it ie s ; cf. ‘ p r o p in q u a s s u a s n u p tu m in a lia s c iu it a t e s
c o n l o c a s s e C a e s . B . G . i. 18, w h e r e nuptum is a S u p i n e .
2 S o n n e n s c h e in , New Lat. Gram,, p. 235.
V III
DOUBLE AND COMPLEX SEN TEN CES
§ 132 . T h e Double Sentence, con n ected b y vav} and
con stan tly found in the H e b re w o f th e O ld T estam en t,
is as a rule s k ilfu lly w o ven into a C o m p le x S e n te n ce o f
the w ell-k n o w n cla ssica l ty p e . S o m etim es, how ever, the
H e b re w co -o rd in ate fo rm is retain ed, w h ile the m eaning
ex p resses su bordin ation .
T h u s ‘ sol egressus est su p er terram et L o t in gressu s est
S e g o r ’ (was risen upon the earth when L o t entered Z o a r)
G en. 1 9 . 2 3 ; ‘ gen tes quas d im isit Io su e et m ortuus e s t ’
(w h ich J. left when he d ied ) Jud. 2 . 21 ; so co n stan tly ‘ e c ce
dies uenient et ’, e. g. 4ecce dies uenient et auferentur o m n ia ‫״‬
( = the d a y s w ill com e %vhen e v e ry th in g sh all b e ca rrie d
a w a y ) Ϊ Ι K g s . ( I V R e g .) 20. 7 ‫נ‬, Is a . 3 9 . 6 ; cf. Jer. 7 . 32,
3 1 . 31, A m o s 4 . 2 ,'L k . 1 9 . 43, H e b r. 8. 8 ; 1 o th er e x a m p le s
are ‘ incipiam et c o m p le b o ’ (w hen I b eg in I w ill also m ak e an
end A .V ., from b e g in n in g to end R .V .) I S a m . (I R e g .) 3 . 12,
£quid faciem us tib i, et cessab it m are a n o b is ? q u ia m are ib at
et in tu m e sc e b a t 9 (w h at sh all w e d o to th ee in order that
the sea m a y b e calm unto us ? for th e sea g re w niore and
more tem pestuous) Jon. 1 . 11, ‘ adferam p a u x illu m a q u a e et
lau ate p ed es uestros ’ (a little w a ter f o r yo u to w ash ) G en .
18 . 4 ; in p ro v e rb ia l sa y in g s, ‘ h om o n ascitu r ad lab o rem et 3
3 But ( u e n ie n t a u te m d ie s am i a u f e r e t u r ’ , e t c ., M t. 9. 15, MU. 2. 20,

cf. L k . 5. 35, 17. 22 (fr o m th e G r e e k ) .
1 18 Double and Complex Sentences
auis ad uolatum (as the b ird for fligh t) Job 5 . 7. O cca sio n
a lly in the N e w T e sta m e n t, as ( erat h ora tertia, et c ru c i
fixeru n t eum (zvhen th e y cru cified him ) M k . 15 . 25 ‘ q u id
uultis m ihi dare, et ego eum uobis tradam J (if I b e tr a y him
to y o u ) M t. 2 6 . 15 ; see also L k . 1 9 . 43, H e b r. 8. 8 noted
ab o v e. E t is som etim es redu n d an t, e s p e c ia lly after factum
est (ε γ ε ν ε τ ο ) ; ‘ factum e s t . . . cu m a m b u la r e t . . . et d iscip u li
eius c o e p e ru n t' M k. 2 . 2 3 , ' factum est cum e s s e t . . . et ecce
u ir’ L k . 5 . 12, re ca llin g the H e b r e w ‫ ו ה נ ה‬. , . ‫ ; ל י ה י‬factum
est . . . et ipse s t a b a t ’ L k . 5 . } , cf. 8. 1, 2 2 , 1 0 . 38, 1 4 . 1, A c t .
5 . 7.
§ 133. T h e Complex Sentence con sists o f a M ain C la u se

p reced ed or follow ed b y a S u b o rd in ate C la u se con tain in g
a p red icatio n . T h e latter m a y be con nected w ith th e m ain
clause in vario u s w a y s ; it m a y be
(a) a N o u n -C la u se, servin g as S u b je c t or O b je ct, or in
apposition ;
(b) an A d je c t iv e - or R e la tiv e -C la u s e , q u a lify in g a N o u n ;
(e) an A d v e r b -C la u s e , in tro d u cin g atten d an t c ir cu m
stances.
§ 134. (a) T h e N o u n -C la u se : (i) as S u b je ct, a ttach ed to

the m ain sentence b y ut or quod. In E n g lis h the S u b je c t is
e x p re sse d p ro v is io n a lly b y £ it \ and the clau se co n tain in g
the lo g ic a l S u b je c t is in trod u ced b y ‘ th at ’ . It follow s V e r b s
used im p erso n ally , as est, factum est, absit, accidit, paenitet,
etc., and the S u b o rd in ate V e rb is in the S u b ju n ctiv e : thus
‘ m ihi p ro m inim o est ut a u obis iu d ic e r ‫ ג‬I C o r. 4 . 3,
‘ m anifestum . . . quod e x Iu d a ortus sit D o m in u s ‫ י‬H e b r. 7 .
14, ‘ nun tiatum est quod ’ Jud. 4 . 12, ‘ nuntiatum est S a m u e li
eo qu o d ’ I S am . (I R e g .) 15 . 1 2 , c factum est . . . ut in tra re t'
(ε γ ε ν ε τ ο . . . ε ι σ ε λ θ ε ΐ υ α υ τ ό ν ) L k . 6. 6, ‘ absit hoc scelus, hoc
p eccatu m . . . ut ’ Jos. 22. 29, I S am . (I R e g .) 12 . 23 ; d o u b le
, Double and Complex Sentences 119
con struction (infin., an d ut) ‘ absit istam rem facere ut
fu g ia m u s ’ I M acc. 9 . 1 0 ; ‘ accid it u t ’ com m o n in O ld T est,
(as in G en . 3 7 . 5), but in N e w T est, o n ly L k . 1 0 . 31 (‘ c o n
tigit u t ’ does not o c c u r ) ; ‘ d ecet u t ’ o n ly H e b r. 7 . 26 (‘ talis
en im d ecebat ut nobis esset p o n t ife x ’) ; ‘ o p o rtet ’ tak es A c c u s ,
w ith I n f i n . ; £paen itet m e qu o d con stituerim ’ I S a m . (I R e g .)
1 5 . 11, 35, cf. G en . 6. 6, I M a cc. 1 1 . 1 0 ; ‘ nec latuit filios
B en iam in quod ascen d issen t filii I s r a e l ’ Jud. 2 0 3 ‫־‬, ‘ so rte
e x iit ut incensum p o n e r e t’ L k . 1 . 9.
F re q u e n tly in the n arrative portions o f the N e w T e st.,
e s p e c ia lly w hen a aim clau se intervenes, th e co n n ectin g
con ju n ction is om itted after factum est, and th e V e r b is in
the In d ic a t iv e ; som etim es this arises from the G re e k : thus
‘ factum est, cum con su m m asset Iesu s p a ra b o la s istas,
transiit inde ’ M t. 1 3 . 53, cf. L k . 1 . 8, 6. 1, 12, 7 . 11, 8. 40
e t c .; w e also have et a d d e d ; ‘ factum est iteru m cum
sab b atis am b u laret p er sata, et d iscip u li eius co ep eru n t
p r a e g r e d i’ M k. 2 . 23 ; cf. § 1 3 2 .
In the O ld T e st, ‘ factum est autem p o st h a e c, a e g ro tau it
filius m u lie r is’ I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 17 . 17, ‘ factum est au tem ,
cu m au d isset Ie z a b e l la p id a tu m N a b o th et m ortuum , lo cu ta
est ad A c h a b ’ ib, 2 1 . 15·
(ii) as O b ject, in th e S u b o rd in ate C la u se o f a Sen ten ce
e x p re ssin g a D ep en d en t S tatem e n t, Q uestion , E x c la m a t io n ,
or D e s ire —this last class in clu d in g a co m m an d , requ est,
en treaty, or wish. ‫׳‬
(a) D ep e n d en t S ta te m e n t: either (1) rep orted sp eech , or
(2) after verbs o f seein g and know in g.
(1) R ep o rted sp eech in the N ew T e st, is, from the influence
o f the G reek , in tro d u ced b y quod, quia , or quoniam (all =
o n that, not because) ; frequ en tly such qu o tatio n is d irect,
the conjunction, like o n recitantis, an sw erin g to our q u o ta
tion m arks (“ ” ) : thus ‘ tun c con fitebor illis q u ia n u m qu am
120 Double and Complex Sentences
noui u o s ’ M t. 7 . 23, cf. 2 6 . 72, 7 4 ; 4dicen s ei q u ia m ortua
est filia t u a ’ L k . 8. 4 9 ; 4si qu is d ix e r it quon iam d ilig o
D e u m ’ I Joh. 4 . 20. In the O ld T e sta m e n t th e sp eech is
is u su ally d irect, w ith o u t a co n n ectin g con junction.
S o w ith v e rb s o f pro m isin g, th reaten in g, etc. w e h ave,
instead o f the classica l c o n stru c tio n ,4p o llicitu s sum ut non
facerem inritum p actu m m e u m ’ J u d . 2 . 1 ; 4p ro m iserat ei
ut d a r e t ’ IT K g s . ( I V R e g .) 8. 19, cf. I I C h ro n . 6. 1 ; 4E s a u
frater tuus m inatur ut o ccid at te ’ G en . 2 7 . 42 ; 4iu rau it ut
non transirem Io r d a n e m ’ D t. 4 . 21, cf. I S a m . (I R e g .)
3 . 14.
(2) A ft e r V e r b s d en o tin g som e a c t iv ity of the senses or
m ind— seeing, h earin g, k n o w in g ( Verba sentiendi)·, thus
4uidentes q u o d N a a s . . . uenisset ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 2 . 12 ;
4au d ierat en im q u o d r e c e s s is s e t’ I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 1 9 . 8 ;
4in te lle x it ergo H e li q u ia D o m in u s u o caret puerum ’ I S a m .
(I R e g .) 3 . 9, cf. P s. 7 3 . ( 72 ). 16, Jud. 1 5 . 2 , 1 S am . (I R e g .) 1 8 .
11, I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 5 . 11, Job 14 .1 4 ; 4scitote qu o d D o m i
nus D eu s u ester non eas d e le a t ’ Jos. 2 3 . 13, cf. I I K g s .
( I V R e g .) 5 . 15. S om etim es th e S u b je c t o f th e S u b o rd in ate
C lau se is ex p ressed in the m ain sen ten ce, w h ich has thus a
tw ofold O b je c t : 4h o c p raecau ete, ut d ilig a t is ’ Jos. 2 3 . 11 ;
4uidit D eu s lu cem qu o d esset b o n a ’ G en . 1 . 4 ; 4p ra e d ica b a t
Iesum quon iam hic est filius D e i ’ A c t . 9 . 20, cf. 3 . 10, 4 . 13.
In these sen ten ces, so far as a d istin ctio n can b e d raw n , the
In d ica tiv e M o o d la y s stress on th e fact, the S u b ju n ctiv e
denotes a th o u gh t or m en tal co n ce p t. T h e O ld T estam en t,
as m a y be seen from th e in stan ces a b o v e , prefers the S u b
ju n ctive .
T h e Indicative is e sp e c ia lly used w ith resp ect to G o d ,
w hose ex isten ce is p resupposed : 4ut sciat om n is terra q u ia
est D eu s in Isra h el ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 7 . 46 ; con trast 4uere
scio quod non sit aliu s D eu s in u n iu ersa t e r r a ’ I I K g s .
Double and Complex Sentences !2 1
( I V R e g .) 5 . 15. In the N e w T estam en t ‘ cred ere enim

op o rtet acced en tem ad D e u m q u ia est, et in qu iren tibu s se
rem u n erato r fit (sit S (IT)’ H e b r. 11 . 6 (cf. A c t . 9 . 20, 22,
supra).
In o ther statem en ts : ‘ m em ento q u ia uentus est u ita m ea ’
Job 7 . 7 ; ‘ au d io qu od tra d ita est septem u ir is ’ T o b . 6. 14 ;
‘ ut. n un tietis ei q u ia am o re lan g u eo J C an t. 5 . 8 ; ‘ ex istim a sti
in iq u e 1 q u o d ero tui s im ilis ’ P s. 50 (4 9 ). 2 1 ; 4n o lite p u tare
qu o n iam ueni ’ M t. 5 . 17 ; so w it h putasnet used p a re n th e ti
c a lly G en . 17 . 17, J o b 1 7 . 16, E z e k . 3 7 . 3 ; n o tice its
curious use in D an . 6. 2 0 ; ‘ D a n ie l serue D e i u iuen tis, D e u s
tuus cui tu sem is sem p er, putasn e u alu it te lib e ra re
a leo n ib u s? ’
T h e Subjunctive. T o th e instances given a b o v e m a y b e
a d d e d : ‘ au d ieran t qu ia com estu ri essent p a n e m ’ G en . 4 3 .
25 ; ‘ p o llicitu s est qu o d non o ccid eren tu r ’ Jos. 9. 15 ; 4n u n
tiare ei qu o d m ortuus esset p aru u lu s ’ I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 12 .
1 8 ; ‘ co n ce d e m ihi ut t o lla m ’ I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 5 . 1 7 ;
‘ an im ad u erti qu o d h o c q u o q u e esset u a n it a s ’ E c c L 2. 15.
O n the o ther hand the classical con struction of Accusative
ivith Infinitive is som etim es, th ou gh rare ly , fo u n d ; e .g . tw ice
in I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 5 . 8, after audisset an d sciat, after
audio G en . 4 L 15, uideo G en . 4 4 . 31, E x . 2. 12, I I K g s . ( I V
R e g .) 6. 20, L k . 2 1 . 20, scio L e v . 13 . 53, I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 1 L
16, I K g s . ( I l l R e g .) 2 . 42, L k . 4 . 41, I Joh. 5 . 16, existimo
I M ac. 5 . 61, I I M ac. 5 . 21, 7 . 19, and ab o u t 14 tim es in the
N e w T e s t., p2tto G en . 4 1 . 1, 4 2 . 30, Jos. 8. 6, 2 2 . 19, Jud. 1 9 .
28, 2 0 . 32, L k . 8 .1 8 , Joh. 5 . 39, J ac. 1 . 26 ; b u t, as w e h av e
said , the alm o st un iversal use is with the sim p le A c c u s a t iv e ,
or w ith th e S u b o rd in ate C la u se, as ab o ve.
§ 1 3 5 . (/3) D ep en d en t Q u estion . T h e d epen den t qu estio n
1 T h i s w o r d ( ‘ w i c k e d l y ’ in P r . B k . v e r s io n ) is n o t in th e H e b r e w .
2642 R ‫׳‬
is in troduced b y an In te rro g a tiv e Pronoun , o r S u b o rd in a tin g
C o n ju n ctio n .1
R e g u la r instances o ccu r (th ou gh not freq u en tly) in the
V u lg a te , and e s p e c ia lly in th e O ld T e s t a m e n t ; b u t the
questions are u su a lly d ir e c t : thus vve h a v e 1inter-
ro gau it qu id q u a e r e r e t5 G en . 3 7 . 1 5 ; 1in te rro g a tu cuiu s
filius sit iste p u e r 5 I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 7 . 5 6 ; 1 uide quern re
sp o n d eam ei, qu i m isit, serm onem 5I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 24 ·. 13 ;
4coeperun t qu aerere inter se quis esset e x e i s 5 Lie. 2 2 . 23,
cf. A c t . 21. 3 3 , 2 3 . 3 4 ; 4qu aesiu itqu e D a u id qu am recte
a g e re t Io a b et p o p u lu s, et quom odo ad m in istraretu r b ellu m 5
I I S a m . ( II R e g .) 11 . 7, cf. Jud. 17 . 9, M k . 1 3 . 35.
Alternative Questions·. 4uide utrum tu n ica filii tui sit,
an n o n 5 Gen. 3 7 . 32 ; 4donec proben tur q u a e d ix istis utrum
uera an falsa s in t 5 G en . 4 2 . 16 ; 4 uidete an m en tiar 5 J o b 6.
2 8 ; 4uideam us an ueniat H e lia s 5 M t. 2 7 . 49. B u t in the
N e w T e sta m e n t, from the influence of the G re e k , w e often
h ave si (ε ι ) 2 instead o f 7mm or utrum, an d from the sam e
cau se the In d icativ e is found instead o f th e S u b ju n ctiv e .
Indicative', ‘ in terro ga et d isce quis sum e g o 5 I M ac. 10.
72 ; 4euntes discite q u id e s t 5 M t. 9 . 13 ; 4qu o ego uado scitis 5
Joh. 1 4 . 4.
W ith si: 4in terro go uos si lic e t ' L k . 6. 9 ; ‘ si p eccato r
est nescio 5 Joh. 9 . 25 ; 4si iustum e s t . . . iu d ic a t e 5A c t . 4 . 19.
Subjunctive : found som etim es even w h en th e G re e k is
in the In d icative, e. g . j m irabatur si iam ob isset (τ ε θ ν η Ke) 5
1 S u c h c la u s e s m ust b e d is t in g u is h e d fro m th e R e la t iv e C la u s e (see
b e lo w ) : 1t e ll m e w hat (quid) y o u h a v e fo u n d ‫ י‬,.* g i v e m e w h a t (id quod, or
s i m p ly quod ) y o u h a v e fo u n d ’ . In t h e fo r m e r c a s e t h e v e r b in th e p r in c ip a l
c l a u s e m u st d e n o t e s o m e a c t i v i t y o f th e m in d ; in th e la t t e r c a s e a n y v e r b
m a y b e u sed.
“ T h is si" ( ‘ w h e t h e r ’ ); u s e d a s = * i f ‫ י‬in c o llo q u ia l E n g l i s h , m u st n o t b e
c o n fo u n d e d w i t h t h e u s e o f sin e, .-.sin e ( in a n a d v e r b i a l c l a u s e ) , w h e r e
t h e r e is n o a lt e r n a t iv e , a n d t h e c o n s e q u e n c e is th e s a m e in e it h e r c a s e ;
t h is la t t e r c o n s tr u c t io n is v e r y c o m m o n in th e V u lg a t e .
Double and Complex Sentences 123
M k . 1 5 . 4 4 ; ' in te rro g ab a t si h om o G a lila e u s esset ( ε σ τ ί ) ’

L k . 2 3 . 6 ; ' in terro gab an t si S im o n . . . illic h aberet h o sp i
tium (ξ ε ν ί ζ ε τ α ι ) A c t , 1 0 . 1 8 ; cf. in th e O ld T est. I S am .
(I R e g .) 1 7 . 22, I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 1 2 . 22.
In th e Tense th e V u lg a t e so m etim es ad h eres to the
co rre ct con secu tion , w h ere th e G re e k after a P ast T e n se
h as th e g ra p h ic S u b ju n ctiv e instead o f the O p t a t iv e : 'n o n
in u en ieban t qu id faceren t (7τ ο ι η σ ω σ ι ν ) ‫ נ‬L k . 1 9 . 48 ; ' d iu i-
serunt . . . quis q u id tolleren t (τ ι ς τ ι α ρ η ) ’ M k . 1 5 . 2 4 ; b u t
in A c t . 1 7 . 27 'q u a e r e r e D e u m si forte ad tracten t eum , au t
in u e n ia n t’ the V u lg a te has th e P resen t S u b ju n ctiv e again st
the G re e k O p tativ e (ζ η τ ε ι ν τ ο ν Θ ε ό ν , el α ρ α γ ε ψ η λ α φ η σ ε ι α ν
α υ τ ό ν κ α ι ε υ ρ ο ι ε ν ).
T h e D e p e n d en t Q u estio n is also in trod u ced b y the
co n n ectin g P ro n o m in al A d je c t iv e s , q 71antus, qualis , q 71ott
Quantus : 't u nosti q u an ta fecerit S a u l et q u o m od o
eraserit m ago s ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 2 8 . 9 ; ' n arrab o qu an ta fecit
(D eu s) an im ae m e a e ’ P s. 66. 14 (6 5 . 1 5 ); 'a n non u id es
qu an ta co m e d a t et b ib a t (B e i) cotid ie ? ’ D a n . 14 . 5 ; ' non
au d is q u an ta ad u ersu m te dican t t e s t im o n ia ? ’ M t. 2 7 . 13,
cf. M k . 1 5 . 4 ( In d ic .) ; also L k . 1 9 . 15, H e b r . 7 . 4 (S u b j.),
I I T im . 1. 18 (In d ic.).
Q ualis : c d icite m ihi . . . qu ae, et q u a les, et qu an tae sin t
ciu itates e o r u m ' J u d ith 5 . 3 ; 'h ic . . . sciret q u a e et q u alis
m u lie r ' L k . 7 . 3 9 ; 'q u a le s . . , fuerint, nihil m ea in te re s t'
G a l. 2. 6 ; ' scru tan tes in quod uel q u a le tem pus sign ificaret
in eis S p iritu s C h r is ti' I P e t. 1. 11.
Qtiot (subordin ate) o n ly A c t . 21. 20 ' uides . . . quot m ilia
s u n t ’ in the N e w T e st.
§ 1 3 6 . (y) D ep e n d en t E x c la m a tio n s . C lo s e ly a llie d to

D ep e n d en t Q uestion s on m atters o f fact are Dependent
Exclamations, introduced in L a t in b y the sam e A d je c t iv e s
, ‫י‬ R 2
as those ju st given , or b y ut, and in E n g lis h b y what or
how: thus 4asp ice q u ales la p id e s et q u ales stru c tu ra e !
(‘ beh old, w h at m anner of stones and w h at m an n er o f
b u ild in g s ! ’) M k. 13 . 1 ; 4uid ete q u alib u s litteris scrip si u o b is ;
G a l. 6. 11, cf. I Joh. 3 . 1. W it h ecce o n ly : 4e cce qu an tu s
ign is qu am m agn am silu am in c e n d it’ J ac. 3 . 5.
T h u s, w ith som e excep tio n s, th e V u lg a te , w h ere it is free
from the influence o f co llo q u ial G re e k , presents th e co rre ct
classica l form.
§ 137 . (<5) D ep e n d en t D esire (request, w ish , co m m an d ).

(1) T h e S u b ju n ctiv e w ith ut or ne, after such v erb s as
peto, rogo, deprecor, hortor, obsecro ; impero ,praecipio. (2) T h e
S u b ju n ctiv e with ne, after cane, uide, attendite. T h e o rig in a l
con struction w as the sim p le S u b ju n ctiv e w ith out a C o n
ju n ctio n , as in our own 4 ta k e care y o u do not fall ’ ; it is the
S u b ju n ctiv e w h ich has b ro u gh t in the tit, not ut w h ich
tak es th e S u b ju n ctiv e.
(1) T h e regu lar construction is found in th e V u lg a t e , but
not w ith g re a t fr e q u e n c y ; som e of the verbs given a b o ve
are o f rare o ccu rren ce, and others are used for the m ost
p a rt in o ther constructions.
Rogo w ith ut: 4rogau eru n t autem eum ut con su leret
D o m in u m , ut scire p o sse n t’, etc. Jud. 1 8 . 5, cf. 1 S a m .
(I R e g .) 2 0 . 6, Jer. 3 8 . 4, M t. 8. 3 4 , 9 . 38, M k. 8. 22, A c t .
16 . 3 9 : w ith ne: 4 ro gau it eun uch orum p raep o situ m ne
c o n ta m in are tu r’ D an . 1 . 8, cf. I I M ac. 8. ι ό , L k . 8 . 31, A c t .
1 9 . 31, I I C or. 10. 2. .
P eto: 4 peto ut uenias ’ I K g s . ( I I I R e g .) 1 5 . 1 9 ; 4 p etiu it
an im ae suae ut m oreretur ’ ib . 1 9 . 4, cf. I I S a m . ( I I R e g .)
1 2 . 20, T o b . 3 . 15, 4 . 20, 9 . 1, 1 2 . 4, Judith 1 2 . 5, Jon.
4 . 8, A c t a 7. 46, 1 3 . 2 8 ; w ith ne: 4peto ne ir a s c a r is 1
T o b . 5 . 19.
Obsecro : 4o b secro ut o b liu isca ris sceleris fratrum tuorum 7

G en. 5 0 . 17 ; 4ob secro . . . ut e x h ib e a tis 5 R o m . 1 2 . 1, an d
frequ en tly ; w ith ne, 4o b secro , inquit, ne ir a s c a r is 7 G en.
1 8 . 32, cf. N u m . 1 2 . 11, and 4o b secro te ne m e to r q u e a s 7
L k . 8. 2 8 ; sim p ly , 4 o b secro , p atien ter m e au d ias 7 A c t .
2 6 . 3 and freq u en tly. .
D eprecor : 4 d e p re ca b a n tu r eum ut uel fim briam uestim en ti
eius ta n g e r e n t7 M c. 6. 56, cf. 5 . 18, and fre q u e n tly in the
O ld T e s t .; w ith n e , 4d e p re c a b a r ne d eleret uos 7 D t. 9 . 25,
cf. M k . 5 . 10.
P r e co r : 4p re co rq u e ut im p leat D o m in u s u erbu m s u u m 7
I S am . (I R e g .) 1 . 23, cf. I I S am . ( I I R e g .) 2 4 . 10 , 1 K g s .
( I I I R e g .) 2 .1 7 , I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 1 8 . 26, A c t . 8. 2 4 ; w ith
ne, 4petition em unam p reco r a te, ne con fun das faciem
m e a m 7 I K g s . ( I I I R e g .) 2 . 16.
Persuadeo ( r a r e ) : 4 p ersu asitqu e illi ut a s c e n d e r e t 7I I C h ro n .
1 8 . 2 ; 4persuaserun t p o p u lis ut peteren t B a ra b b a n 7 M t.
2 7 . 20.
Suadeo : 4su ad e ei ut in d ic e t 7Jud. 14 . 15 ; 4su ad eb an t eis ut
p e rm a n e re n t7 A c t . 13 . 43 ; Jos. 1 5 . 18.
H ortor : 4 h ortatu squ e est eos ut m in is tra re n t7 I I C h ro n . 35.
2, cf. I I M ac. 13 . 12 ; 4iuuenes sim iliter h o rtare ut so b rii
s in t 7T it . 2 . 6 ; w ith n e : 4h o rtabatu r ne leg em am o u eren t
a corde suo 7 I I M a c. 2 . 3, cf. 1 5 . 8.
E x h o rto r : 4ex h o rta tu s suos ut fortiter d im ic a re n t7 I I M ac.
1 3 . 1 4 ; 4 ex h o rta n te sq u e ut perm an eren t in f id e 7 A c t .
1 4 . 22 ; with ne : 4 e x h o rtam u r ne in u acu u m g ra tia m D e i
r e c ip ia t is 7 I I C o r. 6. 1.
Impero (r a r e ): 4 im p erau it eis ut d ic e r e n t 7 J u d . 1 1 . 14, cf.
E sth . 8 . i i .
P ostulo : 4p ostu las ut d e m u s 7 Ju d . 8. 6, cf. I M ac. 11 . 28,
I I M ac. 11 . 17, 12. 2 4 ; ‘ u ocibus m agn is p o stu lan tes ut
c ru c ifig e r e tu r 7 L k . 2 3 . 23, cf. C ol. 1 . 9.
P raecipio : ‘ C u r p ra e c e p it u obis D e u s ut non com ederetis ? *
G en. 3 . i and frequ en tly, e s p e c ia lly in the H e x a te u c h ;
w ith n e ‘ p ra ecep it nobis D e u s ne co m ed erem u s ’ G en . 3 .3,
o cc a sio n a lly in th e O ld T e st., m ore freq u en tly in th e
N e w ; see M t. 12 . 16, Mlc. 6» 8, L k . 8. 56, A c t . 1 .
4 etc.
M an d o : ‘ m an d au it filiis 1st*, ut o fferren t’ L e v . 7 . 38, cf. D t.
: 4!. 14, 6. i , 7 . i x etc.
Quaero: ‘ q u aerite ut a b u n d e tis ’ I C o r. 1 4 . 12.
O th er con stru ctio n s a re : th e d irect Im p e ra tiv e , ‘ o b secro te,
respice in filium m eum ’ L k . 9 . 38 ; ‘ ro go te, p erm itte m ihi
lo q u i’ A c t . 2 1 . 39 e t c . ; the In fin itive, ‘ ro gau it eum a terra
re d u cere 5 L k . 5 . 3 ; ‫ ־‬suadeo tibi em ere a m e ’ A p o c . 3 . 18 ;
in P assiv e, ‘ ro g a ti sum us m anere ’ A c t . 2 8 . 14.
(2) S u b ju n ctiv e w ith ne. Catte ?te is e s p e c ia lly found in
D e u t .; tside ne is m ore usual in th e N e w T e s t a m e n t ; also
attendite ne, M t. 6. I.
V e r b s o f h in d erin g are o cc a sio n a lly found w ith n e : ‘ cu sto -
diui te ne p e cca re s in m e, et non d im isi ut tan geres eam ’
G en. 20. 6 ; ‘ p ro h ib u it te ne uen ires ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 2 5 . 26,
cf· 3 3 » 3 4 ·
V e r b s o f fearin g : titneo is u s u a lly co n stru cted eith er
a b s o lu te ly (‘ noli tim e r e ’, etc.), w ith A c c u s a t iv e (‘ tim ere
D o m in u m etc.), or w ith In fin itive ; but w e also h a v e ‘ tim ui
ne m o r e r e r ’ G en . 2 6 . 9 e t c .; ‘ tim eban t enim p o p u lu m ne
la p id a r e n t u r ’ A c t . 5 . 26 e t c .; ‘ u ereo r ut (n e )’ d o es not
occu r in th e V u lg a te .
Dico in com m an d s (to co m m an d that) is som etim es
fo llo w ed b y ut, as ‘ dic ut pan es isti lap id e s fia n t’ M t. 4 . 3,
cf. M lc . 3 . 9 ; ‘ uis dicim u s ut ignis d e s c e n d a t’ L k . 9 . 54 (G r.
θ έ λ ε ι ς ε ι τ τ ω με ν ; note th e In d ic a tiv e after uis, even again st
the G r e e k ) ; ‘ uis im us et co llig im u s ea ’ M t . 1 3 . 28 (G r. θ ε λ ε ι ς
α πε λ θ ο υ τ ε ς σ υ λ λ ε ξ ω με υ ); but the In fin itive also o ccu rs, ‘ dico
Double and Complex Sentences 12 7
uobis non resistere m alo ’ M t. 5 . 39 ; ‘ d ix it d ari illi m a n d u

c a r e ’ M k. 5 . 43, cf. R o m . 1 2 . 3.
§ 1 3 8 . (b) T h e A d je c t iv e -C la u s e . T h e s e are ch ie fly

R e la tiv e or ‘ qui ’ clau ses. Qui, w h en used as a sim p le
R e la tiv e , den otin g one or m ore a ctu al persons or th in gs,
tak es the In d ic a t iv e ; w h en it exp resses or im p lies p u rpo se
( = 7U ) or ch ara cter (is . . . . qiti, s t in t . . . qui\ = so . . . as to)
it tak es the S u b ju n c t iv e ; e .g . ‘ hie est locus qu em t e n e s ’ =
‘ this the p la ce w h ich y o u are o cc u p y in g ’ ; but ‘ hie est locus
quem teneas ’ = ‘ th is is the p lace w h ich y o u are to o cc u p y
(for y o u to o c c u p y ).’ In the V u lg a te , and e s p e c ia lly in th e
O ld T e st., qui is co n stan tly used as a co n n ectin g lin k
b etw een tw o sentences ( = an d , but, he or th e y did this, e t c .) ;
so ‘ serpens ,erat callid io r cunctis an im alib u s . . . qui d ix it
ad m ulierem ’ G en. 3 . 1 etc.
(i) W ith the I n d ic a t iv e : this o rd in a ry con stru ction
s c a r c e ly needs illu stratio n ; ‘ fuit h om o . . . cui nom en erat
Io h a n n e s ’ Joh. 1 . 6 ; ‘ illa h ora erat in qua d ix it ei I e s u s ’
4 . 53 ; so p re ced ed b y id em : ‘ in hora ead em q u a d ix e ra t
E lis e u s ’ I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 4 . 17, cf. I I M ac. 4 . 3 8 ; ‘ id em
uero D e u s qu i o p e r a t u r ’ I C or. 12 . 6. Sunt qui is found
w ith the In d ic a tiv e : ‘ sunt eun uchi, qui . . . nati s u n t ’, etc.
M t. 19 . 12 (G r. ο ι τ ι ν ε ς w ith In d ic .); ‘ est q u i q u aerit e t ‫׳‬
iu d icat ’ 1 Joh. 8. 50 ; b u t in 1 2 . 48 w e h ave th e S u b ju n ctiv e ,
‘ q u i spernit m e . . . h a b e t qu i iu d icet ’ (έ 'χ β ^ τ ο ν κ ρ ι ν ο ν τ α
α υ τ ό ν ), for h ere the sense is indefinite and is o n ly determ in ed
b y w h at fo llo w s ; s im ila rly , to in clu d e other cases, ‘ sunt qui
d ican tu r d i i ’ I C o r. 8. 5 [eial λ ε γ ό με ν ο ι θ ε ο ί ).
Quicumque o ccu rs fre q u e n tly : ‘ om n ia q u a e cu m q u e h a b e t
P a te r, m ea s u n t ’ Joh. 1 6 . 15 etc. Talis . . . qualis is also
1 S o th e O x f o r d e d it io n ; b u t g? G ‘ q u a e r a t et iu d i c e t ’ ; in th e G r e e k it is
Ζστιν 6ζ η τ ώ ν καί κρίνων.
fr e q u e n t: 4erunt en im dies illi tribu lation es tales, q u a le s
non fu e ru n t’ M k . 1 3 . 19 e t c .; O d em certam en h aben tes,
q u ale et uidistis in m e ’ P h il. 1 . 30 ; ‘ terrae m otus factus est
m agnus, q u a lis n u m q u am f u it ’ , etc. A p o c . 1 6 . 18. Tantus
. . . quantus : ‘ tan taequ e fuit m agn itu din is, q u an ta an te
n u m qu am a p p a r u it ’ E x . 9 . 24, cf. A p o c . 21. 1 6 ; w ithout
an teceden t e x p re sse d , ‘ ad au g eat D o m in u s D e u s tuus ad
p op u lu m tuum , qu an tu s nunc e s t ’ I I S a m . ( I I R e g .) 2 4 . 3,
cf. 'q u a n to d ig n a e s t ’ I K g s . ( I I I R e g .) 2 1 . 2 ; ‘ q u an ta
audiuim us et cogn o u im u s ea ’ P s. 78 (77 ). 3, cf. 5 ; ‘ qu an to
te m p o r e ’ ( = as lo n g as) M k. 2 . 19, R o m . 7 . 1 etc. Quot-
quot — ‘ as m an y as ’ w ith P l u r a l; the V e r b u s u a lly p reced es
the m ain s e n te n c e : ‘ q u o tqu o t recep eru n t eum , dedit eis
potestatem filios D e i f ie r i’ Joh. 1 . 12, cf. 1 0 . 8, M k . 6. 56,
A c t . 4 . 34, 6. 37.
(ii) W ith th e S u b ju n c t iv e : ‘ neque in qu o h au rias h a b e s '
(nothing to d ra w w ith) Joh. 4 . 11 ; ‘ su m m iseru n t uiros qui
d ic e r e n t’ A c t . 6. 1 1 ‫ ‘ ;׳‬de quo quid certu m scrib am dom in o
non h abeo ’ 2 5 . 26 (but this m a y be a ‘ d ep en d en t qu estion ’) ;
‘ quis est qu i c o n d e m n e t ? ’ (who is m ig h ty en ou gh to co n
dem n ?) R o m . 8. 34, cf. 9 . 20, I I C o r. 2 . 2, H e b r . 4 . 15, 5 . 2,
7, 8. 4, 1 3 . 21.
§ 1 3 9 . (e) T h e A d v e r b -C la u s e . T h e sim p le ad v e rb and
the a d v e rb ial con ju n ctio n (like th e A b la t iv e C ase) den ote
circu m stan ces a cc o m p a n y in g p redication . H e n c e th e A d -
v erb-C Iau se is in tro d u ced b y su b o rd in a tin g con ju n ctio n s
ex p re ssin g vario u s id e a s— time, p la ce, cau se, p urpose, result,
con d ition , con cession , com p arison . T h e sam e con ju n ction
m a y e x p re ss differen t ideas.
A s a g en e ral rule th e In d icativ e la y s stress on the fact,
the S u b ju n ctiv e on the idea or th o u g h t ; also (th ou gh with
excep tio n s) the In d ica tiv e is used w ith th e p rim a ry , the
S u b ju n ctiv e w ith th e h istoric T en ses.
T h e In d ica tiv e is u su a lly found w ith m ost con ju n ctio n s

sim p ly den o tin g tim e, as ubi, ut, donee, dum, quoad (w h ile),
antequam, pisiusquam, postquam , simul, quotiens ; also with
som e cau sal con junctions, su ch as quod, quia, quomam ; an d
with quamquam .
T h e S u b ju n ctiv e u su a lly follow s con junctions o f the o th er
classes, as cum (since, t h o u g h ); dum, dtcmmodo) licet ,
quam uis ; quasi, tamquam s i ; all th ese are found in the
V u lg a t e .
T o con sider th ese con ju n ctio n s s e p a r a t e ly :
§ 140.
s i: th e co n d itio n al si tak es the In d ic a tiv e w hen th e c a se
is left open , th e S u b ju n ctiv e when it is re ga rd e d as
a m ere su p p o sitio n ; th us :
(i) In d ic a t iv e : ‘ si est co rp u s a n im a le ’ I Cor. 1 5 . 44, cf.
4 . 7, 8. 13 j 9 . 12, 17 e t c .; w ith F u tu re perfect, 4si
eu a n g e liz au e ro ’ I C o r. 9 . 16, cf. 13 . 2 e t c .; w ith P e rfe ct,
‘ si tam en a u d is t is ’ E p h . 3 . 2, 4 . 21 ; in th ese cases th e
fact is assum ed.
(ii) S u b ju n ctiv e : w ith P r e s e n t ,‘ nam si orem lin g u a ’ I C o r.
1 4 .1 4 , 23, 24, I I C o r. 5 . 1, 3, J ac. 2 . 15 ,17 e t c .; as co n
cessive ( = th ou gh ), ‘ si decem m ilia p e d a g o g o ru m
h ab e atis ’ I C o r. 4 . 15, 1 3 . 1 ; w ith Im p e rfect, 4 si
nosm etipsos d iiu d icarem u s ’ I C o r. 1 1 . 31, cf. G a l. 1 . 10.
§ 141 .
cum : as tem p o ral ( = w hen, w h ile) u su a lly takes the In d ic a
tive in the P resen t and F u tu re, the S u b ju n ctiv e in P a s t
t im e ; as cau sa l or con cessive, it tak es the S u b ju n ctiv e
in b o th P resen t and P ast.
(i) I n d ic a t iv e : Presen t, ‘ cum co n u e n itis’ I C o r. 1 4 . 2 6 ;
P erfect, ‘ cum p la cu it ei ’ G al. 1 .1 5 ; F u tu re p e r f e c t ,c cum
2 G42 S
I 30 Double and Complex Sentences
d ix e r in t ' I T h e ss. 5 . 3 ; cum = w h ile, ‘ cum q u is d ic it ’
(orav . . . λ ί γ η ) I C o r. 3 . 4.
(ii) S u b ju n ctiv e : Present, ‘ cum . . . s i t . . . z e lu s ’ (G r. 07τ ο υ
with V e rb understood ; R . V . ‘ w h e r e a s ’) I C o r. 3. 3 ;
‘ cum autem d i c a t ’ (orav δ ε ε ι τ τ η ; ‘ w h e n ’ , b u t cau sa l
rather than te m p o ra l) I Cor. 1 5 . 2 7 ; Im p erfect, ‘ cum
iter f a c e r e t ’ (‘ as h e jo u r n e y e d ’) A c t . 9 . 3, cf. 2 3 ; =
since, th ough, an d often best tran slated b y ‘ b e in g ’,
e. g . ‘ proph eta cu m esset et sciret ’ A c t . 2. 30, cf. 7 . 5 5 ;
‘ cum esset d in e s ’ I I C o r. 8. 9, cf. P h il. 2. 6, G a l. 2 . 3 ;
P ast Perfect, ‘ quam cum legissen t, gauisi sunt ’ (i. e. the
letter w as the cau se o f th eir jo y ) A c t . 1 5 . 31.
§ 142.
dum = w hile, usque dum = until.
(i) In d ic a tiv e : Presen t, ‘ dum iu d ic a m u r ’ ( ~ κ ρ ι ν θ με ν ο ι )
I Cor. 11 . 32 ; F u tu re perfect, = cum, w hen, ‘ dum uicerit
filios Israh el ’ Judith 6. 13, cf. 6.
(ii) S u b ju n ctiv e (irre g u la rly ), ‘ dum irent em ere ’ M t. 2 5 .1 0 ,
cf. L k . 2 4 . 15, A c t . 8. 36, 10. 17 ; = dummodo (τ τ λ η ρ ο τ ι ,
o n ly th at), ‘ dum . . . C h ristu s adn un tietur ’ P h il. 1 . 18.
usque dum,
(i) In d ica tiv e o f p ast e v e n t : ‘ usque dum eiecti s u n t ’
E c c lu s . 4 8 . 16, cf. 5 0 . 21.
(ii) S u b ju n ctiv e o f r e s u lt: ‘ usque dum ueniens s t a r e t ’ M t.
.2. 9 ; ‘ usqu e dum d icam tib i ’ ib. 13.
§ 1 4 3 . O th er C o n ju n ctio n s.
donee = until.
(i) In d ic a tiv e of P a st e v e n t : ‘ non cogn ou eru n t, don ee uenit
d ilu u iu m et tulit o m n e s ’ M t. 2 4 . 39, cf. 1. 25, Joh . 9. 4,
18 ; v e ry rare in the O ld T estam en t, but ‘ don ec p u tab am ’
(as lo n g as I th ough t) Job 3 2 .1 2 , cf, E z e k , 2 8 . 15, D an ,
- 3 4 ) 4 . 5.
(ii) S u b ju n ctiv e o f F u tu re and C o n tin gen t e v e n t : so a lm o st
alw ays,, ‘ donee u e n ia t’, ‘ don ec p o n a t ’ I C o r. 1 1 . 26,
15 . 25 ; co n stan tly in O ld T estam en t.
et si — alth o u g h , is used :
(i) with In d ic a tiv e : o n ly once in the O ld T est., ‘ et si
ign orau i, m ecum erit ignoran tia ’ J o b 19 . 4 ; six tim es in
the N ew , L k . 1 8 . 4, I C or. 8. 5, I I C o r. 7 . 8, 12, 1 3 . 4,
C o l. 2. 5. '
(ii) with S u b ju n c t iv e : ‘ et si p a e n it e re t’ I I C o r. 7 . 8.
(iii) w ithout a V e r b e x p r e s s e d : ‘ et si inperitus s e r m o n e ’
I I C o r. 11 . 6.
A l l th ree con struction s are found in I I C or. 7 . 8 ‘ et si
con tristaui uos in ep istu la, non me p a e n it e t ; et si p aen iterct,
uidens q u o d ep istu la illa, et si ad h o ram , uos c o n tr is ta u it’
(the last ‘ et si ’ o n ly m odifies ‘ ad h oram ’)d
licet = alth o u gh .
(i) In d ica tiv e w hen e x p re ssin g a f a c t : ‘ licet is qui foris
est noster h o m o co rru m p itu r (co rru m p atu r £ C f)‫ ל‬I I C o r.
4 . 16 ; elsew h ere
(ii) S u b ju n ctiv e , as ‘ licet h aec feceritis J Jud. 15 . 7 etc.
nisi — unless.
(i) In d ica tiv e : m ost freq u en tly F u tu re perfect, w ith F u tu re
in ap o do sis, as ‘ nisi a b u n d au erit iu stitia uestra . . . non
in t r a b it is J M t. 5 . 20.
(ii) S u b ju n c t iv e : 1nisi forte nos eam u s et e m a m u s ’ ( =
1 T h e q u e s tio n o f r e a d i n g h e r e is i n t e r e s t in g ; . th e V u lg a t e M SS. are

p r a c t i c a lly u n a n im o u s fo r ‘ n on m e p a e n i t e t ; e t si p a e n i t e r c t , u id e n s q u o d
e p is t u la illa et si a d h o ra m u o s c o n tr is ta u it n u n c g a u d e o 1; t h is m u st r e p r o
d uce a G re e k ο υ μζ τ α μέ λ ο μα υ a teal με τ ε μί λ υ μη ν , β λ έ τ τ ω ν υ τ ί ή έ πι σ τ ο λ η cicetvr]
ei /mi 7τ ρ ύ 9 ώ ρ α ν έ λ ν πη σ ζ ν υ μα .7 ν υ ν χ α ί ρ ω ; a n d H o r t ( Notes on Select Read-
mgs, p . 120) m a in ta in s th a t th is is th e t ru e r e a d i n g , th e β λ έ πω η ά ρ o f t h e
c u r r e n t G r e e k t e x t h a v in g b e e n c a u s e d ( a ) b y Β λ έ π ω b e i n g t r a n s c r ib e d a s
β λ έ πω , a n d (//) b y 'yap b e i n g th en in s e r te d to e a s e th e c o n s t r u c t io n .
S 2
unless w e w ere to go) L k . 9 . 13 ; in P ast perfect, ‘ nisi
asin a d eclin asset de u i a ’ N u m . 2 2 . 33, cf. Isa. 1 . 9.
n is i— 0w\y : I Cor. 7 . 17 ‘ nisi u n icu iqu e sicu t d iu isit
D o m in u s '.
= s u r e ly : H eb r. 6. 14 ‘ nisi ben edicen s b en ed icam t e ’ ;
see ab o ve, § 31 .
quanidiu = as lo n g as.
In d icative : ‘ q u am d iu in m undo sum ’ (ό τ α ν ε ν τ ω κ ό σ μω ω )
Job. 9 . 5 ; ‘ q u am d iu fe c is tis ’ ( ε φ ’ δ σ ο ν ε πο ι η σ α τ ε ) M t.
2 6 .4 0 .
quamuis = alth o u gh : w ith S u b ju n ctiv e , ‘ qu am u is non lo n g e
sit ab un oqu oqu e nostrum ’ A c t . 1 7 . 27 ; ‘ qu am u is esset
ei s u s p e c tu s ’ I I M ac. 4 . 3 4 ; not with V e rb , ‘ dim ittas
p o p u lo tuo, qu am u is p eccato ri ’ I I Chron. 6. 39 ; th ese are
th e o n ly p la ce s in w h ich the w ord occu rs in the V u lg a te .
quasi = as if: e sp e cia lly in an accu satio n , and then w ith
S u b ju n ctiv e, ‘ non qu asi non h ab u erim u s p o te s ta te m ’
I I T h e ss . 3 . 9 ; ‘ non q u asi nos d ile x e rim u s D e u m ’
I Joh. 4 . 10, cf. A c t . 3 . 1 2 ; ‘ d iffam atus est . . . quasi
d issip asset bona ip s iu s ’ L k . 1 6 . 1 ; also (a d v e rb ia lly )
w ithout a V e r b , as ‘ ecce A d a m quasi unus e x nobis
factus est ’ G en. 3 . 22, cf. Jer. 6 . 9 .
quin o ccu rs o n ly in the O ld T estam en t, and th ere ch ie fly in
the p h rase ‘ quin p o t iu s ’ (so L e v . 7 . 18 etc.), b u t also
‘ quin e t ’, E z e k . 2 1 . 17, and ‘ quin im o ’ I S a m .
(I R e g .) 2 0 . 3, Jer. 8. 12 (w ith n e g a t iv e ); but note use
w ith th e S u b ju n ctiv e , ‘ nullus te p ro h ib ere p o tu it quin
. . . s e p e lia s ’ G en . 2 3 . 6 ; ‘ nec distulit . . . quin . . .
e x p le r e t ’ 3 4 . 19 etc.
quoad usque = until.
(i) In d ic a tiv e of past e v e n t : ‘ quoad usque su rre x it alius
r e x ’ A c t . 7 . 18, cf. I M ac. 14 « 1 0 ; otherw ise
Double and Complex Sentences !3 3
(ii) S u b ju n c t i v e : as 'q u o a d u sq u e red d eret u n iu ersu m

d e b it u m ’ M t. 1 8 . 3 4 ; 'q u o a d u sq u e iu s titia c o n u e rta tu r
in iu d ic iu m ’ P s. 9 4 ( 9 3 ). 15 etc.
quod: 'n o n q u o d ’ w ith S u b ju n c tiv e , 'n o n q u o d e x c id e r it

u erb u m D e i ’ R o m . 9 . 6, cf. I I C o r. 3 . 5, P h il. 3 . 12.
quom inus : ‘ n ih il s u b t r a x e r im u tiliu m q u o m in u s a d n u n t ia -
r e m ! A c t . 20. 2 0 ; ‘ si q u o m in u s ’ = if n o t, J o h . 1 4 . 2,
A p o c . 2. 16. ■ :
tamquam = as, as i f : 't a m q u a m sit D e u s ’ I I T h e s s . 2 . 4 ;
' ta m q u a m si n u tr ix fo u ea t filios su o s ’ I T h e s s . 2. 7, cf.
I C o r. 9 . 21.
ut w ith n e g a tiv e : ‘ ut ne q u is g lo r ie tu r 9E p h . 2 . 9 ; ' ut non
d ic a m ’ ( = to s a y n o th in g of) P h ile m . 19, cf. I I C o r . 9 . 4 ;
‘ tan tu m u t ’ = o n ly t h a t ; ‘ ta n tu m ut q u i te n e t n u n c
t e n e a t ‫ י‬I I T h e s s . 2 . 7.
utinani a lw a y s w ith S u b ju n c t iv e .
utrumnam — w h e t h e r : ‘ c o n s u lu e r u n t p o s t h a e c D o m in u m
u tru m n a m u en tu ru s esset i l l u c ’ I S a m . (I R e g .) 1 0 . 2 2 .1
tibi w ith In d ic a t iv e = w h e n : ‘ u bi u en it p le n it u d o te m p o r is
(0T6) ’ G a l. 4 . 4.
§ 144. In sta n c e s o f S u b ju n c t iv e in p la c e o f th e m o re
u su a l In d ic a t iv e .
aniequam and priusquam : in v a r ia b ly c o n s tr u c te d w ith S u b
ju n c tiv e in b o th P r e s e n t an d P a s t t e n s e s ; 'o m n e u ir -
g u ltu m a g r i a n te q u a m o r ir e tu r in te rra , o m n e m q u e
h e rb a m re g io n is p riu s q u a m g e r m in a r e t ’ G e n . 2 . 5, cf.
1 3 . 10, 3 6 . 31 ; f p riu s q u a m te P h ilip p u s u o c a r e t ’ J o h .
1. 4 8 , cf. 8. 58.
co quod = b e c a u s e : ‘ eo q u o d n u d u s e sse m ’ G e n . 3 . 10, cf.
I I K g s . ( I V R e g .) 1 7 . 26 ; 'e o q u o d non c o g n o u e r is ’ L k .
1 A t the en d o f the v e r s e n o te the ad d itio n ( a b s c o n d it u s cst du m i ’ w here

the domi is w i t h o u t s u p p o r t f r o m e i t h e r H e b r . o r L X X .
1 9 . 44. So quod = t h a t : c s c itis q u o d d o c u e r im uos *
D t . 4 . 5 ; b u t a ls o w ith In d ic a t iv e , £s c ie tis q u o d e g o sum
D o m in u s D e u s u este r ‫ י‬E x . 6. ‫ ך‬, see above, § 134.
postquam = a f t e r : 'p o s t q u a m a u te m m o rtu u s esset iu d e x ,
re u e r te b a n tu r (th e d e a th o f th e ju d g e w a s th e c a u s e o f
th eir tu rn in g b a c k ) ’ J u d . 2 . 19, cf. A p o c . 2 2 . 8 ; c s ig n u m
a u tem d e d e r a n t . . . u t p o stq u a m u r b e m c e p isse n t ig n e m
a c c e n d e r e n t ’ (d e p e n d e n t on a S u b j. c la u se ) J u d . 2 0 . 38 ;
c p o stq u a m o m n ia c o n s u m m a s s e t ’ L k . 1 5 . 14. B u t u s u a lly
w ith th e I n d ic a t i v e : 'p o s t q u a m c o n s u m m a ti su n t d ie s
o c t o ’ L k . 2 . 21 f. ; 'p o s t q u a m g e n u i t ’ G e n . 5 . 4 etc.
quamquam = a lt h o u g h : quamquam, lik e quamuis (see a b o v e ,
§ 1 4 3 ), is v e r y ra re in th e V u lg a t e , a n d o c c u r s o n ly fo u r
tim e s, a n d a lw a y s w ith th e S u b ju n c t i v e : ‘ q u a m q u a m
Ie s u s non b a p t iz a r e t ’ J o h . 4 . 2 ; ' q u a m q u a m e g o h a b e a m
co n fid en tia m ( κ α ι πε ρ 6γ ώ eyg>v πε πο ι θ η σ ι ν )’ P h il. 3 . 4 ;
‘ q u a m q u a m et ip si e x i e r i n t 5 (G r. a g a in p a r tic ip le ) H e b r .
7. 5 ; ‘ q u a m q u a m cu m la c r y m is in q u is is s e t e a m ’ (G r.
p a r tic ip le ) H e b r . 1 2 . 17.
Succession o f Subjunctives: w e m a y h a v e a su cc e ssio n o f
S u b ju n c tiv e s , as ' c u m q u e u id isse t B a la a m q u o d p la c e r e t
D o m in o u t b e n e d ic e r e t I s r a h e l ’ N u m . 2 4 . 1 ; h ere th e
tw o last a re N o u n -C la u s e s .
T h u s th e c la s s ic a l use o f th e M o o d s h a s la r g e ly b ro k e n
d o w n , a n d th e m a in d istin ctio n is b e t w e e n fact a n d id e a .
I n th e g e n e r a l c o n s tru c tio n o f th e se n te n c e , e s p e c ia lly in
th e c a s e o f re p o rte d s p e e c h , w e h a v e an a p p r o x im a t io n to
m o d e rn p ra c tic e .
CO N CLUSION
I t is im p o s s ib le to e x a g g e r a t e th e d e b t w h ic h th e w h o le
W e s t e r n C h u r c h o w e s to th e V u lg a t e , th e v e r s io n w h ic h
‘ liv e d a n d re ig n e d a th o u sa n d y e a r s ' ; w h ic h , a m id th e
c o m m o n ig n o ra n ce o f G r e e k , an d in th e a b s e n c e o f th e
b u rie d G reek o rig in a l t e x t , rep re sen te d an d p reserved
th e sa c re d S c r ip t u r e s .1
T o s p e a k o n ly o f th e d e b t w h ic h E n g la n d o w e s ; th e
e a r lie s t v ersio n s, su ch as th o s e o f W y c li f ,2 H e r e fo r d , a n d
P u r v e y , w ere e n tire ly d e p e n d e n t on th e V u l g a t e ; it is s till
th e B ib le o f a ll E n g lis h R o m a n C a t h o lic s .3 A t on e tim e
p u lp it q u o ta tio n s w ere e x c lu s iv e ly d ra w n from i t ; a n d still
fro m S u n d a y to S u n d a y , from ten s o f t h o u s a n d s o f p u lp it s ,
th e magnalia D ei , th e w o n d e rfu l w o r k s o f G o d , a r e set fo rth
in w o rd s d e riv e d d ir e c t ly o r in d ir e c t ly from its p a g e s ; its
1 C u r i o u s l y e n o u g h , it i s e x a c t l y 1 1 3 4 y e a r s f r o m t h e t r a d i t i o n a l d a t e o f t h e
fo un d ation of Rom e (7 5 3 b . c.) to the commencement o f J e r o m e ’s N ew
T e s t a m e n t in a . d . 382 (from 1 e . c . to a . d . i is one y e a r , not tw o), and
ag a in 11 3 4 years from 382 to 1516 a . d ., the year in w h ich E rasm us
p u b lis h e d h is G r e e k T e s t a m e n t . The completion o f J e r o m e ’s O l d T e s t a m e n t
in 4 1 0 c o i n c i d e s w i t h th e fa ll o f t h e R o m a n E m p i r e , w h i c h is t h e p o in t o f
tran s itio n betw een an cien t an d m edieval h isto ry. H ence the re ig n o f the
V u l g a t e e q u a l s in d u r a t i o n that o f th e R o m a n R ep u b lic an d E m p ire ; and
t h e V u l g a t e is t h e g r e a t l e g a c y o f t h e o ld w o r l d to th e m i d d l e a g e s , o f t h e
d y i n g E m p i r e o f R o m e to t h e e v e r - l i v i n g K i n g d o m o f C h r i s t .
2 W y c l i f g i v e s J e r o m e ’s P r e f a c e s .
3 T h e R h e m i s h N e w T e s t a m e n t r e t a i n s it s v e r y w o r d s : a z y m e s , e v a n g e -
Use, p a r a s c e u e , p ascha, p rev aricatio n (= tran sgre ssio n ), re fe c to ry (M k . 14.
1 4 ), b r e a d o f p r o p o s itio n ( — s h e w b r e a d ) , s o c i e t y o f h i s p a s s i o n s ( P h i l . 3 . 10),
to e x h a u s t th e s in s o f m a n y ( H e b r . 9 . 28), etc. It is c l o s e r to t h e V u l g a t e
than a n y other version .
136 Conclusion
e c h o e s re a ch us from th e a lt a r ,1 th e fo n t, th e p r a y e r -d e s k ,
th e h y m n -b o o k , th e p a g e s o f e v e r y t h e o lo g ic a l tr e a tise , a n d
are h e a rd less c o n s c io u s ly in o u r s e c u la r lit e r a t u r e an d
e v e ry d a y sp eech. W it h th e s p r e a d o f th e E n g lis h - s p e a k in g
r a c e th e w o rd s o f th e P s a lm is t a r e d a ily fu lfille d , 't h e i r
so u n d is g o n e o u t in to a ll la n d s, a n d th e ir w o r d s in to th e
e n d s o f th e w o r ld ; th e re is n e ith e r s p e e c h n or la n g u a g e ,
b u t th e ir v o ic e s a re h e a r d a m o n g th em ’ .
B u t w h ile E n g la n d o w e s m u ch to th e V u lg a t e , th e V u lg a t e
o w e s m u ch to E n g la n d a n d I r e la n d . A l i k e in p u r it y o f
t e x t a n d b e a u t y o f h a n d w r it in g th e E n g lis h a n d I r is h M S S .
sta n d s u p r e m e ; a n d it is a n o tic e a b le fa c t t h a t th ese tw o
fe a tu re s n e a r ly a lw a y s g o to g e th e r — th e b e s t t y p e s o f t e x t
a re p re se rv e d in th e finest M S S . T h e C o d e x A m ia t in u s ,2
th a t m o n a rch a m o n g s t L a t in M S S ., w h o s e h is t o r y rea d s
lik e a ro m a n ce , w a s w ritte n in N o r t h u m b r i a ; so w e r e th e
w o n d e rfu l L in d is f a r n e G o s p e ls ,3 a n d th e e x q u is it e S t o n y -
h u rst S t. J o h n 4 ; th e C a t h e d r a l L ib r a r ie s a t D u r h a m an d
1 T h e ‘ C o m f o r t a b l e w o r d s ’ in o u r P r a y e r B o o k a r e n o t a c c o r d i n g to t h e
A u t h o r i z e d V e r s i o n , b u t a r e in a l l p r o b a b i l i t y a t r a n s l a t i o n b y C r a n m e r f r o m
the L a t in (s e c W cstcott, The English Bible , 3 r d e d ., p . 2 7 9 ) ; this fact m a y
a c c o u n t for ‘ I w ill re fre s h y o u ’ ( = ego reficiam u o s) a g a in s t ‘ I w ill giv e
y o u r e s t ’ o f the A . V . ; but o n the o th er h an d ‘ T h i s is a t r u e s a y i n g a n d
w o r t h y o f a l l m e n to b e r e c e i v e d ’ is n o t s o n e a r t h e V u l g a t e a s is t h e A . V .
‘ T h i s is a f a it h f u l s a y i n g a n d w o r t h y o f all a c c e p t a t io n ’ = fid elis s e r m o et
om ni acce p tio n e d ig n u s. .
2 See ‘ the Codex A m ia tin u s and it s b i r t h p l a c e ’ in Studia Biblica ct
Ecclesiastica , ii, p . 2 7 3 ( O x f o r d , 1 8 9 0 ) .
3 N o w in t h e B r i t i s h M u s e u m ( M S . C o t t o n N e r o D . i v ) ; t h e h a n d w r i t i n g
is b e a u t ifu l, a n d th e illu m in a te d p a g e s , w ith th eir d elicate and in tricate
in terlaced patterns, unsurpassed. Som e of the p ages sh o w w a t e r s ta in s ,
a n d t h e r e is a l e g e n d t h a t t h e m o n k s w h o g u a r d e d b o t h S t . C u t h b e r t ’ s b o d y
an d the M S. tried at o n e t i m e to s a i l to Irelan d in o r d e r to escape the
D a n i s h i n v a d e r s ; a s t o r m a r o s e in w h i c h t h e p r e c i o u s v o l u m e w a s l o s t o v e r
b o a rd ; the m o n k s p ut b a ck , a n d the b o o k w a s fo u n d on th e s h o re .
1 A m inu te but e x q u is ite ly w ritten copy of the G o s p e l, found in the
coffin o f S t . C u t h b e r t ; n o w in the J e s u it C o l l e g e at S t o n y h u r s t ‫״‬
Conclusion 137
L ic h f ie ld p re s e r v e G o s p e ls a ttr ib u te d .r e s p e c t iv e ly to B e d e
and S t. C h ad . O f Ir is h M S S . w e h a v e o n ly to m e n tio n
th e B o o k o f K e ll s , p e rh a p s th e m o st p e r fe c t sp e cim e n o f
Ir is h w ritin g a n d illu m in a tio n in e x is t e n c e ; th e B o o k o f
A rm agh , w ith its e x t r a o r d in a r ily in te re s tin g text; th e
B o o k o f D u r r o w a n d th e B o o k o f M o l i n g ; a ll th ese a r e
in m a te s o f th e L i b r a r y o f T r in it y C o lle g e , D u b lin .
T h e n n o t o n ly in th e c o p y in g o f M S S . b u t in th e sc ie n tific
s t u d y o f th e t e x t , B r ita in h a s b ee n in th e fo re m o st r a n k .
A l c u in o f Y o r k , 1 ‘ M in iste r o f E d u c a t i o n ’ to C h a r le s th e
G r e a t, L a n f r a n c , an d S te p h e n L a n g t o n , A r c h b is h o p s of
C a n t e r b u r y , S t e p h e n H a r d i n g 2 o f S h e r b o r n e , se co n d A b b o t
o f C it e a u x , a ll la b o u r e d a t th is w o r k ; R o g e r B a c o n 3 w r o t e
to P o p e C le m e n t I V , u r g in g on h im th e d u t y o f r e v is in g
th e c o rru p t te x t . B ria n W a lt o n ’s fa m o u s L o n d o n P o ly g l o t
en sh rin es v a lu a b le lists o f M S . v a r ia tio n s g iv e n by th e
L o u v a in d iv in e s in th eir e d itio n o f th e V u l g a t e : J o h n M ill,
F e llo w o f Q u e e n ’s C o lle g e , p e r c e iv e d b e fo re o th e r stu d e n ts
th e im p o rta n c e o f th e O ld L a t in a n d th e V u lg a t e in s e t t lin g
th e G r e e k t e x t ; a n d th e g r e a t B e n t le y , w ith h is a ss ista n t,
J o h n W a lk e r , la b o u r e d at th e ta s k o f c o m b in in g th e o ld e s t
G r e e k a n d V u lg a t e M S S . a n d th u s p r o d u c in g th e t e x t o f
th e fo u rth c e n t u r y ‘ so th a t th ere s h a ll n o t b e t w e n t y w o r d s ,
o r even p a r t ic le s , d iffe re n c e .’ T h e d r e a m w a s g r a n d , b u t,
a s s u c c e e d in g s c h o la r s h a v e le a rn t, th e p r o b le m h a r d e r a n d
m o re c o m p lic a te d th an th e y d re a m e d .
T o c o m e to o u r o w n tim e s, it is to th e la b o u r s o f E n g lis h
1 A g o o d s p e c im e n o f th e A lc u i n i a n r e v is io n o f th e V u l g a t e t e x t is found
in t h e M S . A d d i t , 1 0 5 4 6 in t h e B r i t i s h M u s e u m ( q u o t e d a s K in t h e O xford
ed ition o f th e V u lg a t e N .T .) .
2 H i s c o r r e c t e d B i b l e in f o u r v o l u m e s is p r e s e r v e d in t h e P u b l i c L i b r a r y a t
D i j o n (9 bis).
3 H i s t r e n c h a n t c r i t i c i s m s o f t h e c u r r e n t V u l g a t e t e x t a r e g i v e n in H o d y ,
D c B iblion im textibus , p . 4 1 9 fT. ( O x o n . 1 7 0 5 ) .
2 G4 2 T
!38 Conclusion
s c h o la r s , h e a d e d b y th e le a rn e d B is h o p J o h n W o r d s w o r t h 1
o f S a lis b u r y , th a t th e O x fo r d c r it ic a l e d itio n o f th e V u lg a t e
N e w T e s t a m e n t is d u e , th o u g h t h e y w o u ld b e th e first to
a c k n o w le d g e th e ir g r e a t debt to th e b r illia n t w ork of
S a m u e l B e r g e r .2
T h e s e la t e r w o rk e rs h a v e a ll liv e d an d d ied o u ts id e th e
c o m m u n io n o f th a t C h u r c h w h ic h c la im s th e V u lg a t e a s its
A u t h o r iz e d V e rs io n ; b u t th e C h u r c h o f R o m e it s e lf h a s
n o w d e fin it e ly la u n c h e d th e sc h e m e o f a sc ie n tific re v isio n
o f th e w h o le B ib lic a l te x t , and in 1907 th e m ig h t y ta s k w a s
b y th e d e sire o f P o p e P iu s X c o m m itte d to th e B e n e d ic t in e
O rd e r. H e r e a g a in w e m a y feel p a r d o n a b le p rid e in n o tin g
th a t th e P re s id e n t o f th e C o m m is s io n is C a r d in a l G a s q u e t ,
an E n g lis h m a n ; w h ilst a n o th e r E n g lis h m a n , D o rn J o h n
C h a p m a n , is a m o n g s t th e m o st le a r n e d V u lg a t e s c h o la r s
a n d c ritic s b e lo n g in g to th e O rd e r .
P iu s labor , sed periculosa praesumptio j w ro te J e r o m e to
P o p e D a rn a s u s ; th e w o r k o f e m e n d a tio n a n d r e c o n stru c tio n
h a s a lw a y s h a d its d a n g e rs, b u t it a lso h a s its r e w a rd s. The
w o r k e rs h a v e h a n d e d on the to rch o f tru th a n d le a r n in g
from o n e to th e o th e r, a n d th o u g h m a n y o f th em h a v e
reste d from th e ir la b o u rs th e ir w o r k s d o fo llo w th em .
1 B ish o p John W ordsw orth d ie d in 1911, ju st eigh t d a}'s before the

appearance of the editio m inor o f the V u lg ate N e w Testam ent, to the
p rep ara tion o f w h ic h h e had d e v o te d m u ch lo v in g care.
2 T h e a u t h o r o f m a n y t r e a t i s e s — a ll o f t h e m v a l u a b l e — o n t h e M S S . o f t h e
V u lg a t e , the e d ito r o f s o m e im p o rtan t O ld - L a t in B ib lic a l tex ts ; a n d a ls o the
a u t h o r o f the f a m o u s ‘ H is t o ir e d e la V u l g a t e p e n d a n t l e s p r e m i e r s s i k c l e s d u
m o y e n a g e ’ ( P a r i s , 1 8 9 3 ) , a w o r k i n d i s p e n s a b l e to a ll s e r i o u s s t u d e n t s o f t h e
s u b ject.
I. IN D EX OF SUBJECTS
a b la tiv e 9 6 - 1 0 2 , 112 c o lle c t iv e n o u n s 75
ab solu te 39, 98 c o m p le x s e n t e n c e 1 1 8 -3 4
in c o m p a r is o n 21, 97 com poun d verb s 50
a s o b je c t 97 ....... c o n d it io n a l c l a u s e 129
w i t h p r e p o s i t i o n s 9 8 ff. co n ju ga tio n , irre g u la r 66
a b s t r a c t s a s c o n c r e t e 18 • co n ju n ctio n 6 2 -4
a ccu sativ e 8 1 -9 0 s u b o r d i n a t i n g 12 9 fr.
w i t h v e r b s u s u a l l y i n t r a n s . 81 co p u la om itted 30
c o g n a t e 82
G r e e k 3 3 -4 , 82 d ative 9 0 -2
o f r e s p e c t 35 a fte r a d je c t iv e s 91
w ith in fin itive 82 o f i n t e r e s t 91
w i t h p r e p o s i t i o n s 8 3 ff. ir r e g u la r 92
a d je c t i v e 48, 49, 57, 67 d e c l e n s i o n , i r r e g u l a r 65
a s n o u n 47 D e i s s m a n n 9 5 n.
c o m p a r is o n ( ir r e g u la r ) 35, 67 d e m o n s t r a t i v e 72
a d je ctiv e cla u se 1 2 7 -8 red un d an t 2r, 40
ad verb 60-2 d e p e n d e n t cla u s e 11 9 -2 6
u se o f 68 s t a t e m e n t 119
a d v e rb clau se 1 2 8 -3 4 q u e s t i o n 12 2
A frica n ism s 3 e x c la m a t io n 123
a g r e e m e n t ad sensum 75 co m m an d 124 -6
A m ia tin u s , C o d e x 33, 43, 136 d e p o n e n t s 5 9 f . , 11 r
a p p o sitio n 93 d im in u tiv e s 46
artic le , w a n t o f 76 D o u a y V e r s i o n 77 f., 87 n.
s u b s t i t u t e s f o r 7 8 f.
in d e fin ite 79 ellipse 30
A s ia n ic sty le 3 e m p h a sis 26
assim ilatio n 44
E n g l is h V e r s i o n 4 n, 103, 1 0 4 -
a ttra ctio n 76 E u s e b i u s 2 n.
A u g u s t i n e 10 n , 54 n, 6 5
f e m i n i n e f o r n e u t e r 18
B e n t l e y , R . , 137 -fic a r e , v e r b s in 5 2
B e r g e r , S . , 138 F u ld e n sis, C o d e x 43
b e t a c i s m 4 3 n.
B e z a , T h . , 71 n .
G a s q u c t , C a r d i n a l 138
B l a s s 1 0 8 n.
gen itive 9 3 - 6
B o e rn e ria n u s, C o d e x 33 η .
ab solu te 35
B urkitt, F . C ., 3, 69 η .
w it h c o m p a r a t iv e 35
a s o b ject 95
C h a r l e s , R . Η . , 22 η . p a r titiv e 94
C i c e r o 9 3 2 ,‫ח‬ q u a l i t a t i v e 19, 9 3
T 2
I 40 Index of Subjects
g e r u n d n o un 112 o r d e r o f w o r d s 29
., a d je c t i v e 113 o r t h o g r a p h y 43
G raecism s 2 8 -40
in fle x io n a l 33 p articip le 1 0 8 -1 2
l e x i c a l 3 1 f. G r a e c i s m 3 9 ; a s a d j e c t i v e 5 0 a n d n,
s3 'n tactical 3 4 4 0 ‫־‬ 108 f. ; p e r i p h r a s t i c u s e 1 0 9 ; a s
( v e r b a l c o n s t r u c t io n s 36 ; in fin i noun n o ; in co rrect use n r
tive 38 ; p a r t ic ip le 39) p articles 62
G r e e k , s p r e a d o f 1 f., 2 8 p a s s iv e , f r e e r u s e 37
p e r i p h r a s t i c c o n j u g a t i o n 104 f., 1 0 9
h a b e r e w ith infin. as futu re 38 P la u t in e w o r d s 47
H a r n a c k , A . , 78 n. p lu ra ls
H e b r a is m s 11-27 of ab stract n o u n s 1 8 ; v e rb w ith
a lp h a b e t n - 1 4 ; p r o p e r n a m e s 14; c o l l e c t i v e n o u n 75
com m on nouns 1 5 -1 8 ; tim e prep ositio n s
17 ; n u m b e r 18 ; c a s e 1 9 - 2 1 ; tak in g a ccu s, o n ty 8 3 -8
a d j e c t i v e 2 r ; p r o n o u n 21 ; v e r b ,, a b la t. ,, 9 8 -101
2 2 - 6 ; r e p e t i t i o n 27 ,, a c c u s , a n d a b l . 8 9 , 101 t.
p r o h i b i t i o n 1 0 6 , 107
H o r t 1 3 1 n. pronouns 69 -74
p erso n al 6 9 ; p o sse ssiv e 7 1 ; d e
im p e ra tiv e ro6 m o n stra tiv e 7 2 ‫;׳‬ in te rro g a tiv e
i m p e r s o n a l v e r b s 8 0 f. a n d in d e fin it e 73 ; r e la t iv e ( s y n
in d e fin ite su b je c t 26, 103 t a x ) 127 f.
in d icativ e 1 0 3 -6 Psalterium iitxla Hebr. 15 n , 16 n ,
i n f i n i t i v e 10 7 f. 26, 86 n, 98
ab solute 23 ; G r e e k in flu e n ce 38
in flexion 6 5 -7
r ela tiv e c la u s e 1 2 7 -8
I r i s h M S S . 137
reflexives
Itala 3
p r o n o u n 6 9 ; v e r b s 60
r e p e a t e d a c t i o n 1 7 , 23
Jerom e
i m p e r f e c t e x p r e s s i n g 1 04
E p i s t l e s q u o t e d i n , 11 n.
rep etitio n ( H e b r .) 27
O t h e r q u o t a t io n s 2 n, 6, 7 n, 13 n.
R h cm ish N ew Testam ent 77 n,
O . T . 1 9 , 7 3 n , 8 5 n , 91 n.
135 ‫· ח‬
R o e n s c h , H . , 4 2 n.
L in d is f a r n c G o s p e l s 136 η .
R o m a n c e la n g u a g e s 5
M a s s o r e t i c t e x t 12
m ean in g s, n e w 64 S crip tu res, sp read of r-4
n o u n s 5 4 - 7 ; a d j e c t i v e s 57 ; v e r b s s e n t e n c e , s3 'n tax o f
57-60 sim p le 7 5 - 1 1 6 ; d o u b le Ι Γ 7 ; co m
m o d ified 5 8 - 6 0 p le x 1 1 8-34
M o u l t o n , J . H . , 1 13 n. S e p t u a g i n t 1, 6 , 12 f.
s e q u e n c e o f t e n s e s 12 3
n o m in ativ e 80 su b ju n ctiv e
l o o s e 19 ; s u s p e n d e d 8 0 in s i m p l e s e n t e n c e s 10 6
n o u n -c la u s e 1 1 8 -2 6 in d e p e n d e n t c l a u s e s 119, 121 IT.
(see d ep en d e n t) r e p l a c e s a c c u s , w i t h i n f i n . ib .
n u m e r a l 21 s u p e r l a t i v e 67
o f p articip les n o
O l d L a t i n 3 , 5, 6 5 , 6 7 s u p in e s 114 -1 6
Index of Subjects 141
tenses (in d ica tive ) 2 3 ; co n stru c tio n 25 ; G r e e k 3 3 ;
p rese n t, historic 103; past im p e r- co n stru c tio n s 3 6 ; in fin itive 38 f . ;
feet (m e a n in g s ) 1 0 3 - 4 ; fu tu re co m p o un d 5 0 -2 ; m ean in g 57
104; perfect 105; past an d 6 0 ; irr e g u la r co n ju ga tio n 66 f . ;
f u t u r e p e r f e c t ib. i m p e r s o n a l 8 0 f. ; o f k n o w i n g
term in atio n s 120
m a s cu lin e 4 4 ; fem in in e 4 5 ; n e u te r
46 V u lg a t e
T e r t u ll ia n 32 n. J e r o m e ’ s s h a r e in 5 , 6, 4 1 ; O ld
T is c h e n d o rf 43 T e s t . 7 , 9 2 n ; in f lu e n c e o f 135 ;
Trench, Archbp. 9 η . O xford E ditio n 43, 52 η , 63,
116 n-
v erb a ls h i
verb W a t s o n , E . W . , 99 η .
H e b r a i s m s in m e a n i n g 22, 24 ; W e s t c o t t , B p . , 13 611.
in fin itive ab so lu te 2 3 ; c a u s a t iv e W o r d s w o r t h , B p . J . , 138
II. IN D E X OF G R E E K W ORDS
ά η ά πη 4 n. ε ν ε κ ε ν (ο υ ) 63 πα ρ α κ α λ ε ΐ ν nr
α γ α πη τ ό ς 26, 68, HO, έ ν τ α ψ ι ά ζ ε ι ν 113 π α ρ α π ι κ ρ α σ μ ό ς , 79
in ε ν ώ πι ο ν 85 πα ρ α φ ρ α ν ώ ν η 6
ay ω ν ί ζ ε πθ α ι 33 εξ έ δ ρ α 32 ' πα ς w ith and w ith ou t
άδυνατος 94 ε πε ι τ α 61 a r t . 77
ά κ α τ ά πα υ σ τ ο ς 48 ε πί , w ith A c c . 9 ° ; w ith πε ρ ί 85
α κ ο ή 55 G e n . 86, 1 0 2 ; w ith πι σ τ ε ύ ε ι ν 37
α κ ο ι ν ώ ν η τ ο ς 48 D a t . 8 8 , 102 7τ λ 6ά υ υ = superlative 68
ά λ λ α μέ ν ο υ ν ye 64 ε πι με ν ε ι ν 3 9 πλ ή ν 8η
α μά ρ α ν τ ο ς 48 ε πι πυ θ η τ ο ς l i o πλ ή ν 'ό τ ι 130
α ν 61, 106, ι ο η €uayyeAi£e 1v 37 πο ί μν η 4η .
ά υ ά 86, 88 ε ^ν ω σ τ ο ς 48 ττολυ? 78
α ν ε ξ ι χ ν ί α σ τ ο ς 48 ε υ λ α β ή ς 48 π ο ν η ρ ό ς 68, 93
ά ν τ ι λ ε -γ ε ι ν 3 7 π ο τ έ 6γ
ά πα ρ ά β α τ ο ς 8‫ך‬ Γ λ (ώ ? σ ο ι 4 η . π ρ ό 7 2 , 84
ά πύ τ ο υ ν υ ν (= ex hoc ίνατί 73 πρ ο ε χ ε ι ν 38
nunc) 79 πρ ο ς 85, 87
α πό β λ η τ ο ς 1 13 κ α θ ό τ ι 63 πρ ο σ κ υ ν ε ΐ ν 3771 ‫״‬
ά πο ρ φ α ν ί ζ ε σ θ α ι 9 8 κ α τ ά 84, 85 η , 86, 8η , 88
α πο σ υ ν ά γ ω γ ο ς 9 9 κ α τ α κ υ ρ ι ε ύ ε ι !’ 3 6 , i l l σ ά λ π ι ζ ε tv 1 0 3
ά ρ α 63 κ α τ ά ρ τ ι ζ ε ι ν 15 Π . σ ι μι κ ί ν θ ι ο ν 47
α σ τ ε ί ο ς 21 κ aτ ε yvω σ μέ voς 4 8 σ κ α ν δ α λ ί ζ ε ι ν 38
ά τ ι μα 9 3 κ ε ν ό ς 57 σ κ ε ύ ο ς iK X o y i^ 20
α υ τ ό ς η ι and η . κίδαρις 32 σ πυ ρ ί ς 32
ά φ θ α ρ τ ο ς 4 8 , 112 κ ο μψ ό τ ε ρ ο υ 6σ χ 6 68 σ τ ο ι χ ε ΐ ν 108
ά χ α ρ ι ς 32 κ ό σ μο ς (ο ) 79 στάχυ? 13 η .
κ ρ ά β α τ τ ο ν 32 σ υ μπε ρ ι λ α μβ ά ν ε ι η ΐ
β έ β η λ ο ς 32 κ ρ ά τ ι σ τ ο ς 68 σ ύ ν θ η μα 13 Π .
β λ η τ ε ο ν 1 13 κρίνειν 25, 38 j 85, 12η , σ ω τ ή ρ 9
*γ ε ν ν η τ ό ς 111 130
yvpovv 33 κτίσις 54 ‫* ״‬ τ ά χ ι σ τ α (ώ ? τ α χ .) 6η
κ τ ί σ μα 54 ‫ ח‬. 62
τ ε λ ε ι ο υ ν
56 . . . 56 64 κ ύ κ λ ο ς 86 τ ε λ ώ ν η ς 4 11.
5 <ά , w i t h A c c . 86, 87 ; τ ό τ ε 62
w i t h G e n . 8 6 , 87 λ υ τ ρ ω τ ή ς ίο η. τ ρ ί σ τ ε ya 32
δ ι α λ ο γ ι σ μό ς 93 τ υ χ ε ι ν , εί τ ύ χ ο ι 63
δι ε ρ χ ε σ θ α ι 1‫ך‬ μα ρ τ υ ρ ε ΐ ν 60
δ ι ό 87 με λ λ ε ι ν 38, 104, 105 ‫״‬ > υ πό σ τ α σ ι ς 114
διότι 63
113, 114
φ θ α ρ τ ό ν 48
εΐ κ α ι ,. . α λ λ ά 63
με ν . . . 56 63
με ν ο υ ι ^ε (ά λ λ α μ *:-*64 (.‫׳‬
j μη 8y χ α ρ α δ ρ ι ύ ς 34
ειρηνικός 68 με τ α ξ ύ 85
χάρις 32 η .
ε ϊ ς 89, 102 . μ °μ φ ή 55 η - χ ά ρ ι σ μα 32 Π .
eh = p r o p t e r 87 ‫ ז ז ס‬/‫ ע ס־ ס‬87 χ ρ ε ί α ν εχειν 97 η ·
ε κ ~/α μ ί ζ ε ι ν 1 1 6
ori 63, 119 χ ρ η μα τ ί ζ ε ι ν 37
92
εκδίκησις ο υ μ 7/ 104 Χ ρ ι σ τ ό ς ίο η.
6 / 8 5 ,20 ‫׳‬. ιογ χ ω ρ ί ς 85, 87
ε ν α ν τ ί ο ν 84 50 η , 58
πα ι δ ε ύ ε ι ν
ί ν δ ε χ ε τ α ι 39 π α ρ ά , w ith a c c . 85, 8 7 ; ώϊ 62
ε ν ε κ α 8η w i t h dat. 84, 86 ώ σ πε ρ 60
III. IN D E X OF LA T IN W O RDS
a b 27, 98 a e m u l a r i 2 5 57 a p p a r e r e 44, 90
a b h o r r e s c e r c 51 a e r a 34 a p u d 84
a b i c e r e 43 a e r i u s 57 ara tiu n cu la 46
a b i r e 57 ae ru g in a re 50 a rc a riu s 49
a b l a c t a r e 51 a e s t im a r e 25 a r g u m e n t u m 54
a b n e g a r e 57 a e t h e r a 34 a rio p a g u s 43
a b s c o n s io 45 afflictio 44 a r r h a b o 31
a b s c o n s u s 6 6 , 67 a g o n 3 1 . 3 3 n. a rtic u lu s 54
a b s i t a t e 4 n. a g o n iz a ri 33 a s c e l l a 47
ab sq u e 99 a l b a 47 a s c e n s o r 44
a b y s s u s 31 a lb o r 45 a s p i c e r e 44
a c c e n s ib ilis 48 ! a l i o q u i n 61 a s p i c e r e (in ) 25
a c c e p t o r 45 a l i q u a n d o 61 assatu ra 46
acce rsire 66 a l i q u i s ( f o r q u i s ) 73 a ssid u u s 44
a c c i p e r e 57 a l i u s 6 8 , 7 1 , 73 a s s is t r ix 45
a c c u b itu s 45, 56 allig atu ra 46 atra m e n tariu m 46
a c h a r is 32 a llo c u t io 54 a t t e n d e r e 25, 4 4 , 126
ad 83 a llo q u i 44 a tto n d e re 66
adaquare 5[ alta re 66 a u e r t e r e 16, 5 8
a d b r e u ia t io 45 a l t e r 6 6 , 6 8 , 7 1, 73 a u r ic u la 46
a d d e c i m a r e 51 a l t e r u t r u m 70 au ricu la riu s 49
a d d e r e 2 3 , 24 a l t ilia 47 a u r i s 15
a d e p s 17 a l t i t u d i n e s ( = p e a k s ) 18 a z y m a 32
a d e p t u s 47 am an tissim u s n o
a d h a e r e r e 25, 57 am aricare 50
ad h u c 60 am bitio 54 b a iu la re 50
a d ic e r e 23 a m p liu s 6r b a p tis m a 32
a d i m p l e r e 51 a n a t h e m a 32 b a p tizare 33
a d iu r a m e n t u m 46 a n a th e m a tiz a r e 33 b ea tifica re 53
ad iu to riu m 46 a n c o ra 28 b e llig e r a t o r 44
a d l e u i a r e 51 a n g u l u s 17 b en ed icere 36
a d m in istra to riu s 49 an g u stiare 50 b e n e d i c e r e { - 10 c u r s e )
a d m ira ri 25, 59 a n i m a 16 22
a d n u n t ia t o r 45 an im ae q u u s 49 b e n e d i c t i o n e s 18
a d o r a r e 37 a n i m o s i t a s 54 b e n e d ic tu s 50
a d p e tito r 45 an n i ( = lo n g p e r io d o f b en eplacitu s 50
a d p o n e r e 23 t i m e ) 17 b im a tus 45 ■
a d p r e t i a r e 51 a n n u s 20 b l a s p h e m a r e ( in ) 25
ad p ro p iare 5[ a n t e 6 1 , 84 botrus 32
a d p r o x i m a r e 51 a n t e q u a m 12 9, 13 3 b r a b iu m 43
a d u e r s u m 84 an x ia ri 50 b r a c h i u m 15, 19
a d u l e s c e n s 43 ap o stata 32 breu iare 50
a d u n a r e 51 a p o s t a t a r e 33 b u c c e ll a 47 ·
a e d i f i c a r e 5 3 , 57 a p o sto la tu s 45 b u c c in a r e 50
!4 4 Index of Latin Words
b u llire 50 circ u m o rn a tu s 50 co n la c ta n e u s 47
b u rd o 47 c i r c u m s p e c t o r 44 c o n l u c t a r i 51
b y s s i n u m 47 c i r c u m u a l l a r e 51 c o n m a c u l a r e 51
c ir c u m u c n t io 45 co n m a n d e re 5r
c a d e r e 22 c l a m y s 44 c o n m a n c j u c a r e 51
c a e lu m 43 c la r if ic a r e 53 c o n p a t i 5Γ
c a e lu m caeli 20 c lo d u s 43 c o n p l a n t a r e 51
ca em en tariu s 49 c o a d u n a r e 51 c o n q u is it io 55
c a e n a 43 co a e q u a lis 49 c o n r e g n a r e 5r
c a lc ia m e n t u m 43 c o a g u l a r e 51 c o n r e s u s c i t a r e 51
c a l u a r i a 4 n. c o a m b u l a r e 51 c o n s a n g u in e u s 49
c a m u s 47 - c o a n g u s t a r e 51 c o n s e n io r 48
ca p e re 39, 59 c o a p t a r e 51 co n so la ri 59
ca p illatu ra 46 c o c h le a 47 c o n sp a rsio 43
c a p s e l l a 47 co h abitare 5 r c o n s p e c t o r 44
ca ptiu are 50 co lap h izare 33 c o n s u m m a t io 55
captiu itas 56 c o l a p h u s 32 c o n s u m m a t o r 45
c a r a c t e r 2 9 , 44 c o l l e c t a 47 co n te m tib ilis 48
ca rissim u s ( = α γ α πη τ ό ς ) c o llig e r e 44, 57 c o n t r a 85
67, 68 c o l ly r id a m ( a c c . ) 65 c o n t r a r i u s 57
c a r it a s 4 n. com bustura 46 c o n tritio 45
ca s tifica r e 53 co m m e m o ra ri 36 c o n u e r s a t i o 55
ca su la 46 co m m en d aticiu s 49 c o n u e r t e r e 58
c a t a 84 c o m m u n i c a r e 57 c o n u e s c i 51
c a t a c ly s m u s 32 c o m m u ta re 44 co n u iu if ic a re 53
ca ta p la sm a re 33 c o m p a s s io 9 n. c o r 15
c a ta ra cta e 32 c o m p e d ir e 50 c o ra m 99
ca th e ch iza re 33 co m p ed itu s 48 c o r d a t u s 48
ca t h e d r a 32 c o m p la c e re 59 c o r n u 15
c a t t a 47 c o m p la c itu s 49, 66 co r r e p t io 55
c a u e r e 126 co m p o situ s 50 c o r r i p e r e 44
c a u m a 32 c o m p r e h e n d e r e 44 c o r r u m p e r e 44
c a u s a 54 c o m p u n g e r e 57 c o rru p tib ilis 48
c e la r e 82 c o n c o r p o r a lis 49 co tid ie 43
ce lla riu m 46 c o n cu p isc e n tia 46 c ra p u la ri 50
c e n a c u lu m 43 c o n c u t e r e 57 c r a p u la t u s 48
certari 59 c o n d e r e 54 n . c r a t e r 32, 65
ce ru ic a tu s 48 c o n d i g n u s 48, 49 c r e a r e 5 4 n.
c e r u i x 15 c o n d it io 54 creatu ra 46
ce te 34 co n du cticiu s 49 credentes ir o
c h a o s 44 co n electus 50 cre m iu m 46
c h a ra d rio n 34 c o n f e s s i o 54 c r y p t a 32
c h a r is m a 32, 44 c o n fid e r e ( s u p e r ) 25 cu c u m e r a r iu m 46
cid aris 32 con figu ratu s 49 c u d e r e 50
cin c to riu m 46 c o n f l a t i l e 47 c u m 9 9 , 129, 130
c i r c a , c ir c u m , c i r c i t e r 84 c o n f l a t i o 45 cu sto d itio 45
c i r c u m a e d i f i c a r e 51 c o n fo r m is 49
c i r c u m c i n g e r e 51 c o n f u n d e r e ( f a c i e m ) 16 d a m u la 46
c ir c u m d a t io 45 c o n f u n d i 36, 6 0 d a re 23
c i r c u m f o d e r e 51 c o n f u s i o 54 d e 99
c i r c u m f u l g e r e 51 co n iu g a lis 49 d e a m b u l a c r u m 46
c i r c u m l e g e r e 51 c o n i a b o r a r e 51 d e b e r e 2 2 , 9 0 , 97 n
Index of Latin Words 145
d e c a l u a r e 51 d isca lce a tu s 50 e th n icu s 32
d e c a n t a r e 51 d isce n te s n o etiam 63
d e c e r t a r e 3 3 η , 51 d i s c e p t a r e 51 e t s i 131
d e c e t 81 d is c ip lin a t u s 48 e u a c u a r c 58
d ecim are 50 d is co lu s 32 e u a n g e liz a r c 33
d e cip u la 46 d i s c o o p e r i r e 51 eu asio 45
d e co lla re 5r d is cretio 45 e u c h a ris 32
d e fe r r e 58 d is c r e t o r 45 e x 100
deferu ere 5r d i s c r i m i n a r e 51 exasperare (os D o m in i)
d e f ic e r e (in ) 25 d is c u b it u s 45, 56 16
d e f r a u d a r e 51 d isertitu d o 46 e x a s p e r a t r ix 45
d efun ctio 45 d is sim u la re 58 e x a u d it io 45
d e g l u t i r e 51 \ f d ith a la s su s 32 e x c e lle n tio r n o
d e h o n e s t a r e 51 d iu in ita s 9 η . e x c e r e b r a r e 51
d ein d e 6r d o cib ilis 35, 48 e x c o l a r e 51 . . . .. . .
d e i t a s 9 n. d o c t r ix 45 ex co ria re 5 r
d e latu ra 46 d o m in a ri 36 e x e d r a 32
d e lib a t io 45 d o n e c 129, 130 ex h ib ere 90
d e l i r a m e n t u m 4 6 , 47 d o r m ir e 58 e x h o r t a r i 125
d em e n tare 50 d o r m ita tio 45 ex ire 66
d e m i n o r a t i o 45 d u c a tu s 45 exo ssare 50
d e m o liri 59 d u lc o r 45 e x p e d i t 9Γ
d e m o r a t i o 45 d u lco rare 50 e x p e n s a 47
d e n i g r a r e 51 d u m 129, 130 e x p e r s 94
d e o rsu m 68, 69 d u m m o d o 6 2 , 12 9 e x p e r t u s 47
d ep ositio 55 e x p o lia r i 35
d e p re c a b ilis 48 e c c e 3 0 , 124 e x p o rrig e re 5[
d e p r e c a r i 125 e f f u g e r e 51 e x p ro b ra re 2r
d e s i d e r a r e 2 3 , 9 7 n. e g e r e 97 n. e x s e c r a m e n t u m 46
d esideratissim us n o e ic e r c 43 e x s u f f l a r e 51
d e s id e r iu m 23, 56 e ie c t r ix 45 e x s u p e r a r e 44
d e sp e ra b ilis 48 e le u a to r 44 e x s u r g e r e 44
d e s p o l i a t o r 47 e lo n g a r e 5 r , 59 ex ta sis 32
d e sp o n sa tio 45 e l o q u i u m 5 5 , 57 e x to lle n tia 46
d e s p u m a r e 51 e l u c e s c e r e 51 e x t r a 85
desternere 5r e l u c i d a r e 51 e x t r e m u s 94
d e s u p e r 69, 00‫ן‬ em an are 59
d e tra c tio 55 e m e n d a r e 58 f a c e r e 22, 23
d e u i a r e 51 e m i n e n t i o r 1 10 f a c i e s 16
deuitare 5 t em p ticiu s 49 f a c u la 47
d ia b o licu s 32 e m u n c to r iu m 46 fa ls ilo q u u s 50
d ia b o lu s 3 2 e n c e n ia 32 festin are 58
d i a c o n u s 65 e n im 62 fiala 2 9 , 44
d i c e r e 3 7 , 126 e o q u o d 133 f ic u ln e a 47
d i d r a g m a 44 e p in ic io n 34 fig m e n tu m 46
d i e s 17 e p is t u la 43 filius 2 0
d i f f a m a r e 51 e r g a 85 fixura 46
d iffid en tia 55 e r g o 62 fo ca riu s 49
d iffu g ere 5 c e r u c t a r e 22, 58 f o d e r e ( a u r e s ) 15 η .
d ile c t is s im u s 68, 110 eru g o 43 foras 6 9
d im ittere 58 et 62 foris 69
d io n is iu s 43 eten im 62 f o r m id a r e 25
2G 1 2 U
146 Index of Latin Words
f o r s i t a n 61 h u m ilia r e 50 in f a t u a r e 51
f o r t e 61 h u m i l i t a s 9 n , 45 in f id e lis 6 6
f r a m e a 47 h y b e r n a lis 48 in fla tio 55
fr a u d u le n tia 46 h y d r ia 32 i n g e m c s c e r e 43
fr ix u s 67 in h o n o r a r e 51
fru ctifica re 53 iatn n u n c 61 in in t e r p r e t a b ilis 48
fru i 97 i a m q u e 105 in la m c n t a t u s 4 9
fu n d ib u lu m 46 ibi 6 r i n l u c c s c c r c 51
f u n g i 97 i d c i r c o 61 in lu m in a r c 23. 3 6
f u n i c u l u s 18, 5 5 i d e m 72 im m a r c e s c ib ilis 48
f u n is 18, 55 id o lo th ytu s 32 in m c m o r a t io 48
ie i u n a r e 5 0 i n in in u e r c 51
g a l l i c u l a c 34 i e i u n a t i o 45 i n o b o e d ie n t ia 4 6
gau dim on ium 46 i g i t u r 61 in o r d in a t io 48
g a z o p h y l a c i u m 32 i g n it u s 48 in p a c n i t c n s 4 9
g e n i c u l u m 47 ig n o s c e r e 90 in p o r t a b ilis 4 8
g e n i m e n 46 ille 72, 78, 79 i n p r o p e r a r e 51
g e r m in a r e 59 i l l i c 61 in q u ie t a r e 50
g ig a s 32 i m m o l a r e 44 in q u ie t u d o 4 6
g i g n e r e 5 4 n. i m m u t a r e ( o s ) 16 in q u in a m e n tu m 46
g l o r if ic a r e 53 i m p e d i m e n t u m 44 in r a t io n a b ilis 48
g lo rificari 60 im p e r a r e r25 in r e p r e h c n s i b il is 48
g ra b a ttu m 32, 44 i m p l e r e 37 in r it a t r ix 45
g r a t i f i c a r e 5 3 , 5 9 , 64 i m p l e r e ( m a n u m ) 16 i n s c r u t a b ilis 48
gratus 2 r im p ro p e riu m 46 in s e n s a tu s 4 9 , 50
g r o s s it u d o 46 in 8 9 , i o r . 1 0 2 in s p ir a t io 45
g r o s s u s 47 in a c ce s sib ilis 48 in s t it o r 44
g y r a r e 33 in aq u o su s 49 in su fila re 51
in a rg e n ta tu s 50 i n t e lle g e r e 43
h a b e r e w i t h in f . 3 8 i n c e s s a b i l i s 3 5 , 48 in t e n d e r e 58
h a r e n a 44 i n c i p e r e 10 5 in t e n t a t o r 4 5 , 95
h a ru n d o 44 i n c o l a 55 in t e n t io 55
h a u t 44 i n c o l a t u s 45 in t e r 7 0, 85
h e b d o m a s 65 in co n fu s ib ilis 48 in t e r e s t 81
h e lia s 44 in c o n m u n ic a b ilis 48 in t e r p r e t a r i 6 0
h c lla d a m ( a c c .) 65 in co n su m m a tio 45, 48 in t in g e r e 43
h e r e d it ä r e 50 i n c o n s u m m a t u s 49 in t o n a r e 8 0
h ic 61, 72, 78, 79 in co rru p tib ilis 48 in t ra 85
h ie m s 43 i n c r a s s a r e 51 in tu s 6 q
h ie r e m ia s 44 in cred ib ilis 48 i n u e s t ig a b ilis 48
h ie r ic h o 44 in cr e d u lita s 45 i n u e t e r a r e 22
h i e r u s a le m 44 in cre p a tio 45 in u ic e m 70
h o lu s 44 in d e c lin a b ilis 48 io h a n n e s 44
h o n e s ta s 55 in d eficien s 49 ip s e 7 2 , 79
h o n o ratio r n o in dictio 56 is 72
h o n o r if ic a r e 53 i n d i g e n s ( c o r d e ) 15 Israh el 44
h o n o rific en tia 46 in d is c ip lin a tu s 49 iste 72
h o ro lo g iu m 32 in d u m en tu m 46 i t a 61
h o r t a r i 12 5 i n d u r a r e ( c c r u i c e m ) 15 i t a q u e 61
h o rtu lan u s 49 i n e b r i a r i 51 iu b ilu m 55
h u i u s m o d i 73 in e x te rm in a b ilis 48 iu d a iz a r e 33
h u m c ru lu s 46 in e x t in g u ib ilis 48 i n d i c a r e ( d e ) 25
Index of Latin Words 147
j u d i c i u m 5 5 , 57 m a g n a lia 47 w ho have been lon g

i u ra re 108 m a g n ific a re 24, 53 d e a d ) 19
iu ss io 45 m agn ificari 60 m o tab ilis 4 8
iu stificare 53 m a le d ic e r e 36 m u ltilo q u iu m 21, 47
i u s t i f i c a t i o 57 m aleficu s 55 m u l t i p l i c a r e 2 1 , 24
j u s t i t i a 5 5 , 57 m a lig n a re 50 m u l t i t u d o 75
iu u e n c u la 47 m a litia 64 m u ltu s e s s e 24
iiixta 8 5 m a lle ato r 45 m u ratu s 48
m a m illa 47 m u rm u rari 59
m a n cip atu s 45 m u rra 43
la c r im a 43 m a n d a r e 126 m u rratu s 48
1a c u s 5 5 mane 6r m u scip u la 48
la e s u r a 46 m a n i c a r e 51 m utato rium 46
la e tif ic a re 53 m utuo 70
m a n u s 16
l a g u n c u l a 47 m are ( = the W e s t , and m y s t e r i u m 9 n.
laicu s 32
p o s s i b l y t h e S o u t h ) 18
la m e n ta re 59 m a r e (abi..) 6 6 n atale 47
lam b ere 66 n ath an a h e l 44
m a rg a ritu m 65
l a m i a 47 n a t i o 75
m a tu r ita s 45
la m p a s 65 m e d ia re 50, 59 natiu itas 45
lato m u s 32 n a u c le r iu s 32
m e d ie tas 55
lau dari 60 n a u f r a g a r e 50
m e d it a r i 58
le p u sc u lu s 46 m e d iu s 94 n e 1 2 4 , 12 5
le u a r e 22 n ecessario r 66
m elota 32
le u n c u lu s 46 m e m o ra ri 95 n e c e s s a r i u s 9 7 n.
lib ato riu m 46 m e n s u r a b i li s 48 n e c e s s e 97 n.
libet 8r m e n s u r a r e 50 n e c e s s i t a s 9 7 n.
lib u m 55 m e n t i r i ( = to s u b m i t ) 2 2 necnon 6r
l i c e t 8 1 , 129 , 131
m e r c e n n a r i u s 44 n e g le g e r e 43
liciato riu m 46 n em o 73, 94
m e rid ia re 50
lig a tu ra 46 ne o m n in o 6 r
m essio 45
l i g n u m 55 n e o p h y t u s 32
m e t i b o r 67
lin g u atu s 48 n e q u is sim u s ( = πο ι >η ρ ύ ί )
m etiri 60, 90
lin g u o s u s 49 68
m e u s (v o c .) 66
lin ire 66 m ilia 44 n e u lt r a 61
lin te a m e n 46
m in a 28 n igred o 46
litho strotu s 32 m in are 50 n im ie ta s 45
littera 44
m in istrare 90 n im is u a ld e 6 r
litus 44 nisi 27, 131, 132
m i n o r a r e 51
lo n g aeu u s 50 n o cere 36, 90
m i r i fi ca r e 5 3
lo n g a n im is 50 m is e r a t io 57 n o m in a t is s im u s 110
lo n g a n im it a s 9 n, n o m is m a 32
m is e r e r i 25
l o q u e l la 44 non 27, 63
m i s e r i c o r d i a 18, 57
l o q u i ( a d c o r ) 15 n o n . . . n e q u e 61
m itra 32
loqu i (w ith d at.) ; n u b e r e 5 8 , 91
m ittere 58
lu cu sta 43 n ullus 73
m o d ic u s 57
lu te r 32 n u m q tiid 63, 106
m ontes D ei ( = g o o d ly
lu x 76
m o u n t a in s ) 20 nuptus 45
ly r a 29 n u sq u am 63
m o r t ic in u s 49
m o rtificare 53
m a ch in a 28 m o rtificatu s 20 ob 86
m a e re re 43 m o rtu o s sa ecu li ( = those o b d u ctu s 45
U 2
!48 Index o f Latin W ords
o b d u lc a r e 52 p a r a p s is 3 2 , 43 p ig e t 8 t
o b d u r a r e 52 p a r a s c e u e 32 p ig n u s 32
o b fir m a r e 52 p a r a tu r a 46 p ig r e d o 46
o b lig a t io 56 p a r it e r 70 p ig r it a r i 51
o b m u t e s c e r e 52 p a r o c h u s 29 p in g u e d o 4 6
o b o e d it io 45 p a r s 94 p in g u is 57
o b r iz u m 47 p a r t ic e p s 94 p in n a c u lu m 46
o b s c u r a r i 59 p a r t ic ip a t io 21 p is t ic u s 32
o b s e c r a r e 125 p a r u u s 57 p la c it u s 50
o b s t u p e s c e r e 52 p a s c u a li s 48 p la c o r 45
o b t e n e b r a r e 52 p a s s ib ilis 48 p la g a r e 50
o b t u r a r e 52 p a s s io 9 n. p la g ia r iu s 49
o b u ia m ( ir e ) 91 p a te r n it a s 45 p la s m a r e 33
o b u ia r e 5 0 p a u e r e 26 p li c a r e 50
o b u m b r a r e 52 p a u lo m in u s 6 r p lu e r e 5 9 , 80
o c u lu s 16 p a u u s 65 p o llic e r i 108
o d i 60 p e d a g o g u s 43 p o lli n c t o r 45
o d ib ilis 48 p e lli c e u s 49 p o n e r e ( c o r ) 15
o d o r a m e n t u m 46 p e n e s 86 p o p u lu s 75, 77
o lfa c to r iu m 47 p e n e t r a b ilis 48 p o s s id e r e 58
o m n im o d u s 50 p e n t e c o s t e 32 p o st 86
o n u sta re 5 c p e r 86 p o stq u a m 129, 134
o p e r a t o r 44 p e r a n t iq u u s 49 p o s tu la r e r2 5
o p e r im e n t u m 46 p e r c u s s u r a 46 p o ta r e 59
o p e r t o r iu m 46 p e r e f flu e r e 52 p o te n s 2 t
o p in io 55 p e r e g r in a r i 58 p o tiri 97
o p o r t e t 8 r , 97 n. p e r f ic e r e ( a u r e s ) 15 n. p o tu m d a r e 115
o p o r t u n u s 44 p e r g r a n d is 49 p r a e 100
o p p o n e re 58 p e r ip s im a 32 p r a e b e r e 90
o p tu li 43 p e r i r e 58 p r a e c e lle r e 3 8 , 52
o p u s 97 p e r is c e lid a s 34 p r a e c e s s o r 45
o r a t io 55 p e r lin ir e 52 p r a e c ip e r e 9 0 , 126
o r d it u s 67 p e r lu c id u s 49 p r a e c la r u s 49
o r f a n u s 44. p e rm a g n ific u s 49 p r a e c o g i t a r e 52
o r i g in a li s 48 p e r m o d ic u s 49 p r a e d e s t in a r e 52
o rn a t u s 45 p e r m u n d a r e 52 p r a e f e c t u s 47
o s 16, 65 p e r p a u c u s 49 p r a e f in ir e 52
o s a n n a 44 p e r s e n ilis 49 p r a e g n a s 44 '
o ssu m 65 p e r s t illa r e 52 p r a e g r a n d is 49
o u i le 4 n. p e r s u a d e r e 125 p r a e o c c u p a r e 64
p e r s u a s ib ilis 48 p r a e o r d in a r e 52
p a c a t is s im u m (~(·ι ρ η - p e r t in e r e ( d e ) 26 p r a e s a g u s 49
vucüv) 68 p e r t r a n s ir e 52 p r a e s e p e 65
p a c i f i c a r e 53 p e r u a lid u s 49 p r a e s t a b ilis 4 9
p a c if ic u s 57 p e r u r g e r e 52 p r a e s t o la t io 45
p a e n it e n t ia 43 p e s 16 p r a e t e r 87
p a e n it e r e 5 9 , 80 p e s s im a r e 5 r p r a e t e r flu e r e 52
p a la t h a 32 p e t e r e 36, 124 p r a e t e r g r e d i 52
p a p ilio 47 p h a la n x 32 p r a e t e r ir e 58
p a p y r io 32 p h ilo s o p h ia 2S p r a e t e r m it t e r e 52
p a r a c le t u s 32 p h ilo s o p h u s 29 p r a e u a lid u s 49
p a r a d is u s 9 n. p h y la c t e r iu m 32 p r a e u a r ic a t io 55
Index o f Latin W ords 149
p r e c a r i 125 q u a m u is 12 9 , 132 r e n u n c u lu s 46
p r e n d id e r u n t 67 q u a n t u s 123, 28 ‫נ‬ r e p r e h e n s i b i li s 4 8
p ressu ra 46 q u a s i 1 2 9 , 132 r e p r o b u s 49
p r im it iu u s 49 q u a t e r n io 47 r e p r o m is s o r 45
p r im o g e n it u s 5 0 q u a tt u o r 44 r e p r o p it ia r e 5 2
p r im u s (fir s t o f t w o ) 68 q u em ad m od um 62 r e s ip i s c e n t i a 9 n .
p r in c ip a lis 48 q u e r e ll a 55 r e s ip is c o 9 η .
p r in c i p a r i 51 q u e r u lo s u s 4 9 r e s o lu t io 45
p r iu s q u a m 129, 133 q u i 7 3 , 76, 127 r e s p e r g e r e 52
p ro io x q u ia 1 1 9 , 1 2 0 , 1 2 1 , 129 r e s p ic e r e ( a d ) 26
p r o b a t ic a 3 2 q u ic u m q u e 127 r e t a r d a r e 59
p r o e li a t o r 44 q u id ( in t e r r o g .) 73 r e tia c u lu m 46
p r o e liü m 4 3 q u id a m 6 8 r e t in e r e 58
p r o lo n g a r e 52 q u id e m 63 re tro 6 9 , 87
p ro m ereri 60 q u id n a m 6 3 r e t r u d e r e 52
p r o m it t e r e 108 q u in 132 r e u e la r e ( a u r e m ) 15
p r o m p t u a r iu m 22 q u is 7 4 , 9 4 rh eto r 29
p r o p a la r e 52 q u o a d 129, 132 r o g a r e 124
p r o p e 87 q u o d 6 3 , 1 1 8 , 1 19, 120, r u b r ic a t u s 48
p r o p h e t ic u s 22 1 2 t , 12 9 , 133, 134 ru d is 57
p r o p h e t i z a r e 33 q u o m in u s 133
p r o p it ia r i 5 0 , 52 q u om od o 62 s a b b a t iz a r e 33
p r o p it ia t o r iu m 46 q u o n ia m 6 3 , 1 1 9 , 120, sacram en tu m 9 n.
p r o p t e r 87 121, I29 s a c r if ic a r e 53
p r o p u r g a r e 52 q u o t 123 s a e c u la r i s 57
p r o s c in d e r e 52 q u o t ie n s 4 4 . 129 s a e c u lu m 19, 2 0 , 5 6
p r o s e l y t u s 32 q u o tq u o t 128 sa g e n a 32
p r o s p e c t o r 45 q u o u s q u e 62 . s a g in a r e 5 0
p ro sp e ra re 59 s a g it t a r e 50
p r o t e s t a r i 52 s a ls u g o 46
prou t 6r r a t io n a b ilis 48 s a lt e m 6 3
p r o x im a r e 5 0 r e a e d i f i c a r e 52 s a lu a r i 6 0
p t is a n e 32 r e c li n a r e 5 9 s a lu a t o r 9
p u b lic a n u s 411. r e c lin a t o r iu m 46 s a lu i f i c a r e 53
p u d e t 81 re co rd a ri 59 s a lu t a r e 47
p u lm e n t a r iu m 4 6 r e c u b it u s 4 5 , 56 s a lu t e s 18
p u p i llu s 64 ^ r e d d i t o r 44 s a n c t if ic a r e 5 3
p u rp u r a 28 r e d e m p t o r i o n , 56 s a n c t if ic a tio 56
p u s illa n im is 4 9 r e d itu s 5 6 s a n c t if ic iu m 4 6
p u s illu s 5 7 r e e x p e c t a r e 52 s a n c t u a r iu m 47
p u ta , p u t a s , e tc . 6 3 r e fe c t io 5 6 s a n g u is u g a 4 8
p u tre d o 46 re fig u r a re 52 s a r a b a la 47
p y t h o 32 r e f o c i lla r e 5 2 sarra 44
p y t h o n ic u s 3 2 r e fr ig e r iu m 4 6 , 47 sa tra p a 32
p y t h o n is s a 32 r e g e n e r a r e 52 s c a b illu m 43
r e g e n e r a t io 9 n. s c a la 6 6
q u a d r id u a n u s 4 9 r e g n a r e 3 7 , 58 s c a n d a liz a r e 3 3 , 64
q u a e r e r e 126 r e g u lu s 4 6 s c e n o f a c t o r iu s 49
q u a lis 123, 127 r e in u it a r e 52 s c e n o p e g ia 32
q u am 30 r e lig i o s i t a s 45 s c h is m a 3 2 .
q u a m d iu 132 r e m a n d a r e 52 sco p a re 50
q u a m q u a m 129, J34 r e m u n e r a t o r 45 s c r u t a n t e s s c r u t in io 2 0
150 Index o f Latin W ord s
s e c u n d o p r im u s 49 s u b in t r a r e 52 t e m ta re a n d te m p t. 43
s e c u n d u m 87 s u b iu g a lis 48 44 ’
s e c u s . 6 9 , 88 s u b lim a r e 52 te s ta m e n tu m 56
s e d 63 s u b m in is t r a tio 4 5 , 95 t e s t if ic a r e 5 3 , 60
s e d u c t o r 45 s u b n a u ig a r e 52 t e s tim o n iu m 56, 57
s e m ic in c t iu m 47 s u b n e r u a r e 52 t h a r s u s 44
s e m it a 18 s u b s a n n a r e 52 th eatru m 28 *
s e n s a t u s 50 s u b s a n n a t o r 45 t h e s a u r iz a r e 33
s e p a r a t o r 45 s u b s i li r e 52 t h e s a u r u s 29
s e p u lc h r u m 44 s u b s t a n t ia 56 t im e r e 2 6 , 108, 126
s e r m o ( = th in g , m a tt e r) s u b t e r 8 9 , 102 tim o r a t u s 4 8 , 50
18 : ;‫׳‬ ■ V■ ';;. s u b tu s 6 9 , 88 t itu lu s 56
s e r o t in u s 4 9 ^ ■. ■■ s u ffe r e n tia 46 to n itru s 66
s e r t u m 66 s u ffic ie n tia 46 to p a z io n 3 4
s e r u ir e 90 su ffla to riu m 4 6 to r n a tilis 48
s e s c e n t i 44 s u m m it a s 98 to rren s 8 n.
s i 27, 122, 123, 129 s u p e r 8 9 , 9 0 , 102 t r a c t a b ilis 48
s i c 62 s u p e r a b u n d a r e 52 t r a d u c e r e 82
s i c e r a 32 s u p e r a d u lt u s 5 0 t r a d u c t io 56
s ic u t . . . et 62 s u p e r a e d if ic a r e 52 tra n s 88
s ig n if ic a r e 53 s u p e r c r e s c e r e 52 t r a n s fig u r a r e 52
s i le r e 58 s u p e r e x t e n d e r e 52 t r a n s m ig r a r e 59
s im ila r i 51 s u p e r g a u d e r e 52 t r a n s m ig r a t io 5 6
s im ilis 9 2 n. s u p e r g lo r io s u s 49 t r a n s n a u ig a r e 52
s im ilit u d o 56 s u p e r in d u e r e 52 t r a n s p la n t a r e 52
sim u l 6 2 , 129 s u p e r i n p e n d e r e 52 t r a n s u a d a r i 52
s im u la c r u m 4 3 , 44 s u p e r la u d a b ilis 49 t r a n s u e r t e r e 52
s in d o n 32 s u p e r l u c r a r i 52 t r e m e b u n d u s 49
s in e 101 s u p e r o r d i n a r e 52 t r e m e r e 59
s in g u la r is 57 s u p e r s e m in a r e 52 t r e p i d a r e 20
s iq u id e m 63 s u p e r s u b s t a n t ia lis 49 t r ib u la 65 ,
s it u la 47 7 s u p e r u a c u u s 49 t r ib u la r e 5 0
s o lilo q u iu m 9 n. s u p e r u e s t ir e 52 t r ib u s u ic ib u s ( = o ft e n )
s o lli c i t u s 44 s u p r a 88 }l
s o m n ia t o r 45 s u p r a s e d e r e 52 t r i c a r e 50
s o r b it iu n c u la 47 s u r s u m 69 ,trie ris 32
s p ira c u lu m 46 s u s c e p t o r 44, 56 t r is t a r i 51 _
s p ir a m e n t u m 46 s u s t in e n t ia 46 t r i s t e g a 32
s p ir it a lis 43 s u s t i n e r e 58 t r it u r a r e 50
sp o n sa re 50 s u s u r r a t o r 45 t r iu m p h a r e 36
s p o r t a 32 su us 7r tu n c 62
s t a b ilim e n t u m 47 s y m p h o n ia 32 tu r b a 75
s t a b u la r iu s 49 tu r ib u lu m 44
s t a b u lu m 5 6 tus 4 4
s t r a t o r iu m 46 t a b it a 4 4 ‫־‬ tu ta m e n tu m 4 6
s t u d e r e 91 t a e d e r e 5 9 , 81 t y p h o n ic u s 32
s t u lt ilo q u iu m 47 ta le n tu m 28
s u a d e r e 3 6 , 125 t a lis 127 u a c u it a s 5 6
s u a d ib i li s 4 8 > ta m q u a m 129, 133 u a c u u s 57
s u b 89, 102 ta n t u s 128 u a le f a c e r e 5 2
s u b c i n e r i c i u s 49 te lo n iu m 32 u a n ilo q u iu m 47
s u b in fe r r e 52 tem p o ra n eu s 49 u a n ilo q u u s 48
Index o f Latin W ords 115 ‫ז‬
u a s e le c t io n is 20 u ir 16, 18, 74 , u sq u e 27, 62, 83 .
u b i 6 1 , 129, 133 u ir a t u s 48 u s q u e d u m 130 .
u e lle 2 6 , 5 8 , 126 u jr g a 19, 5 6 u s q u e q u a q u e 62
u e n c r a b i li s 48 u ir o r 45 u s q iie q u o 62
u e r b u m ( = t ilin g , m a t u ir t u s 5 6 ut 1 18, 119, 120, 12 1-,
t e r ) 18 u is it a t io 56 124, 1 2 5 , 129, 133
u e r o 64 u it u la m e n 46 u t e r q u e 74
u e r s i p e lli s 48 u iu e r e 23 uti 97
u e r u m t a m e n 64 u iu if ic a r e 53 u tin a m 133
u e s c i 97 u lt r a 88 u tiq u e 63
u e s t ib u lu m 46 u m e r u s 44 u tr u m n a m 133
u e t a r c 66 u n a n im is 5 0
u e t e r a r e 51 u n g e n t u m 43 z e la r e 3 3 , 3 6
u ia 18 u n i c o lo r 50 z e lo t y p ia 32
u id e r e 5 8 , 126 u n ic o r n is 5 0 z e lu s 32
u id e r i 9 0 u n ig e n it u s 5 0 z iz a n iu m 3 2
u ilic a t i o 45 u n o c u lu s 50 z m a r a g d u s 44
u ilic u s 44 , u n u s 6 6 , 6 8 , 73, 7 9, 94 z m y r n a 44
u in c t u s n o u n u s q u is q u e 74 z o n a 29
IV. INDEX OF PASSAGES OF SCR IPTU R E

G en . PAGE G en . PAGE G en. PAGE
1. 2 . . 16 4. 4 . . 26 19. 30 . 108
' 4 . 120 22 • .45 21. 21 • •93
5 . .21 5. 4 . ‫ ז‬34 22. 16 ϊ . . 86
7 . .89 6. 6 . .119 17 • · 23
8 . . 68 7 • •27 23. 6 73. 132
11 59) 86 7. 4. 12, 17 . ·56, 97 24. 7 • · 37
12 . .87 8. II • · 83 13 . . 87
14 . . 20 9. 2 . . 72 24 . . 79
15 . . 36 11. 8 • · 39 30 37! 38
2r . .48 12. 14 . . 67' 32 • · 5X
26- 7 · ‫ י‬- 83 13. 10 - 133 25. 8 • ; 95
2. 5 80, 133 18 . .8 6 26. 9 . 126
9 • IX5 16. 5 . 116 27. 42 . 120
13 • 93 6 . . 81 28. 9 . . 99
18--20 . . 92 n. 17. 17 . 121 29. 2 • ·S I
20 . . 14 18. 4 . 117 26 • · 93
23 . 100 18 • xx3 33 . 116
24 . . 20 32 . 125 30. 6 . . 92
3. i . 126 19. I 77· 98 32 • · 33
3 . 126 4 . 114 35 • . 50
10 63‫ ל‬133 *4 . 109 38 . . 84
16 • •36 17 • · 85 31. 2 • · 17
18 • . 59 23 . 117 2-‫־‬5 • · 85
4. i ' . . • •58 24 . . 80 47 . 8 n.
!52 Index o f Passages o f Scriptui're
G en . PAGE E xod. D eut . PAGE
31. 50 . . 25. 25 1. 1-5
32. 6 . .
• 99 ‫ ־‬97 . 88
114 26. 4 . 70 7 •92
35. 8 . . • 77 ;24 . 68 2· 3
36. 31 . . 27. 14 • 85
r33 . 66 3. i
37. 5 . - 119 29. 14 ‫ ־‬83
•85 8 . 88
14 . . . 85 32. i 19 n. 4· 5
122 134
15 · · 23 19 n. 14 126
19 . · 45, 70 33. 11 * 83 21 85 > 125
32 . . 122 34. 11 . 84 40
38. 17-18 . 36. 97
• SI 30 . 62 42 84
39. 19 . . . 91 32 • 51 5. 4
41. i . . 12 I 38. 31 IOI 29
83
22
10 . . • 52 6. i 26,
η . . ■ 49 L ev . 7. 11 126
*5 * · 12 I 22
. 61 4. 11 . 18 26
35 . . 9. 25 125
42. 7 . . . 91
7. i • 95
18 14. 18 34
13 . . . 90 132 15. 6
1.6 . , 27 . 16 37
122 20. 9
21 . . . 70 38 126 24. 6
83
11. 19 • 34 58
25 - · . 92 25. 4 92 n.
30 . . 12 t 13. 16, 25‫ י‬39 • 45
28 26. 10 37
33 . - . 46
• 58 28. 13 89
43. 25 . . 121 53 I2I
14. 42 . 66 29. 50 58
44. 31 . . 121 20 90
46. 7 . . . 62 16. 27 . 69
31. 20 58
47. 31 . . 12 n. 19. 15 . 92 32. 36
50. 17 . . 20. 27 • 32 33. 12
25
125 . 91 no
21. 3 23 18
E xod. Num.
2. 12 . . 121 5. 19 90
14 . . . 18 6 . 21 86 Joshua .
3. 6 . . .85 12. 8 83
8. 13 . . . 14 i r 125 8. 6 I2I
9. 18-23 · • 59 16 ( 13. Ο 98 9. i . 88
23 · · . 80 13. 2 0 48 5 . 49
24 . . 128 21 57 15 121
11. 2 . . . 16 14. 2 59 10. 28 • 63
4 . . . 94 4 ‫ ז ל‬14. 11 • 83
12. 29 . . . 94 16. 5 112 15. 5 . 94
14. 4, 17, 18 . 60 13 37 18 125
20 . . . 70 21. 4 81 >7· 5 . 18
24 . . 105 22. i 88 22. !9, 2 . 87
15. i . . . 44 33 132 19 I2I
16. 8 . . * 59 23. ro 16 29 118
18. 18 . . . . 88 24. r 85, r34 23. r . 49
19. 16 . . 105 9 73 11 120
20. 3 . . • 99 II r°5 13 120
10 . . •85 27. 11 92 24. 19 . 90
21. 17 . . • 23 31. so 34 26 . 49
Index o f Passages o f Scripture 153
JUD. PAGE I S am (I R eg .) page II S am . ( I I R e g .) p a g e
1. 6 . . .98 11. 2 . . ΙΟΙ 12. 11 . . . . 16
2. i . . 108 , 1 2 0 12. 12 . . 120 18 . . . 121
19 . . 134 14 . . . 16 20 . . . 124
2r . . rI7 23 . . 118 23 · . . 106
CO
00
• 97 13. i . . . 20 13. 3 0 . • . . 63
25 . . * 73 14 . i . . . 88 36 . . . . 71
4 . 12 . . 118 38 . . . 17 39 · • · · 59
5 . 14 . . • 83 39 . . . 99 14. 6 . . 70, 71
24 . . . 2r 15. i r . . 119 16. 7 . . . . 18
6. 22 . . • 83 12 . 100, 1 18 17. 28 . • · · 67
7‫״‬ 5 ) 6, 7 . 66 35 . . 119 IS. 3 - . . . 26
8 . . ‫ י‬89 16. 12 v · 115 10 . . . . 77
17 . . 106 17. 22 . 85,123 18 . . . . 56
25 * · . 94 29 . . . 18 19. 31 . . . . 82
S. 6 . . * 25 42 . . 115 42 · . 92, 102
22, 23 . ■ 37 46 . . 120 43 * . . . 97
11. 14 . . 49 . . . 79 22. 3 . . . . 44
*2 5
12. 6 . . 1 3 n. 55 . . .23 37 · . . . 69
14. 15 . . 125 56 . . 122 2 3 . 23 . . . . 49
15. 2 . . 120 1 8 . 11 . 9 9, 120 24. 3 · . . 128
7 · « *3 r 20. 2 . . . 82 10 . . · 125
T5 ‫י‬ · . 20 19 . ■ 114 13 · . . 122
16 . . . 20 22 . . . 85 16 . . 2 5, 102
16. ig . . • 59 22- 37 . . . 88
17. ' 5 - * . 16 SI . . . 20
I K ings (III R eg .)
9 · * 122 21. 4 . . .3 2
12 . . . 16. 11 . . . 86 2. 16 . . 16, 1 25
is. 5 . . 124 *3 . . .1 6 17 * • · 125
19. 2 8 . . 12 I 2 3 . 13 . . . 58 20 . . . . 16
20. 2 . . . I7 22 . . . 16 42 . . . 121
3 · · 1 19 2 5 . 17 . . . 20 4. 7 . . . .‫ ׳‬8 9
32 · · 12[ 25 . . . 20 5. 1 3 , 14 . . . 56
26, 3 3 , 34 . . 1 26 7. 2 . . . ‫׳‬. 4 6
R uth 26. i . . I OO 26 . . . . 46
2 7 . 10 . . . 85 S. 15 . . . . 51
1. 17 . · . 24
28. 8 . . I OI 44 · . . . 85
9 . · 123 10. 2 2 . . . . 65
;1 S am . (I R e g . ).
11. 2 8 . . . . 89
1. i . . 79 12. 22 . . . . 83
II S am . ( II R e g .)
16 . . 24 . . . . 16
23 . . 125 4. 2 . * 103 1 3 . 33 . . . . 16
3. 8 . . • 23 10 . . , 81 1 4 . 14 . . . . 97
9 . . 120 5 . 23 • · * 33 15. 5 . . . . 18
12 . . II7 6. 15 . . . 55 13 · . . ■ 8 11.
14 . . 120 16 . . . 52 19 . . . 124
21 . . 19 46, 6 5, 67 23 · • · · 35
7. 2 . , . 87 1 0. 9 . . 100 17. 3‫ ־‬4 . . 8n.
10 . . . 80 11. 7 . . 122 7 · . . . 17
9 . 15 . . ■ 15 ‫־‬ 16 . . 1 21 17 · . . 119
19 . . . 6 1 12. i • · . 73 18. 15 · . . .84
10. 22 . . 133 5 • 20, 23 19 . · * · 93
2G42 X
!5 4 Index o f P assages o f Scripture
I K ings (III R e g .) p a g e II C h r o n . PAG E E sther PAGE
19. 2 . . . 24 18. 19 . . .· 73 2. 1 8 . . . .
• · 49
2 0. 28 . . . 79 33 · · ■ 79 0. 13 * . 106
21. 2 . 91, 128 2 0. 33 . . . 60 8. i r . • 1 25
io , IS * . . . 22 21. 7. · · 108 9. 16 . . . 98
15 . . 1 19 24. 24 . . . 49 16 . 1 4 , .
• · 34
22. 6 » · » 22 35. 2 . . 125
20 • ‫ · ־‬73 9 · · . 6r J ob
25 . . .27
2. 9 . . . . . 22
27 • V . . . 97 E z r a (I E s d r .) 5. 7 . . . . 118
7.25 . . . . . 92 6. 2 8 . . . . 122
II K ings (IV : R eg . )/' 7. 7 . . . • I2I
3. 23 . . . 70 N e h . ( I f E s d r .) 10. i . . . . .81
4 . 17 . . 1 27 4, 4 . . . . .91 1 4 . 14 . . . ‫י‬ 120
5. 2 . . I OI 14 . . . 26 16. 9 . . . • · 50
8 . . I2I 13. 9 . . . 61 17.15 · . . • 45
II . . 120 20 . . . 69 . 16 . . . . 12 1
. . . 16 29 . . • 59
19. 4 . . . • I3I
13
. 120, 121 2 3 . 14 . . . . . 92
15
T0B. 2 4 . 11 . . . • · 50
T7 • 47? 100, 1 2 1
18 . . . 90 .61 26. 4 . . . . - 46
1. 19 · .
6. 2 0 . . 121 1 24 28. 4 . . . 95 ‫־‬Π .
3. 15 . ·
4. 8 . . .
8. 19 . 108, 1 2 0 20 . . 124 • · 45
9 . 26 . . . 27 5. 19 . . 124 30. 30 , . . • · 32
10. 21 . . . 16 27 . . 32. 12 . . . . 130
. 92
6. 14 . . 12 1 33. 29 . . . . . 17
32 • 5 9 ,8 1
12. i 7 10 . . 108 36. 3 . . . . . 44
. . .58
8 . 70 41. 15 . . . • · 45
■ · · 39 8■ T 5 · ·
1 6 . 14 83, 99, 100 9. i . . 124
17. 26 * · 133 5 · · . 46 P salms
19. 8 . . 120 8 . . .. 7 6 1. i . . . . . 30
2 0 . 17 . . . I I 7 11. 6 . . . 68 2. 11 . . . . . . 21
2 1 . 16 . . . 16 12. 4 . . 1 24 3· 4 ( 5) · · • · 83
23. 4 . . . 69 i. 7 (8) . . . .21
6 . . . 69 J udith 5 . 10 ( 1 1 ) . . . . 98
0. 3 · · 123 8. 2 (3) . . . . 87
I C hron .‫׳‬ 15 ‫־‬ · • 52 5 .(6 ) . . . . 21
6. 6 . . 130 9. 4 , . . . . 40
1. 2 2 . . . 61
11. 1 8 . . • 71 10. 3 (Hebr.) . . 60
11. 24 . . [ 10
12. 5 · · 124 20 (Hebr.) . . 92
16. 3 . . . 67
8 . . • 7* 11· 4 ( 10. 5) · . . 19
2 0. 3 • · · 65 10 . . • 36 12. 2 (11. 3 ) . . 27
21. 23 . . .65
1 3 . 12 . . * 33 4 (11. 5 ) . 2 4 , 98
15. 7 · - • 51 1 4 ( 1 3 ). 5 . . . . 20
II C hron . 10 . . . 46 ( 1 3 ). 7 · · . . 22
5· 5 . . . 46 16 ( 1 5 ) . 6 . . . 18
6. i . . 120 E sther ( 1 5 ). 1 0 . 23, 1 02
*‫ י‬2 0 . . . 108 1. 6 . . • 57 18 . 2 ( 17 . 3) • . !5
39 . . . . 132 7 · · • 73 13 ( 17. 14) . . 80
18. i . . . 67 2. i . . • 5r 30 ( 17. 3 O . . 19
2 . . 125 17 · · - 23 44 ( 17· 46) . . 22
Index o f P assages o f Scripture 155
P salms PAGE P salms PAGE P salms PAGE
18. 5 0 ( 17. 5 1) . . 24 67. i (66. 2) . . 23 119 ( 1 1 8 ). 5 6 - · . 19
19. 3 ( 18. 4 ) · 21, 40 6 8. 12 ( 67. 1 3) . . 26 . 81, 82 • 25
20. 5 ( 19- 6 ) . . . 60 15 ( 6 7 . 16), • · 57 87 . . . 61
22. 2 0 (2 1. 2 1) . . 16 7 1 . 19 ( 70 . 21) . . 24 92 . . . 61
23 ( 2 2 ). 6 . . . . 17 7 3 ( 7 2 ). 3 ·' • · 33 120 . . . 26
2 7 ( 2 6 ). 4 . . . . 19 ( 7 2 ) . 16 . . 120 I23 . • 25 .
29 ( 2 8 ). 3 - · . . 80 ( 72O· 25 · . . 21 I32 * · • 25
32 ( 3 1 ). 6 . . . . 19 74 ( 7 3 ). 17 . • · 33 120. 4 ( 119. 5 ( . • 45
33 ( 3 2 ). 12 . .21, 40 77 . 2 (76. 3) • · 59 121 (120). 8 . . • 79
34. 2 (33. 3 ) . . . 60 7 (76. 8) . 49,60 122 (121). 3 . 2 1 , 72
35 ( 3 4 ). 14 . • · 59 7 8 ( 7 7 ) . 12, 4 3 • · 34 126 ( 1 2 5 ). i . . . 40
36. 6 ( 35. 7 ). . . 20 18 ( 7 7 . 17) • 23, 24 ( 1 2 5 ). 1 - 2 ‫ ־‬. . 29
7 (35. 8). . .2 4 ( 77; · 6 5 · • · 5° 3 - 4 ( 125. 2 - 3 ) . 24
8 (3 5 . 9 ) . • · 59 79 ( 7 8 ). 11' ; . . 20 131 ( 1 3 0 ). 3 . . · 79
37 ( 3 6 ) . i . . • . 36 80. 5 ( 79. 6) . .1 7 132 ( 1 3 1 ). 3 - 4 . . 27
( 3 6 ). 1 - 7 . . . 25 1 0 ( 7 0 . 11) . . 20 135 ( 1 3 4 ). 8 . . . 27
( 3 6 ). 2 5 . . . 62 8 1 . 3 ( 80- 4 ) • · 50 139. 8 ( 138. 9 ) . . 94
40. 4 (39. 5) - . . 40 1 4 ( 8 0 . 15) . . 6r 1 1 ( 1 3 8 . 1 2) • 59
6 ( 39. 7 ). . 1511. 16 ( 80 . 1 6, . .22 142 ( 1 4 1 ). 4 . . . 40
1 6 ( 3 9 . 14) • · 59 1 6 ( 8 0 . 1 7) . . 17 143. 4 ( 142. 3 ) . . 20
41. 9 ( 40. ί ο ; . . 24 8 2 ( 8 1 ). 3 . . . 92 144 ( 143,. 6 . . .8 0
42. 4 (41. 5) . • 9 5 n. 8 4 . 3 (83- 4) . . 62 12 . . • 50
6 (41. 7 ) . . . 84 87 ( 8 6 ) . s . . . 26 13 · . . 22
44. 8 (43. 9 ) . . . 60 8 9 . 1 0 ( 8 8 . 1 1) . . 19 !δ · · • 4°
16 ( 4 3 . 1 7 ) . . 98 3 4 (88. 3 5) . . 2 7 , 1 4 5 ( 1 4 4 ). 4 . . • 27
( 4 3 ). 2 2 . . . 25 4 5 ( 88. 47) • . 58 18 . . . 92
45. T i t l e ( 4 5 . 1) . Ill 91 ( 9 0 ). 1 6 . . . 17 1 4 6 . 4 ( 145. 5) . . 40
i ( 44. 2) . • · 37 92. 13 ( 9 1 . 1 5) . . 6 0 14 7 . 14 . . . . Π , 23
2 ( 44. 3) . . 100 94 ( 9 3 ). 15 . • 133
6 (44. 7 ) . . . 19 ( 9 3 ) . 1 7j . . . 61 P rov.
1 3 ( 4 4 . 14 ) . . 68 95 ( 94). 4 . . . 18 1. 2 2 . . . . . . 66
46. 2 (45. 3 ) . • · 15 8 (94. 9) . . . 87 29 . . . . II2
48. 1 3 ( 4 7 . 14) • · 15 ( 9 4 ;. 10 . . . 72 3. 2 . . . . • Π
49. 15 (4 8 . 1 6; . . 16 102. 3 ( 101- 4) . . 46 5. 6 . j. . . . 48
50 ( 4 9 ). 2 1 . . 121 22 (101. 23) . 40 8. 26 . . . . . 60
51. i ( 50. 3) • 8 7 , 95 103 ( 1 0 2 ;. 8 . . . 67 9. 18 . . . . • 32
4 ( 5 0 . 6 ) ‫־‬. . : 38 1 0 5 ( 1 0 4 ). 3 . . . 60 11. 12 . . . . • 15
1 6 ( 5 0 . 1 8) . . 63 ( 1 0 4 ). 18 . . . 16 13. 17 . . . . 12 n.
17 ( 5 0 . 1 9 ) . . 92 1 0 6 ( 1 0 5 /. 5 · . . 60 22. 2 . . . . . 44
53. 5 \5 2 . 6 ) . . . 20 ( 1 0 5 ). 13 . . .2 2 13 · · · . n 4
8 (52. 7) . . . 22 ( 1 0 5 ). 29 . . . 24 23. 30 . . . . • 91
55. 7 ( 54. 8) • · 59 107 ( 1 0 6 ). 3 . . . 18 25. 8 . . . • 51
58. i ( 57. 2 ) . . . 63 110 ( 1 0 9 ). i . • · 37 12 . . . . • 65
61. 6 ( 6 0 . 7) : • · Π 112 ( 1 1 1 ) . 1 . . 2 6, 5 8 26. 2 . . . . . 81
63. 8(62.9). . . 25 115. i ( 113. 2 s e c . ) 102 27. 9 . . . • 50
1 0 ( 6 2 . 11) . . 16 ( 1 1 3 ) . 18 • · 79 30. 10 . . . . . 84
11 ( 6 2 . 12 . . 60 1 1 6 ( 1 1 4 ). 2 . . . 17 14 · - · · • 51
64. 6 ( 63. 7) . . . 20 1 1 8 ( 1 1 7 ). 8 , 9 . . 35 15 · · - · . 48
1 0 ( 6 3 . 1 1) . . 60 ( 1 1 7 ). 2 2 . ‫ ·׳‬17 ) 76
66. 2 ( 65. 3) . . . 22 ( 1 1 7 ). 2 5 . • · 59 E ccl .
14 ( 6 5 . 16) . r23 1 1 9 (U S A 5 0 . . . 19 1. 8 . . . . • 115
x 2‫־‬
!5 6 Index o f Passages o f Scripture
E ccl. PAGE E cclus. PAGE Isa. PAGE
1. 9 . . . 7 ., . . 86 2. 16 ; ‫׳׳‬ACM
II3 5 · • R 5
2. 1 5. · . . 12r 12 . ■ · 44 3. 5 . . 16 .:.j
17 · · · . 81 33 · • · 52 20
* · 4*
3. 9 . . . . 61 . . 81 5. i '
39 · ·: · Σ 5 i ‫■־‬: ■ ·.
7 . 17 . . . . 67 9 . 16 . . . 36 9 . .27
10. 14 . • · 33 6· 3 * •71
11. 3 · • ‫׳‬ 45 7. 4
♦ •25
C ant. 9 · * · 59 10 . .23 .. ‫■׳‬Nii
R r-3 * · • 99 r4 · • · 55 S. 18 . .80
δ. 8 . . 12 I ' ‫י י‬ 32 · . . 45 10. 18 • * 27
6. 6 . . . · 99 1 4 . 13 . . . 51 1 3 .- 5 . . 68 ‫׳‬i
19 ‫־‬. . . 73 14 . 9 . . 89 M
1 5 . 13 ‫י‬ .* * 46 18 . . 16
W1SD. 16 . 4 · ‫י‬ ‫ י‬35 13. 5 . . . 26
‫■■׳‬M
2 . 14 . . . • 56 II . . . 48 6
‫י‬ · 45
15 · . · . 92 14 · ... - 59 1 7 . 14 . . 68 1
CO
CO
22 . . . 67 18 . 4 . .8 3 • R
• 37 . ‫י‬
12 . . . . 68 17. I I . . . 25 1 9 . i i - ‫ ־‬13 ♦ •3 4 . s
16 . . . ■ 45 19 . 2 . • -33 2 1. 16 . .8 3 T ' /.‫׳‬.;;‫■״‬
18 . . . • 54 2 0. I . . · 35 22. 24 . .6 5
4· 3 · · . • 46 21 . . . 32 25. 7 . . 67 ■ v;
4 . . . • 45 21. 3 0 ■ . . 36 26. 3 . . 26
5 · ‫־‬ ‫ן‬ . 49 22. 3 · ■ . 45 2 8 . 1 0 - ‫ ־‬13 • · 52
. :A;i
5 . 11 . . . • 54 23. 5 . . . 46 16 . . 17
8. 8 . . . • 54 12 ( i c • · 57 24 . . 52
9 . . . « 54 2 4 . 3 ·' * * 59 29. 2 • ‫ י‬51
10 . . . . 84 6 . ■ ■ 49 6 . . 66
1 1. 1 4 . . . • 36 31 · • - 5r 22 • •8 3
■*■· · \:jU
00
O
13. : 8 . . . . 90 26. 12 . . . 46
H
• · 49, r
13 · · · • 56 27. 19 . . . 67 31. i • 251 49
14 . . . • 52 28. 19 . . .48 4 . . 25
14. 9 . . . . 91 29. 21-2 • * 45 32. 6 V 115
21 . . . . 48 25 · • · 33 10 N H l ■ .fl
24 . , . • 71 3 2 . 15 · . . 50 3 3 . 19 . ..';it a r v - 4 6 . .!
15. 8 . . . . 6r 33. 6 . . . 52 34. 13 • · 5 r ·;' .‫ד־‬
18. 4 . . . r12 21 . . . 21 35. 7 ■. ■ 4 5 /A m
19 . 6 . . . • 52 3 6 . 19 . • 44 36. 6 ♦ ;■ >‫ ׳‬. · 2 5 ■ ,^ ■ m i
12 . . . • 54 39. 23 · • · 45 3 S. 21 • . 33
20 . . . • 51 40. 23 · . . 74 39. 6 . 1 17
41. 5 · . 95 η . 40. 2 : .1 5
4 3 . 13 · · 33 41. 7 • · 50
•
‫׳‬
■‫· ׳‬..1
s
E cclus. 4 4 . 19 · . .8 4 22 . ■ 15
Pro]. . . . . 70 45. 9 · · 3 4 ‫ ־‬4 2 . 13
• . · 44 ·• ■1
1. 17, 18, 2 6 . • 45 ir . . 112 44. 9 • 119 ‫״‬. 11
39 · · . ♦ 67 4 G. 2 0 . 8 0 , 1 12 4 5 . 14
3.34 · · . ■ • 45 4 8 . 16 . . 13° 23 . . 23 * . I
4 . 13 . . . * 45 5 0 . 21 . . 1 30 40. 8 • 95 n * ■1
21 . . . 67 51. 25 · * •51 49. 6 . . 20 Λ§
33 ‫־‬ . · 33 n· 32 . . . 59 8 • · 95
5. 4 . . . . 44 1. 9 · . r32 53. i . 116 ' 1
■■■■ .·.«I
17 · . · • 45 17-23 - ‫ ־‬92 I I - ‫ ־‬12 . .‫ ׳־‬6 3 ‫־‬
.,,.,if
• ?‫! ׳‬
Index o f Passages o f Scripture ' 157
Isa. PAGE PAGE Dan. PAGE
54. 4 . . . . . .81 ; 4. 28 . . . 58 14. 5 - I2 3
5 · - • > ." 3 7 34 · . 46 8 . • 25
55. 7 . . . . . 24 6. 7 . • 50
56. 5 . . . . . 21 21 . • 47 H o s.
59. 7 . . • · 45
· ■ 2. 14 / · « !δ
6 5 . 17 . . . . . 15 E zek. 3. 5 . . 26
22 . . . . . 22 9. 15 - 1 12
66. 2 . . 1. 3 . • .83
• · · 59 16 . IIO
4 · • · 94 10. 12 .
3 . · • · •51
13 . • - 65 r13
II . . • · · 50
. . . 27
3. n - 1 5 • . 56
23 . · Joel
0. i . • ■‫־‬. 8 3
1‫״‬ 3 . 66
6 . ‫ · ·׳‬59
4
·
·
Jer. 9. 9 . . :. 6 r • 95
. 100 7 · . 20
1. 13 . . 10. 4 .
. . . 16
13.
8 . .8 9
17 · · • . : 25 i r . • · 49
h i , 15 . .6 6 17 · • 59
6. 9 . . • · 132 20 . .6 3
1 4 . 4, 7 . . 26
2 1 . 17 2. 3 . • 99
, 8.
11.
12
19
.
.
.
.
• . 13 a
24. 6
,
.
132
.2 6
8 . • 59
• · · 55
12. 2 . . . . . 92 21 . . 26 13 · ‫ י‬49
21 . . 24
12 . . . . . 21 28. 15 54, 1 3 0 . 61
- . 13. 3 .‫־‬ - . . .83
OO . , 60 27 *
17. 5 · · • . ·IS 32. 10 • 25 A mos.
;20. 8 . . • 35. 8 37
' 21. 13 . .
· I O3
37. 3
•
12 1 2· 9 - . . 89
• . · 45 3. 4 ·
• 22. 2 7 . . . . . 22 10 • 61 • · 73
4. 2 .
2 6 . 11 . . • · · 55 38. 23 . 60
5. ii .,
• 1 17
. IIO
3 1 . ‫־‬1 2 , 15 . . . 102 3 9 . 15 • 45 7. 3, 6 2 5 ,1 0 2
' . 31 · · . . II7 4 0 . 44 32, 85
17 · . . 60
' 32 * . • · . 37 44. 20 . 66
34 · · . . . 16 4 6 · 1 4 , 15 26. 8 4
O b a d . ( A b d .)
3 3 . 22. . . . . . 60 47. 5 . · 52 1. 12 . . . , 24
: 3 6 !.. 7 . . . . . 22
38k 4 . . . . 12* D an. J on.
43. 9 . . . · 32 1. 8 . . . . I24 1. 3 · • · 35
49. 14 . , . . . II5
2. 34 ‫י‬ · • · I30 II . • 117
20 , . . . . . 27
3, 32 . . . . . 8 8 3. 3 · . . 9 7
5 0 , 1 7v . . . . .5 0
53 · - . . .49 IO · 25, 9 °
51. 17 · · • · · 45 . . .47 - 4. 2 . • · 35
:. 5 2 . 2 1 '·‫· ׳‬. . 94 · ·
. . . 46 4. 5 2, 6, 9 . 102
. . , . · 130
24 · · . . . 90 8 . 124
;:La m . . ' - 6. ί ο .. . . . . 85 10 . • • 9 °
1. 2 v . . • . . 23 17 · · • - •7 9
20 . . . . 121 Mic.
3 . 7 ,' ·‫י‬ - • · . 51
4. . 2 2 . · . • ‘ · 59
22 . . . . k 63 2. 5 . . 18
7. 3 . . , · ■ ‫ס ל‬ 8 . . roo
7 . · . . . 92 12 . • · 23
B aruch 10. O # ■ . . 65 3. i . • · 93
2 · ,4 . :· :. . 102 11. 36 . ., . . . 60 " 2 · . 100
3 . 23. 1 3 . 12 . . . . - 71 : 3 · ‫ז‬ · 51
!5 8 . Index of Passages of Scripture
Nah. PAGE II M a c c . page M atthew PAGE
1. 12 . . . 66 4. 38 . . . . I27 5. 26 . . .66
15 · · • 23 5. 10 ............................... 49 28 · ·
* •83
2. io . ' . • 46 2r . . . . I2I 3 4 , 36 . . 86
6. 12 ............................... S I 39 · .‫ ;׳‬127
H ag. 29 ................................61 6. 1 . 61, 126
2. io . . . 67 7 . 19 . . . . 121 5 * . 104:
8. 16 . . . . 124 7 · . ; 2r
Z ech . ( Z a c h .)
9 . 10 ................................61 8 . . 97 η .
1. 14 . . .
3. 10 . .
•3 6
. 16
12 ................................92 9 · . ■ 109
11. 4 ............................... 6 3 10 . . .62
8.
9.
2
6
..
.
.
.
v 36
10 • . . . .90 II . • · 49
• 45 . . . . 1 25 12 .
13. 6 . . * •5 8
14. 13 . .
• 5°
. 16
1 2. 21 ............................. 1 *5 17 · . 109
; 24 . . . . 125 18 * . ΙΟΙ
13. 4 ............................... 93 26 .
Mal. ■ · 67
12 . . . . 1 25 27 .
1. 6 . . . 72 • 1‫ז‬3
H . . . . 125 34 · . . 8g
2. 5 . . . 26
15. 8 . . . . 125 7. 1 . . 106
I Macc. Ο # . .60
1. 21 , . .5 8 Matthew 9 · . .82
23 . . . 46 1. i i ............................... 95 15 · . . 25
2 · 54 · · • 36 17 ................................8 3 23 · . 120
3. 3 - - • 34 18 . . . . 109 25 * . I O5
14 . . . 60 19 ............................... 56 8. 8 . . .89
52 . . . 84 20 . . . . 108 19 . . . 79
5 . 41 . . •85 21 . . . . 104 20 . • · 59
61 . . 12 i 23 ............................... 77 23 * • · 39
6. 51 * . .46 25 . . . . 130 32 * . . 86
29 . . . 49 . 2. 2 ............................... 3 8 34 · 34, ‫ ז‬24
7.- i . . • 94 6 ............................... 6 6 9. 5 · • · 74
8. 9 . • 65 9 . . . . 130 6 . * · 39
9 . 10 . . 119 13 . I T2 , 113, 130 13 · . 122
•3 7 · · *5 4 14 . . . . .97 15 · I 17 Π .
64 . . 100 16 . . 45, 8 8 n. • 16 . * •5 7
'10. 72 . . 122 3. 9 . . . . .85 28 . . . 64
78, 87 . • 35 10 ............................... 8 3 36 . . . 25
11. 10 . . 119 12 . . . 52, 9 6 38 · . 124
28 . . 125 14 . . 9 7 n, 1 0 4 1 0 . 15 * . . 91
13. 20‫׳‬ . • 33 15 ............................... 58 22 . . . 91
14. 9 . . • 34 17 . . . . . 80 3I * . . 97
10 . . 132 .4 . 2 . . . . . 97 32 · . . 19
15. ‫ו‬3 . . . 44 ‫י‬ 3 . . .. . 126 42 . • 1 15
. T5 · ‘ · .94 II . . . 9 0 , 104 11. 1 . • · 39
16 , 4 . \ · 44
21 . . . . . 93 II . 6 7 , 11 r
. 24 ............................... 55 17 · • •5 9
II M a c c. 5* 3 . . . . .96 23 · . .61
2. 3 . · 125 6 . . . . .81 26 . . .84
5 · . 61 8 . . . 30, 96 12. 1 . • · 57
3. .6 . . 102 17 . . . . 12 r 12 . . . 61
30 · . . 61 20 . . 1 0 4 , 1 31 16 . . 126
4 ·. 3 4 . ? · 132 22 ............................... 37 23 · . . 63
Index of Passages 'of:Scripture 159‫׳‬
Matthew page M atthew ■ PAGE Mark PAGE
1 2 , 31 • . 95 2 2 . 13 · · • · ' · 58 1 . 15 5 9 , 81
44 . . 66 30 . . . . .•91 16 ‫־‬6 6 , 6 9
46 23. 2 . . . . .,14 27 . , 70
·‘ ‫ ־‬37
13. 9 . 1 12 24 . . . . . 51 29 . Ill
25 . . 52 26 . . . . . . 69 35 . . 68
27 . . 62 31 · · . . . 91 2. 2 . . 61
28 . 126 37 · ·■ . . .89 4 . ro2
■ * 32 . . 68 24. 2 . . . . .89 10
• · 39
35. . · 58 6 . . • · · 55 20 . 1 17 n.
5r • . 63 9 · ·■ ■ ‫■־‬ · 9r 23 1 18, 1 1 9
53 12 . . • . * •7 8 26 . !02
• 1 .Σ 9
14. i * * 95
22 . . . . . 2r 3. 9 . 1 26
■■ 7 . 10.8 23 * * . . .61 19 . 128
16. • 97 n * 35 · · • · •5 8 20 . .61
22 . . 88 38 · · . . 1 16 >9 • . 25
25 • . 97 39 · · • . 130 '4. 4 . .84
15. 4 . . 23 40 . . • 68, 73 10 • · 57
14 • · 45 2 5 . 10 . . . 114, 1 30 .* 5 . . 84
24 • •9 4 20 . . • 5 2 , 130 24 . . 60
32 • · 75 3 5 · • · · 57 33 . . 61
33 . . 92 40 . . • · 132 40 . . 70
1 6 . 12 • 113 26. 8, j o . • · · 73 5 . 10 • 125
21 • . 70 9 · · . . .96 13 . . 66
22 . 104 12 . . • · 113 ‫ ז‬4 • 103
17 . 5 • · 72 15 · · . . 118 18 • 105
15 • •3 7 23 . . . . I OI 26 . . 68
22 104, 1 14 42 . . > · · 34 35 · · 93
18. ‫ז‬ . · 63 53 · · . . . 90 43 .· !27
8 9 8, 107 54 · · . . . 62 6. 8 . 1 26
9 35>5° j98. 55 · · • ·. . 8 3 16 . . 76
ΙΟ - •5 8 63 · · . . . 86 34 ■ 25, 9 0
1I • 105 65 . . . 60, 97 51 . . 67
21 . .62 69 . . . . .80 56 125, 128
34 • 133 72 . . . . 120 7. 5 ; /86
19. , 8 . .83 2 7 . 13 . . , . ; 1 23 23 . . . 68
12 . 1 27 14 . . • · * 83 8. 2 25 , 9 0 , 1 0 3
16 • · 94 19 · · . . I OI 22 . 124
20. 2 . 100 38 · · • 68,73 33 . . 69
■3 » 5 , 6, 9 · . .84 42 . . . . 103 38 36, 6 0
6 • · 73 43 · · • · •5 8 9. 7 . . 68
19 . I 12 44 · · . . . 72 29 * •7 3
24 . I OO 46 . . • 73) 8 4 34 • •70
25 • * 36 49 · · . I l l , 1122 4° · ‫ ״‬5
21. 3 • •9 7 50 · · . . Ill 1 0. 32 . . 70
7 • · 23 51 . · . . . 69 42 ♦ * 5r
8 • · 75 2 8 . 19 . . . . I OI 11. 2 60, 94
19 . .80 3 . 97 ‫ ת‬.
3T • ■ 74 Mark II . . 66
42 . . 76 1. 4 . . • · · 95 13 . .8 7
22. 4 • · 47 5 · · . . . 94 18 . . 25
10 • · 37 7 · · . . .40 22 * · 95
!6 0 Index of Passages of Scripture
Mark P A GE L uke • PAGE L uke PAGE
12. i • · 55 2 . 12 • •6 5 9 . 13 · · • • !32
3r • · 35 *3 • · 75 19 · · ‫־‬ · · 79
* .32 . . 87 16 • .65 38 . . • . 126
40 . 102 25 . .48 54 · · ‫י‬ . 126
42 . . 80 29 • •5 8 10. I . . • · · 38
13. i . 1 24 41 . . 86 13 · · • . . 81
11 . . 52 49 • · 93 19 . . . 104, 112
13 . . 91 3. I . 102 21 . . • 6 3, 8 4
49 . 128 Η • •5 7 29 . .
• * r1 9
. 25 . n o 19 • · 76 31· · • 5 8 , 1 19
: 35 • 122 4. 4 3 ■ 78» 8 3 34 · · . . . 56
U. 5 • · 96 18 · .63 3.6
. · • · •9 4
6 -· .89 35 36, 9 0 38.... . . 118
14 . . 56 41 . 12 ‫ז‬ 40 . . • 84, 9 r
21 . . 29 5. I . 118 11. I I . . . . .36
25 . 104 3 . 126 28 . . . . . 63
27 • · 38 6 . 104 31-2 . . . . 97
33 5 9 j 81 10 . n o 44 · ‫׳‬ . . . 88
43 • · 55 12 . 118 49 · · • · .62
48 • · 55 24 • · 39 5r · · • . . 6r
54 . . 68 25 . 102 12. I . . . . n o
63 . 6 0 , 9 7 11. 38 ‫־‬ • *'S 5 ‫· ־‬ . . . 61
15 . 4 . 123 6. r • 5 ° ! n o , 1 19 10 . .. . . .89
6 . 1 04 6 . 118 32 .· y : . · ‫־‬ · 59.
24 . 123 12 9 5 , ! 19 38 . . . . . 97
25 . 118 16 • · 93 41 . . . . . 62
34 • · 73 18 • · 98 44 · · • . .88
43 . n o 20 . .89 47 · · . . .87
‫־‬ 44 . 1 23 33 • •6 3 48 · · . . . 76
1 6 . 18 ‫״‬ · 36 34 198 50 . . • · . 62
38 . . 60 13. 4 . . . . . 87
L uke 39 • .85 9 · · • ‫·״‬ · 30
1· i . .63 48 ·,'‫ ־‬, 8 9 15 · ■ . . . 65
3 68, i n 7. I I • ■419. 33 · · . · 3 9 , 59
, .6 • · 55 32 • •5 9 14. I . . . . 118
'8 . 119 39 8 5 , 123 8 . . . . IIO
9 . 1 19 42 . . 74 12 . . • · •5 2
13 . 104 49 • . 85 14 · · . .. .38
15 . . 60 8. I . 118 15 . 7 · · .‫ ■ ׳־‬.· · 67
21 no, 1 34 5 ‫·־‬ · 69 12 . . * · · · 56
25 . .38 18 . 12 1 14 . . • · r 34
3r . 104 22 . 118 16. I . . • · 132
33 . 103 28 . 125 26 . . . . ior
42 . .21 31 . 1 24 17 . 2 . . . . . 67
5r • · 71 33 . . 86 4 · · . . . 80
53 . .97 40 . 119 22 . . . 1 1 7 n.
59 . I O4 43 • · 56 29 . . . 59, 80
72 • · 95 47 . . 62 18 . 4 · · • · 131
2. 6 • •82 49 . 120 10 . . • · · 73
7 5 9 , 65 56 7 3, 126 12 . . • ‫י‬ • 58
10 • · 77, 9. II • •9 7 19. ! δ · · • · 123
Index o f Passages o f Scriphtre 161
L uke PAGE John PAGE John PAGE

19. 29 . . . . .93 5. 6 . 103 IS. 39 • · 93
31‫ י‬34 . . ‫ ־‬. η 97. 39 . 121 19. 19 . . 89
3‫· ל‬ • . 93j j io 6. 10 . . 96 24 . 106
43 ‫· י‬ . . 117,118 20 . 106 25 • · 93
44 · . . . 134 22 . . 88 27 . . 89
48 . . . . 123 43 . . 70 32 . . 68
04
‫ס‬
. . . .23 66 . I ΙΟ
Μ
20. 3‫ ־‬4 • · 79
*3 · • · . .23 71 • · 93 12 . . 47
20 . . . . . 82 7· 4 . Ι Ο Ι 15 . .49
21. 14 . . . . . 62 14 5 0 , 59 25 . 104
17 · .-·■ ....... . 91 17 • 105 21. 2 . IΙ Ο
20 . . . . 121 24 . . 82 3, ΙΟ . 3 8 , 67
38 .. • · 3 6 , 5r 35 • · 95 12 - Ι Ι .Ο .
22. 4 · . . . . 62 49 . . 76 23 • 10 3
15 . ■ ·■ ‫ · · ■ ■ ״‬23 8. 9 . <. . ., . 86
!9 . . . . . 72 23 . . 69 A cts
23 · . . 7 0, 122 28 . . 72 1. 2 . . 9ο
25 . . . . . 36 44 . 105 3 86, 9 °
49 · . . . .21 50 . 127 4 5 1, 126
23. 6 . . . . 123 58 • 133 8 ‫· ־‬ · 35
8 . . . . 108 9. 4 . 130 24 . . 74
12 · • ‫־‬ · • 83 5 . 132 2. 3 . . 88
16 . . . . . 58 18 . 130 17 . ΙΟΟ
23 . . . . 125 25 . 1 2.2, 24 . . 63
33 · . . . 4 η . 39 . . 79 27 2$, 102
53 · . . . ΙΟΙ 10. 8 . 128 . 30 . 130
55 · . . . . 62 16 . 4 ‫ת‬. 31 . 102
56 . . . . .5 8 22 • - 32 37 57» Ϊ 0 6
24. io .. • . . •9 3 33 . 100 4P . . 60
15 . • · · 1 30 1 ί · 39 . . 49 4^ . . 16
22 . . .: . .6 3 12. 5 . . 96 42 . . 77
23 * . ‫־‬y . . 82 29 ·’ · 37 45 . . 61
48 . 127 46 . . 84
John 13. 5 • · 77 47 . •7 2
1. 1 / . . . . 78 13 . , 62 3. 2 • 1 °4
6 . • . 9 r » 127 2‫ד‬ . . 67 3 105 η .
12. . . . . 128 14. 2 • 13 3 II • •7 3
IS · • Λ · · 97 ‫־‬ 4 . 122 12 107, 132
17 · • : . •9 5 22 . . 79 15 • · 64
21 . ·, · · •6 3 24 . . 76 19 . .81
27 · . . . .21 26 . . 82 4. 9 • •9 5
48 . • · · 133 1 5 . 17 7 0 , 72 13 98, 120
2 . 21 . . . . . 93 16 . 2 . . 99 16 1 06 η .
4. 2 . . . . 134 12 . -3 8 17 - · 61
II . . . . 128 !3 • · 77 18 . .61
*3 · . . . 104 Γ5 . 127 19 . Γ 22
15 · • - · •8 3 17 . . 70 21 . 109
30 - . . . 104 19 . . 7o 32 . Ι Ι Ο
47 · . . 105 η . 18. ι . 8 η . 34 . 128
52 - . . . . 68 20 . Ι Ο Ι 5. 4 . 109
53 . . . . 127 37 . . 62 7 . . 118
2C42' Y
!62 'Index o f Passages of Scripture
A ctsCO PAGE A cts PAGE A cts PAGE
12. 16 · 39 2 2 . 17 . IOI
‫זע‬
• - 63 •
. . 94 18 57, 85 22 7 1 , 73
*4
24 . . 63 13. i r 8 3 bis 28 • . 96
30 • · 55 28 . 124 2 3 . 21 • I07
. Γ 28 29 • · 55 26 - . 68
37
42 . .84 35 • · 23 27 • 1 05
6· 3 . . 89 43 • 125 34 . 122
10 • · 73 14. 7 . . 96 24. 3 . . 68
II . 1 28 II . .71 10 . . 70
. .8 4 . . 82 16 • iOI
13 19
7 . 18 22 . 125 25. 6 . 101
· r32
20 . . 21 23 - 105 10 . . 67
22 • 5° n . 15. 7 • •3 5 16 • * 93
14 . . 62 19 . . 71
23 • · *5
26 28 . . 94 22 • 104
• · 90
33 . 102 3r . 130 23 • · 54
10 n, 5 6 16. 6 39, 66 26 . 128
35
40 . 1 9 n. 13 ·■ .69 26. 3 . 125
42 • .58 24 • · 55 7 . 108
46 . 124 . .94 29 84,107
25
51 62, 9 6 28 94, *°7 3r • · 73
. 130 . . 61 27. ο 1 0 5 n.
55 37
60 . 106 38 . . 98 4 . . 52
8. i . . 87 . 124 7 . ,85
39
2 . .48 17. *5 . . 67 10 . 1 04
S O, 6 3 22 J .67 14 . .85
11
23 . . 56 123,132 27 . .84
27
24 . 125 SI . IOI 28. 4 7 7 , 10 9
6 2 , 107 18. ' IO 63,91 6 • 1 *3
SI
36 . 130 IS .‫י‬ . 106 13 • * 5*
■ · 91 14 . 126
9· 3 • 130 I7
8 . .83 1 9 .' 3 ‫־ ־‬4 . IOI 16 . . 92
. .20 12 ■■· .47 17 . . 84
15
. .72 16 . i n
1 5 - • 16
20 . 1 20 27 8 9, 105
21 • · 83 . 124 R omans
31
I . i n 1. 90, 95
23 • I3O 20. 9
. . 94 10 . .61
38 • · 5 1■ 7
10. 16 . .8 6 10 . Ill 20 . 9 n.
11 . Ill 26 • · 93
17 • 130
18 • 123 20 . 133 2. 5 49, 101
22 . . 66 24 . . 62 19 . .82
. 1 12 . . 67 21 • 1 *3
33 35
. 1 12 21. 62, 6 9 26 . . 89
38 5
6 . .89 27 . 109
39 • · 55
II . . 92 3. 3 . .58
47 • · 77
11. 19 . 102 20 . 123 16 • . 45
. . 96 . IOI 20 . .21
23 24
12. 9 • 10 3 . 122 30 . . 63
33
13 . 14 η . 39 . 126 4. I I • · 93
. Ι Ο Ο 22. 3 . . 16 13 ■‫־‬ * 94
14
Index of Passages of Scripture 163
R omans PAGE I C or PAGE I C or. PAGE
4. 20 ‫ ׳‬5 5 ‫ ל‬96 1. i . .78 12. 6 . . . I27
5. I . 106 II • · 93 13 · . . . 67
6 . . 88 29 . . 21 22 . . . . 66
7 . 106 2. 8 • 73 n. 25 · . 7 2 , IOI
12 . 102 9 • · 15 3r · 57, 6 0 , 1 10
15 ) 1 9 . .7 8 3.3,4 6 3 , 130 13. I , 2 . . 129
17 . 109 4. 3 . 1 18 I ff. • · 4 n.
18 ‫־‬ · 95 4 . . 91 12 , . . . 83
6. 5 • · 51 7 . 129 11. I . • · · 57
13 . . 90 5 . 10 61,■ 64 IO . . . . 63
7. I . 128 II . . 61 12 . . . 126
2 • •9 5 6. i . .84 I4 · . . 129
18 V 1 ° 7 ;7 ./ . 2■ . . 100 20 . . . . 96
8. 3 9 4, 100 3 • •5 7 2 3 -4 . . 129
7 . . 91 I Γ • · 72 26 . . . 129
10 . . 87 12 . 10 2 27 · . 86, 88
II . . 87 16 . . 20 35 ‫־‬ • · 105
13 . 104 18 • •8 5 39 · • · · 57
23 • 93 *9 • · 76 ‫ ־‬1 0 . 5‫ ־‬8 . . .9 0
27 . . 88 7· 5 . . 72 9 · • ‫· ־‬ • 94
29 • · 49 7 . . 62 15 · . . . 84
33 . . 84 9 . . 9[ 25 · . .· 131
34 . 128 10 . . 82 27 · . 87, 1 3 0
9. 3 • 194 14 . . 61 29-30 • · · 73
6 107, 133 17 • 132 32 . . 88, 106
9 . . 91 34 . . 96 37 · • · . . . . 63
20 63, 128 36 . . 50 44 · . . . 129
10. O • •5 8 46 . . . .61
• . 95 39
18 . . 62. 8· 5 6 3 ? 1 2 7 , 131 52 · ·, ' · r°3
11. 31 • · 72 - 13 '. 129 53 · . . 1 12
33 48, 9 6 9. 7 . . 96 16. 2 . . - . 84
12. I • 12 5 9 1 4 , 92 12 . • · · 57
15 . 108 12 . 129 21 ... • · · 72
16 70 , 72 bis,■ 84 16 . 129 s .. ■
19 . . 92 17 . 129 II C o r .
i 3. 3 . . 92 18 . 101 1. 8 . . 81,88, 107
8 . . 90 21 • 133 18 . . . . . 63
11. 5 • · 85 25 . 1 12 2. 2 . . . . ■ 128
I I • · 23 1 0. 13 ‫־‬ · 77 12 . . . . . 87
22 . . 86 16 . .76 I7 . . . . . 78
15. I • · 67 17 . 100 3. I . . . . . 49
4 7 2 , 94 29 • · 73 5 · • · · 133
5 . . 70 11. 2 • · 95 18 . . . . . 96
‫ ז‬19 . . . 86 • 14 . .91 4. 6 . . . . .96
22 . 108 15 91, I OI 13 · . . . . 87
24 . ■ 108 20 • . 39 16 . • 7 1 , 8 7 , 13 r
27 . . 62 22 • · 63 17 · . . 88,94
16. 8 6 8 , 1 10 25 . . 72 5. I . . - 93» 1 2 9
16 . . 70 26 • 131 2 . . . . . 52
17 • · 87 SI . 129 4 · . . 52, 102
25 . . 97 32 . 130 5 · • . · · 93
Y 2
164 Index o f Passages o f Scripture
II C o r . PAGE G al. PAGE P hil. PAGE
5. 6 . . . 98 3 . 15 . . . 52 1. 12 . . . 85
7 . . . 86 16 . . .76 15 ·- - ' . 87
16 . . . 63 19 . . . 61 18 • 62, 130
J9 * . - 63 21 . . . 62 21 . . 107
20 • · · 39 4. 4 • · 133 22 . . 107
6. i • · •5 7 16 . . . 91 23 . . . 67
' 15 . . . 66 5. η • · · 94 24 . . 107
7. 8 80, 1 3 1 bis 24 • · · 93 30 . . 128
i r . 6 3, 107 6. i . . . 64 2. 6 . . . 130
12 * 114 , 13r ir . . 124 9 . . . 89
8. 9 ♦ . ..· 13° 12 • - · 94 12 . . . 69
19 . . n o • · .107 17 . . . 88
14
24 . . . 16 1d . . .85
9. i . . 100 3° . . .85
Eph.
4 • * 133 3. 4 • · 13 4
1. 5 . . .89
5 . . n o 8 . 64, IIO
6 • 5 9 , 64
7 . . 100 13 . . .82
TO . . 112 ‫ ־‬15 • 39, 8 r 16 . . 108
19 . . n o
*4 . . i n 4. i . . n o
21 . . . 56
10. 2 . . 124 10 . ‫ד‬ . .61
2. 2 • 1 9 , 55 OO
4 . . . 21 . ·. 100
3 . . . 96
5 • · · 95
4 . . .87 C ol,
13 . . . 90
8 . . . 96
16 . . . 88 1·. 4 . . . 81
3. i . . I 10
11. 6 . . 13t O 9 • 39. 125
. . 129
21 . . . 88 29 . . 112
3 . . lot
23 . . . 67 2. 5 . . I3I
6 . . . 49
26 . .‫־‬ . 94 15 • ‫־‬ . 56
8 48, 9 4 , 107
28 . . .87 18 . . . 95
15 . . .78
12. 2 . . .84 23 • 83, n o
*9 . . i n
3 . . .85 3· 5 • · · 95
20 . . .89
6 . . .68 4 . 18 . . .72
4. i . . IIO
T3 . . 100
8 . 56, 82
15 . . . 52 I T h ess .
12 . . .83
20 • * · 55 16 8 9 bis, 9 5
1· 3 '· · . . .9 4
13. 3 . 19? 7 6 8 . . 97 n.
18 . . . 98
4 . · 1 31 2· 3 . . . 99
21 . . 129
II . . 100 5 . . IOI
28 97 n , 112
7 9 1, 98, 133
5. 6 • 55, 89
Gal. 3. 5 . . 114
8· 3 . . . 68
1. i o . . Γ 29 13 . . .84
6 . - .83
15 . . 129 4 . 13 . . 109
12 . . .84
. J7 . . . 72 17 . . .61
16 . . . 68
23 . . Γ 12 »· 3 • · 130
17 . . . 76
2. 2 • · · 57 14 • . .83
21 . · •85
3 . . 130
5 . . . 61 II T h e s s .
6 . 81, 123 P hil. c 1. 1 0 . . . . . 90
13 . . . 79 I. i • · · 65 2. 4 • · 1 33
16 . . . 21 io . . . 89 5 • · •5 8
3 . 13 • 5 5 , 94 n . . . 97 7 • · 133
Index of Passages of Scripture , 165
II T h e s s : PAGE H ebrews . PAGE H ebrews PAGE
3. 9 . 72, I3 2 1. 4 . I OO 11. i . . . n o , 1.14
17 . · · . . 72 8 . . 19 4 · · · . .68
2. I • .5 2 6 . . . .·' 12 r
I T im. ‫ו‬ 7 21, 8 9 7 · · · . . 60
1. 1 0 . . . . . 49 13 . . 80 9 · . . . i r2
. IO9 16 • .63 ir . . . . .87
13 - · ·
17 . . ‫־‬ . .8 9 17 • · 5* 13 · · . . . 88
19 . . . S O, 8 4 18 • · 71 21 . 12 n, 7 1 η , 109
2. 8 . . . . . 82 a. 3 . I OO 27 . . . • · 54
. I OI 12 . 11 2 34 · · · • :9 9
v 14 - · ·
j 5 * ‫ ־‬79 12. 2 . . . • · 54
3. 5 - ·■ * ·; 9 5
12 . .· ■ ;.:..■ .‫ י‬. . 65 18 . 108 8 . . . 6 2, 8 5
4. 3 . ‫׳‬ · 91, 1 08 : 4. 3 '· · 39 II . . . 6 8 , 93
15-16 . . . IOI 6 • · 62 12 . . . . no.
5. i r . . . . 105 7 8 8 , 1 12 I7 . . . • 134
69, 87 II 58, ‫ ל‬2 18 . . . . .48
15 . · ·
‫־‬ 18 . . . . . 92 12 • •5 5 28 . . . . 109
23 . . . . . . 60 IS . 128 13. 3 · · · . n o
6. 2 . . . . . 82 5. 2 .‫־‬ 128 8 . . . . . 72
4 . . . . . 84 7 . 128 14 . . . . n o
17 . . . 94, 112 12 . .87 16 . . . . . 60
20 . . . 6. 8 . . 92 21 . . . . 128
• · 93
9 68, n o
10 • •9 5
II T im . James
H 23. 132 1. 8 . . . . . 96
1. 9 . · . • · 57
12 . . . 39! 86
7. 5 • 134
8 . n o 13 · · · • · 95
2. 6, . . . . lo g 16 . . . 68, n o
13 . . 92
12 . . . • · 51 19 . . . . n o
14 . 118
' 26 . . . . 9 ‫ ״‬. 26 . . . . I2I
15 . . 60
a. 16 . . . . 112 2. 4 · ‫־‬ · • · 93
21 . . ho
4. 1 . . . . . 82 5 · · ‫׳‬ 6 8. n o
23 . 108
3 · · · . . 96 12 . . . 1 0 5 n.
8. 4 . 128
4 . . . • .63 , IS · · · . 129
16 . . . . 106
7 9 5 , 97 . 129
8 117, 118 I7 · · ·
3. 5 . . . . 124
13 - · 51 IO . . . . . 72
Titus 9. I ' · •5 7
1. 2 . . . II . . . • · 59
• · 57 3 . . 86
. . 86 15 · · · . IIO
5 · · · 8 ■· · 52
. . 86 4. 8 . . . . . 96
13 · · · 10 • · 93
2. 6 . . . 5 . 11 . . . . . 81
• 125 17 ,. .61
a. 10 . . . 12 . . . • .63
• · 53 24 . 102
14 · · . • · 73
26 • · 74 16 . .r . . . . 70
P hilemon. 10. 5 . 15 η .
17 ·'b · . . 80
1-25 - - . 9 0 n. 9 . .68
5 ‫י‬ · · . . 81 10 . .6 9
II . . . . . 92 16 . I 12 I P eter '
16 . . . . . gi 22 . . 82 1. i . . . • •9 4
19 . . . • 133 24 • · 95 3 · · · . . 52
20 . . . 6 1 . 106 25 9 3 , 109 II . . . - 123
oo , . . • • 90! 33 . 68 2. 1 . . . • · 55
166 Index of Passages of Scripture
I P eter PAGE ’ I J ohn PAGE i A poc. PAG E
2. 7 · . . 76 2· 3 ‫־‬ • · 73 4. I I .
• · 39
12 . . . 56 17 · . . 76 5. 0 _
• · 39.
1 8 ff. . IO9 3. i . . 124 6. 4 . I9, 22
19 . ■ · 95 8 . • · 73 .8 . I 9j 22, 06
3. 3 . . .46 16 . • · 73 7. 4‫ ־‬5 . . I9
9 · . 100 4 . 10 . • 132 8. 7 · . . 94
21 . 5 5 » 93 19 · . . 62 9 . • · 19
22 . • •5 6 20 . . 120 9. 10 . • 92 ‫ ת‬.
4 . 12 . . .58 5 . 16 . . 12r 13 · • . 80
r4 · . . 21 15 · . .8 9
16 . • * ‫ ל‬3 II John 10. 9 · • · 50
5. i . • .4 8 83, 8 6 1 1, I · - . r9
r3 ·
6 . • . 56 2 . - . 69
r3 . • •5 0 6 . . . 80
III J ohn
13. 10 . . .6 1
4. ‫־‬ . .72
II P eter
83, 108
11 . . 92 η .
1. 2 .
14 · 14. 6 - 7
. 106 . . 19
3 · 62, 96 8 .
• · 59
J ude
5 · - · 52 19 · * · 55
. . 92 13 . 5 1 , 54 16. 10 .
9 ‫י‬ • . 5·1
14 * • · 55 18 . . 128
12 . . 109 A poc. 19. 2 . . Ι Ο Ο
21 . . . 61 1. 4 . . . 16 6 . . . 66
2· 3 - • •9 9 13 ·‫־‬ • • 83· 8 . . . 76
. ■5 · . . 68 2. 1 3 · • · 19 10 . . . 72
io . ‫־‬ . 87 16 . • 133 *7 · . . 80
14 . • .48 21 . 595 81 21. 16 . 8 6 , 9 9 ,1 2 8
15 · . 100 3. 9 . 2 3, r o o 17 · . .60
22 • •7 9 12 . 19, 2 2 27 . • •7 3
3. 5 · . 109 !‫ל‬ · • 97 ‫ ת‬. 22. 8 . • 134
6 . . . 62 18 . . 126 II . . .6 0
( 16 . · ‫ז ג‬5 ■ 4. 6 . 20 . 6 3 , 72
Corrigenda
Page 30, 1. 16, f o r M a tt. 5 , 6 read M a tt. 5 , 8.
Page 47, 1. 3, f o r b u c e l l a read b u c c e l la .
Page 59, 1. i r , after A p o c . 14, 8 add ( s o m e M S S .).
Page 80, I. 6 fro m b o tt o m , f o r 9 read 6.
P r in t e d in E n g la n d
A t the O x f o r d U n i v e r s i t y P r e s s
B y John John son ‫־‬
P r in t e r to the U n iv e r s it y

A Grammar of The Vulgate (BW New OCR and Margin Cropped - 19 Jan 2017 For All PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

A Grammar of The Vulgate (BW New OCR and Margin Cropped - 19 Jan 2017 For All PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

A GRAMMAR

1 Philologischer Kommentar zur Peregrinatio Aetheriae; von E. Lüfstedt,

IN D E X OF LATIN W O R D S ............................................ . . 143

§ 1. The title on the Cross, in its threefold language—

A s to the need and method of his revision of the Gospels,

1 The same expression in the Praefatio in losuc‫״‬

1 See the prefatory letter of ‘ The translators to the reader’ in our

§9. If, in considering the latinity of the Vulgate, we set

§10. Transliteration of Hebrew proper names. Here

Most names in -eshaveacc.

but is more often indeclinable, the cases being expressed by

rendered 4in ferrum uenit anima eius ’, and the L X X

petii a Domino, hanc requiram ’ Ps. 27 (26). 4 ; cf. c pro

§ 21. The Plebrew Cognate Accusative is frequently

through the Greek, ‘ in gladio’ L k. 22. 49 ; ‘ seruite

§ 29. O th e r v e r b s . T h e fo llo w in g v e rb a l con stru ction s,

§ 31. E m p h a s is is p ro d u c e d b y r e p e titio n : ‘ seru abis

§ 32. R e p e t it io n w it h P r e p o s it io n s : 4m ensis e x m ense et

1 W e s t ill s a y ‘ fo r e v e r a n d e v e r ’ in the D o xo lo gy to th e L o r d 's P r n j‫׳‬e r ;

§ 33. T h e influence o f G re e k on L a t in b egan at an e a rly

In the letters an d treatises o f C ic e ro the num ber w as

S im ila r instances are found in M k . 14. 21 ; A c t . 1. 1 -5 ,

§ 35. T h e sam e e x p la n atio n co v ers irreg u la ritie s su ch as

§ 39 . G re e k r e lig io u s term s : an ath em a, a p o sta ta , a z y m a ,

§ 41. M ore frequen t than a d je c t iv e s : e. g. a p o sta ta re

§ 42 . A sp ecial class o f verbs consists o f th ose derived

1 A gon izari (o r ■ are) d o c s n o t o c c u r in t h e V u lg a t e N . T . , a n d o n ly o n c e

§ 44 . A g r e e m e n t : (d) g e n d e r. T h e pronoun som etim es

§ 45 . P la c e n a m e s . T h e prep, in is found w ith n am es

§ 4 6 . Positive fo r Comparative, w ith quam = η : £ bon u m

(C o n stru ctio n fo llo w in g the G reek .)

§ 47. (a) Verbs taking accusative.

§ 50 . H e re G re e k is n earer than classica l L a tin to

(e) In fin itiv e a ft e r capere : 4non cap it prop h etam p e r ir e 5

§ 51. T h e V u lg a t e follow s the G re e k in u sin g th e

§ 52. T h e A b la t iv e A b s o lu te is used lo o se ly instead o f

§ 53. T h e G eru n d w it h in is freq u en tly used to ren d er

§ 54 . T h e R e la t iv e is freq u en tly fo llo w ed b y a re«

§ 55. C h ristian la tin ity , th ou gh from one point o f view

§ 58 . T h e sp e llin g h ere a d o p te d — at least as far as

§ 59 . V o w e ls . A : con sp ersio , p arap sis. A E : ce e lu m ,

§ 60 C o n so n a n ts.2 B ra^ iu m , o j t u l i ; eotidie, sim u la -

1 S e e th e Edio'o Minor, H a r d e n , Dictionary of the

§ 61. A s s im ila t io n . T h e te n d e n cy o f th e later M S S . is

E s p e c ia lly as seen in th e lengthening o f terminations.

§ 62 . M a s c u lin e : (n) A g e n ts in - sor , V 07q th u s (of G o d )

C lassical term w o u ld be eques, w h ich a lso o ccu rs freq u en tly

§ 64 . N e u t e r : (z) In stru m en tals in -men, -mentum:

§ 65 (zzz). D im in u tiv e s in -idus, -ellus, -illus, etc., and

§ 68. (p) C o m p o u n d n o u n s. T h e V u lg a te , and still

1 S o th e 1st S u n d a y a f t e r E a s t e r w a s c a l le d Dominica in albis, b e ca u s e th e

§ 69 . T h e V u lg a te is rich in a d je ctiv e s, e s p e c ia lly

§ 70 . O th er a d je ctiv e s in -lis a r e : h y b e rn a lis, o rigin alis,

§ 71. V e r b a ls in -atus, situs', ceru icatu s E c c lu s . 16. 1 1 ,

§ 73. T erm in atio n s in -anus, -cites, -intis, -ostis, e t c .:

§ 74. A d je c t iv e s co m p o u n d ed with in- an d re -. N e g a ­

§ 75. A d je c t iv e s co m p o u n d ed w ith p rep o sitio n s :

§ 76. A d je c t iv e s com p ou n d ed w ith other w o r d s : an im ae-

§ 77. P a rtic ip le s used as a d je c t iv e s 1 : ben ed ictu s, b e n e ­

§ 78. (a) S im p le : b u llire Job 41 . 22 (cf. It. b o llire, F r.

1 T h a t is , u sed to exp ress state n ot action, u sed as e p it h e t s n o t a s

§ 81. V e r b s in -ficare. T h e se verb s form a sp ecial class,

and th ough th ey are found in both T estam en ts y e t th e

§ 74. A d je c t iv e s co m p o u n d ed with in- an d re -. N e g a

§ 77. P a rtic ip le s used as a d je c t iv e s 1 : ben ed ictu s, b e n e

§ 105. P assin g over th e th ree C o n co rd s, w e need c o n

fallin g un der a n y p a rticu la r h ead (this is c la s s ic a l) : ‘ tran s

§ 1 1 9 . Present tense. T h e H isto ric Presen t is co n

§ 122. Perfect . T h e L a tin P erfect in clu d es both co m

§ 128. (1) T h e P a r t ic ip le is u se d , in ste a d o f th e In fin i

uobis non resistere m alo ’ M t. 5 . 39 ; ‘ d ix it d ari illi m a n d u